Actix a solution user guide

Document Sample
Actix a solution user guide Powered By Docstoc
					'A' Solutions
User Guide
Copyright

            Actix 'A' Solutions User Guide
            August 2003 edition


            Copyright © 2003 Actix Limited. All rights reserved.
            All trademarks are hereby acknowledged.
            MapInfo and MapInfo MapX are registered trademarks of
            MapInfo Corporation.
            Microsoft, Excel and Windows are either registered
            trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
            United States and/or other countries.
Contents
Preface ......................................................................................................................17
     USING THE ONLINE HELP ..............................................................................................................17
     CONVENTIONS USED WITHIN THE TEXT ..........................................................................................17

Analyzing data with Actix Solutions ......................................................................18
     USING ACTIX SOLUTIONS .............................................................................................................18
     MANAGING DATA .........................................................................................................................18
     VISUALIZING DATA .......................................................................................................................20
     ANALYZING DATA.........................................................................................................................20
     OPTIMIZING NETWORKS ...............................................................................................................21
        Application Layers..............................................................................................................21
        CDMA Toolkit.....................................................................................................................21
     FREE (AD HOC) DATA ANALYSIS ....................................................................................................21
        Free analysis of CDMA data ..............................................................................................21
             The interface for A Solutions .......................................................................................22
             Configure CDMA network information .........................................................................22
                       Import CDMA network information ....................................................................................22
                       Set a CDMA network information file.................................................................................24
                 Load CDMA data files..................................................................................................25
                 Find and use CDMA data in the Workspace Explorer..................................................25
                       CDMA Event Detection .....................................................................................................27
                             CDMA Event Technical Reference.......................................................................................... 28
                 Delete CDMA data files ...............................................................................................31
                 View CDMA summary data..........................................................................................31
                       Table view .........................................................................................................................31
                       The Message Browser ......................................................................................................32
                 View CDMA data .........................................................................................................33
                       View CDMA data in the Map window ................................................................................34
                       Replay the CDMA data......................................................................................................35
                       View CDMA data in StateForms........................................................................................35
                       Print the CDMA data .........................................................................................................37
                       View CDMA data in the Chart window...............................................................................38
                       View synchronized CDMA data.........................................................................................41
                 Generate CDMA reports..............................................................................................42
                 Configure Maps ...........................................................................................................44
                       Map backgrounds and layers ............................................................................................44
                             MapInfo layers ......................................................................................................................... 46
                       Show lines to cells on a map.............................................................................................47
                 Network Imaging..........................................................................................................48
                       Create a Network Image ...................................................................................................49
                       Batch-load CDMA data files ..............................................................................................50



Actix A Solutions User Guide                                                                                                                    Contents 3
           CDMA pre-configured reports......................................................................................52
                 CDMA Drive Test application layers..................................................................................53
                       CDMA Summary Reports ........................................................................................................ 53
                       CDMA Cluster Optimization..................................................................................................... 54
                       CDMA Distant Server Analysis................................................................................................ 54
                       CDMA Event Inspection .......................................................................................................... 54
           CDMA StateTip............................................................................................................54
           CDMA Toolkit ..............................................................................................................55
           Integrate reverse and forward link data .......................................................................56
           Aggregate CDMA data ................................................................................................57
           Use Queries.................................................................................................................58
                 Create a filter.....................................................................................................................59
      Free analysis of GSM data.................................................................................................61
          The interface for A Solutions .......................................................................................61
          Configure GSM network information............................................................................62
                 Import GSM network information.......................................................................................62
                 Set a GSM network information file...................................................................................64
           Load GSM data files ....................................................................................................64
           Find and use GSM data in the Workspace Explorer....................................................65
           Delete GSM data files..................................................................................................66
           View GSM summary data............................................................................................67
                 Table view .........................................................................................................................67
                 The Message Browser ......................................................................................................67
           View GSM data............................................................................................................68
                 Viewing GSM data in the Map window ..............................................................................69
                 Replay the GSM data ........................................................................................................70
                 View GSM data in StateForms ..........................................................................................71
                 Print the GSM data............................................................................................................72
                 View GSM data in the Chart window .................................................................................73
                 View synchronized GSM data ...........................................................................................75
           Generate GSM reports ................................................................................................76
           Configure Maps ...........................................................................................................77
                 Map backgrounds and layers ............................................................................................77
                 Show lines to cells on a map.............................................................................................79
           Network Imaging..........................................................................................................81
                 Create a Network Image ...................................................................................................81
                 Batch-load GSM data files.................................................................................................82
           GSM Application Layers ..............................................................................................84
                 GSM DT Design Validation and Quick Analysis ................................................................86
                 GSM DT Handover Settings & Power Control Analysis ....................................................86
           Integrate uplink and downlink data ..............................................................................87
           Aggregate GSM data...................................................................................................88
           Use Queries.................................................................................................................88
                 Create a filter.....................................................................................................................89
      A and Abis analysis............................................................................................................90
          Using Actix PCM Link Scenarios .................................................................................91
          Using user-defined analyses .......................................................................................92
          Developing user-defined analyses...............................................................................92
          Choose A or Abis Scenarios........................................................................................92


4 Contents                                                                                           Actix A Solutions User Guide
            The Statistics Explorer.................................................................................................93
                  Abis Call Analysis..............................................................................................................94
                  Filter the Workspace Explorer ...........................................................................................95
            Superstream PCM Link/Drive Test data ......................................................................95
            GSM A and Abis pre-configured reports......................................................................96
                  GSM A application layers ..................................................................................................96
                        A General Analysis .................................................................................................................. 96
                        A Handover Analysis ............................................................................................................... 96
                        A Subscriber Analysis.............................................................................................................. 97
                  GSM Abis application layers .............................................................................................97
                        Abis Quick Analysis ................................................................................................................. 97
                        Abis Balance and Sensitivity ................................................................................................... 98
                        Abis Network Design ............................................................................................................... 98
                        Abis Traffic Handovers and Failures ....................................................................................... 98
       Free analysis of GPRS data...............................................................................................99
           Choose Gb Scenarios ...............................................................................................100
           Examine Gb Load Time Queries ...............................................................................101
           Load Time Queries in each Scenario ........................................................................102
           Analyze GPRS Drive Test data .................................................................................104
           Map DT files lacking GPS data..................................................................................105
           Gb pre-configured reports..........................................................................................105
                  GPRS Gb application layers............................................................................................105
                        GPRS Gb Signaling Analysis ................................................................................................ 105
                        GPRS Gb Throughput Analysis............................................................................................. 106
       Free analysis of IS-136 data ............................................................................................107
           The interface for A Solutions .....................................................................................107
           Configure IS-136 network information .......................................................................108
                  Import IS-136 network information ..................................................................................108
                  Set an IS-136 network information file.............................................................................110
            Load IS-136 data files................................................................................................110
            Find and use IS-136 data in the Workspace Explorer................................................110
            Delete IS-136 data files .............................................................................................112
            View IS-136 summary data........................................................................................113
                  Table view .......................................................................................................................113
                  The Message Browser ....................................................................................................114
            View IS-136 data .......................................................................................................115
                  View IS-136 data in the Map window ..............................................................................115
                  Replay the IS-136 data....................................................................................................117
                  View IS-136 data in StateForms......................................................................................117
                  Print the IS-136 data .......................................................................................................118
                  View IS-136 data in the Chart window.............................................................................119
                  View synchronized IS-136 data.......................................................................................121
            Generate IS-136 reports............................................................................................122
            Configure Maps .........................................................................................................123
                  Map backgrounds and layers ..........................................................................................123
                  Display IS-136 network information.................................................................................125
                  Show lines to cells on a map...........................................................................................126
            Network Imaging........................................................................................................127
                  Create a Network Image .................................................................................................127



Actix A Solutions User Guide                                                                                                             Contents 5
                      Batch-load data files........................................................................................................128
                TDMA pre-configured reports ....................................................................................130
                      Use an application layer ..................................................................................................130
                      TDMA application layers .................................................................................................133
                            TDMA Summary Reports ...................................................................................................... 133
                Integrate uplink and downlink data ............................................................................133
                Aggregate IS-136 data ..............................................................................................134
                Use Queries...............................................................................................................135
                      Create a filter...................................................................................................................136
          Free analysis of iDEN data ..............................................................................................137
              The interface for A Solutions .....................................................................................137
              Configure iDEN network information .........................................................................138
                      Import iDEN network information.....................................................................................138
                      Set an iDEN network information file...............................................................................140
                Load iDEN data files..................................................................................................140
                Find and use iDEN data in the Workspace Explorer..................................................140
                Delete iDEN data files ...............................................................................................142
                Table view .................................................................................................................142
                The Message Browser...............................................................................................143
                View iDEN data .........................................................................................................144
                View iDEN data in the Map window...........................................................................144
                Replay the iDEN data ................................................................................................146
                View iDEN data in StateForms ..................................................................................146
                Print the iDEN data....................................................................................................147
                View iDEN data in the Chart window .........................................................................148
                View synchronized iDEN data ...................................................................................150
                Generate iDEN reports ..............................................................................................151
                Map backgrounds and layers.....................................................................................152
                Display iDEN network information .............................................................................154
                Network Imaging........................................................................................................155
                      Create a Network Image .................................................................................................155
                      Batch-load iDEN data files ..............................................................................................156
                iDEN pre-configured reports ......................................................................................158
                      iDEN Drive Test application layers..................................................................................160
                            iDEN Summary Reports ........................................................................................................ 160
                            iDEN Event Inspection........................................................................................................... 160
                Aggregate iDEN data.................................................................................................161
                Use Queries...............................................................................................................161
                Create a filter.............................................................................................................162
                Key fields...................................................................................................................164
                Required fields...........................................................................................................164
                Other fields ................................................................................................................164

Workspaces............................................................................................................165
     ABOUT WORKSPACES ................................................................................................................165
     ABOUT THE WORKSPACE EXPLORER ..........................................................................................166



6 Contents                                                                                                 Actix A Solutions User Guide
     ABOUT BINNING DATA ................................................................................................................169
     USE WORKSPACES ....................................................................................................................170
     OPEN A DATA FILE .....................................................................................................................171
     IMPORT A TEXT FILE ...................................................................................................................171
     RUN AN ANALYSIS ON THE DATA ..................................................................................................173
     SHOW A MENU OF ATTRIBUTE OPTIONS ........................................................................................173
     VIEW AN ATTRIBUTE IN A DATA WINDOW .......................................................................................174
     USE THE REPLAY CONTROL .......................................................................................................174
     VIEW A DATA STREAM IN THE MESSAGE BROWSER .......................................................................174
     VIEW THE RESULTS OF A QUERY .................................................................................................175
     EXPORT DATA TO A FILE .............................................................................................................176
     MERGE DATA STREAMS ..............................................................................................................177
        Superstream PCM Link and Drive Test data....................................................................178
     USE LOAD TIME QUERIES ..........................................................................................................178
     WORKSPACE TOOLBAR REFERENCE ............................................................................................179
     PREFERENCES DIALOG ..............................................................................................................179

Viewing data ...........................................................................................................185
     WORKBOOKS/REPORTS .............................................................................................................185
       About workbooks..............................................................................................................185
       Display data attributes in a workbook...............................................................................186
           View Series data in a workbook.................................................................................186
           View Histogram data in a workbook ..........................................................................187
           View Statistic data in a workbook ..............................................................................187
       Save a workbook/report ...................................................................................................188
       Open an existing workbook/report....................................................................................188
     CHARTS ...................................................................................................................................189
        About charts.....................................................................................................................189
        Display data in a chart window.........................................................................................190
        View data synchronized with the chart .............................................................................191
        Zoom the chart view.........................................................................................................191
        Pan the chart view............................................................................................................192
        View a different chart type................................................................................................192
        Print the chart...................................................................................................................192
        Edit the chart....................................................................................................................193
        Export the chart to other applications...............................................................................194
            Chart toolbar reference..............................................................................................195



Actix A Solutions User Guide                                                                                                  Contents 7
   MAPS .......................................................................................................................................196
      About maps......................................................................................................................196
      Display attribute data on a map........................................................................................198
      View data synchronized with the map ..............................................................................199
      Move around the map ......................................................................................................199
      Zoom in and out ...............................................................................................................200
      Select map objects...........................................................................................................200
      Measure distances on the map ........................................................................................201
      Add annotations to the map .............................................................................................202
      Remove annotations from the map ..................................................................................202
      Show and hide map data .................................................................................................203
      Alter the map legend range..............................................................................................203
      Change the number of ranges in the legend ....................................................................203
      Customize each range in the legend................................................................................204
      Change the attribute style setting.....................................................................................205
      Change the attribute font..................................................................................................206
      Combine data attributes on the map ................................................................................206
      Control map layers...........................................................................................................206
      Add a map file ..................................................................................................................207
      Add a raster map file ........................................................................................................207
      Control attribute labels .....................................................................................................208
      Edit a layer's display properties........................................................................................208
      Offset the data on the map...............................................................................................208
      Choose the map projection ..............................................................................................209
      Change the map units ......................................................................................................209
      Display the map scale ......................................................................................................209
      Display the cursor latitude and longitude .........................................................................210
      Display cell sites on the map............................................................................................210
      Display lines to cells.........................................................................................................211
      Print a map.......................................................................................................................213
      Copy a map to the Clipboard ...........................................................................................214
      Export a map as a bitmap ................................................................................................215
      Export the legend as a bitmap .........................................................................................215
      Export layers as TAB files ................................................................................................216
      Troubleshooting maps......................................................................................................216
            How do I display a map background?........................................................................216
            How do I display network graphics on the map? .......................................................216
            How do I load a bitmap into a map? ..........................................................................216
            How do I display cell sites on the map?.....................................................................217
            How do I display lines to cells?..................................................................................217
            How do I display cell coverage for all cells on the map?............................................217
            How do I display more information about my cells on the map?................................217


8 Contents                                                                                        Actix A Solutions User Guide
            How can I display the LAC distribution of my cell sites?............................................218
            How can I view multi-layer or multi-technology cells?................................................218
            How can I view sector azimuths? ..............................................................................218
            How can I correct the displayed lines to cells? ..........................................................219
         Map dialog reference .......................................................................................................220
            Page Setup dialog .....................................................................................................220
            Print Setup dialog ......................................................................................................222
            Print Map dialog.........................................................................................................223
            Properties dialog........................................................................................................224
            Label Properties dialog..............................................................................................226
            Display Properties dialog...........................................................................................227
            Raster Image Registration dialog ..............................................................................228
         Map toolbar reference ......................................................................................................229
            Annotations toolbar reference....................................................................................230
            Area Select toolbar reference ....................................................................................230
            Map Layout Designer toolbar reference.....................................................................231
   SITEDATA VIEWER ....................................................................................................................231
       Filtering data ....................................................................................................................233
   TABLES ....................................................................................................................................234
      About Tables....................................................................................................................234
      Display data attributes in a Table.....................................................................................234
      View Series data in a Table .............................................................................................234
      View Histogram data in a Table .......................................................................................235
      View Statistics data in a Table .........................................................................................235
   MESSAGE BROWSER .................................................................................................................236
      About the Message Browser ............................................................................................236
      Display data in the Message Browser ..............................................................................236
      Synchronize with the Workspace .....................................................................................237
      Find text in the Message Browser ....................................................................................238
      Set and remove bookmarks .............................................................................................238
      Move between bookmarks ...............................................................................................238
      Remove all bookmarks.....................................................................................................239
          Filter messages in the Message Browser ..................................................................239
      Format messages in the Message Browser .....................................................................240
          Export messages to the clipboard .............................................................................240
      Message Browser toolbar reference ................................................................................241
   PROTOCOL STACK BROWSER.....................................................................................................242
      Using the Protocol Stack Browser....................................................................................242
      Searching in the Protocol Stack Browser .........................................................................243
   STATISTICS EXPLORER ..............................................................................................................245
      About the Statistics Explorer ............................................................................................245



Actix A Solutions User Guide                                                                                                 Contents 9
          Open the Statistics Explorer.............................................................................................246
          Check for existing queries................................................................................................247
          Manipulate data in the Statistics Explorer ........................................................................247
          Filter the Workspace data ................................................................................................248
          Generate a substream .....................................................................................................248
          Statistics Explorer toolbar reference ................................................................................248
     STATEFORMS ...........................................................................................................................249
        Use StateForms ...............................................................................................................249
     CDMA STATETIP ......................................................................................................................251
       About CDMA StateTip......................................................................................................251
       Start CDMA StateTip........................................................................................................252
       Change the view ..............................................................................................................252
       Change the handset source .............................................................................................253
       Change the scanner source .............................................................................................253
     CDMA TOOLKIT........................................................................................................................254
       About CDMA Toolkit.........................................................................................................254
       Optimize Search Windows ...............................................................................................255
           About Optimize Search Windows Analysis ................................................................255
           How the Search Window Analysis works...................................................................256
              Configure Settings (Search Windows)..................................................................258
       Optimize Neighbor Lists ...................................................................................................258
           About Optimize Neighbor Lists Analysis ....................................................................258
              Configure Settings (Neighbor Lists)......................................................................260
       Evaluate Coverage...........................................................................................................261
           About Evaluate Coverage Analysis ...........................................................................261
           Using Evaluate Coverage..........................................................................................263
              Configure Settings (Coverage).............................................................................264
       Optimize Multiple Carriers................................................................................................265
              Configure Settings (Multiple Carriers) ..................................................................265
     GSM MISSING NEIGHBOR ANALYSIS ..........................................................................................266
       Running the analysis........................................................................................................267

Querying data.........................................................................................................269
     ABOUT THE ANALYSIS MANAGER ................................................................................................269
        About query types ............................................................................................................271
     ABOUT LOAD TIME, FULL LOAD AND MINIMAL LOAD .....................................................................273
     CREATE A CROSSTAB QUERY ....................................................................................................274
        Tips for writing Crosstab Queries .....................................................................................275
        Crosstab Query example .................................................................................................277
     CREATE A BINNED QUERY .........................................................................................................279


10 Contents                                                                                     Actix A Solutions User Guide
          Binned Query example.....................................................................................................280
    CREATE A FILTER QUERY ..........................................................................................................282
       Filter Query example........................................................................................................283
    CREATE A HISTOGRAM QUERY ...................................................................................................285
       Histogram Query example ...............................................................................................286
    CREATE A STATISTIC QUERY ......................................................................................................288
       Statistic Query example ...................................................................................................290
    CREATE AN EVENT QUERY.........................................................................................................292
       Event Query example.......................................................................................................293
    BUILD AND EDIT EXPRESSIONS....................................................................................................297
    EDIT AN EXISTING QUERY ...........................................................................................................298
    DELETE AN EXISTING QUERY ......................................................................................................299
    IMPORT A QUERY .......................................................................................................................300
    EXPORT A QUERY ......................................................................................................................301
    SET AS LOAD TIME QUERY .........................................................................................................301
    SET THE LOAD MODE ................................................................................................................302
    SELECT ONE OR MORE LOAD TIME QUERIES ................................................................................302
    SELECT A SCENARIO .................................................................................................................303
    CHANGE THE NAME OF A QUERY .................................................................................................303
    TROUBLESHOOTING QUERIES ....................................................................................................303
       How do I display only newly activated sites? ...................................................................303
    ANALYSIS MANAGER REFERENCE ...............................................................................................304
       Analysis Manager dialog ..................................................................................................304
            New Analysis tab .......................................................................................................304
            Existing Analysis tab..................................................................................................304
       Crosstab Query Wizard....................................................................................................304
       Binned Query Wizard .......................................................................................................304
       Filter Wizard.....................................................................................................................305
       Histogram Wizard.............................................................................................................306
       Statistic Wizard ................................................................................................................307
       Query Window Definition..................................................................................................307
       Filter dialog ......................................................................................................................308
       Event Query Wizard .........................................................................................................308

Archiving data using Network Images.................................................................309
    ABOUT NETWORK IMAGING ........................................................................................................309
    CREATE A NEW NETWORK IMAGE FILE..........................................................................................310


Actix A Solutions User Guide                                                                                             Contents 11
    ATTACH AN EXISTING NETWORK IMAGE FILE .................................................................................311
    BATCH LOAD DATA FILES ............................................................................................................311
    LOAD STREAMS FROM THE WORKSPACE EXPLORER TO A NETWORK IMAGE ....................................312

Network Explorer ...................................................................................................313
    ABOUT NETWORK EXPLORER .....................................................................................................313
       Use the Network Explorer ................................................................................................314
       Import network elements from a file .................................................................................315
    NOTES FOR GSM USERS ...........................................................................................................318
       Create a new element ......................................................................................................318
       Leave the Network Explorer.............................................................................................319
    NETWORK EXPLORER REFERENCE..............................................................................................319
       Network Explorer toolbar reference..................................................................................319
       Custom Import Wizard .....................................................................................................320
          Template Import Settings dialog ................................................................................320
          Template Column Settings dialog..............................................................................321
       New Element Values dialog .............................................................................................322
    DEFAULT IMPORT TEMPLATES ....................................................................................................322
       CDMA template................................................................................................................324
       GSM template ..................................................................................................................325
       IDEN template..................................................................................................................326
       IS-54 / IS-136 template ....................................................................................................327
       WCDMA template ............................................................................................................328

Custom Attributes..................................................................................................329
    ABOUT CUSTOM ATTRIBUTES ......................................................................................................329
    INSTALL CUSTOM ATTRIBUTES ....................................................................................................329
    USE CUSTOM ATTRIBUTES ..........................................................................................................329
    CREATE CUSTOM ATTRIBUTES ....................................................................................................330
       The Custom Attribute tag .................................................................................................330
       The CDATA tag................................................................................................................332
       Example Custom Attributes..............................................................................................333
           Four_sec_bad_qual.caf .............................................................................................333
           Aglnt_CW_RSSI.caf ..................................................................................................334
           iDEN_Handover.caf...................................................................................................335

Appendix A – File formats supported ..................................................................336

Appendix B – Creating StateForms......................................................................339
         Create a new StateForm ..................................................................................................339


12 Contents                                                                                  Actix A Solutions User Guide
         Using the Sheet Manager ................................................................................................341
         Creating Time Charts .......................................................................................................342
         Creating Scan Charts.......................................................................................................355
         Actix expression syntax & examples ................................................................................359

Appendix C – Expression Builder function reference........................................361
   FUNCTIONS ..............................................................................................................................361
      abs ...................................................................................................................................361
      abstime ............................................................................................................................361
      add...................................................................................................................................361
      and...................................................................................................................................361
      array_count ......................................................................................................................361
      array_find_index...............................................................................................................362
      array_max ........................................................................................................................362
      array_max_index..............................................................................................................362
      array_mean......................................................................................................................362
      array_min .........................................................................................................................362
      array_min_index...............................................................................................................362
      array_nth_max .................................................................................................................362
      array_nth_min ..................................................................................................................362
      array_stdev ......................................................................................................................362
      bin ....................................................................................................................................363
      bin_index..........................................................................................................................363
      default ..............................................................................................................................363
      delta .................................................................................................................................363
      divide................................................................................................................................364
      equals ..............................................................................................................................364
      eval ..................................................................................................................................364
      event_before ....................................................................................................................364
      event_message................................................................................................................364
      event_time .......................................................................................................................364
      geoinvprojectlat................................................................................................................364
      geoinvprojectlon...............................................................................................................365
      geoprojectx ......................................................................................................................365
      geoprojecty ......................................................................................................................365
      get....................................................................................................................................365
      greater_than.....................................................................................................................365
      greater_than_or_equal.....................................................................................................365
      if .......................................................................................................................................365
      is_not_equal.....................................................................................................................365
      less_than..........................................................................................................................366


Actix A Solutions User Guide                                                                                                 Contents 13
         less_than_or_equal..........................................................................................................366
         log ....................................................................................................................................366
         log10 ................................................................................................................................366
         message ..........................................................................................................................366
         mod..................................................................................................................................366
         mround.............................................................................................................................366
         not....................................................................................................................................367
         NULL................................................................................................................................367
         or......................................................................................................................................367
         power ...............................................................................................................................367
         prev_message_where......................................................................................................367
         prev_state ........................................................................................................................367
         prev_time_where..............................................................................................................368
         product .............................................................................................................................368
         round................................................................................................................................368
         rounddown .......................................................................................................................368
         roundup............................................................................................................................369
         row ...................................................................................................................................369
         set ....................................................................................................................................369
         state .................................................................................................................................369
         subarray_nth_max ...........................................................................................................369
         subarray_nth_max_index.................................................................................................370
         subarray_nth_min ............................................................................................................370
         subarray_nth_min_index..................................................................................................370
         sum ..................................................................................................................................370
   STATISTIC DIALOG .....................................................................................................................371
   BINNING SETTINGS ....................................................................................................................372
   THE DATE TYPE ......................................................................................................................373

Appendix D – FSD reference for custom attributes............................................374
   OVERVIEW OF FSD AUTOMATION MODEL.....................................................................................374
   FSD OBJECT ............................................................................................................................375
      IAxdFSD_DataStream......................................................................................................375
      IAxdFSD_Message ..........................................................................................................377
      IAxdFSD_AttributeValueList.............................................................................................378
      IAxdFSD_AttributeValue ..................................................................................................378
      IAxdFSD_Attribute ...........................................................................................................379
   ENUMERATIONS ........................................................................................................................380
      Stream Types...................................................................................................................380



14 Contents                                                                                         Actix A Solutions User Guide
          Message Text Formatting Flags.......................................................................................380
          Statistic Types..................................................................................................................380
          SuperStream Methods .....................................................................................................381

Index........................................................................................................................382




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                                                                             Contents 15
16 Contents   Actix A Solutions User Guide
Preface
Using the online help
                         Showing the contents panel
                         From the Help window, click the Show button           to open
                         the left hand contents panel. To close the contents panel,
                         click Hide . If you are not sure where your current page
                         is in the help file structure, click Locate     and the
                         appropriate topic title is highlighted in the left hand panel.

                         Favorite help pages
                         From the Help window, click the Favorites tab to show a
                         list of stored help pages. This is empty at first, but if you
                         click Add, the current help page is added to the list.

                         Back to the start
                         To return here, click Home      . To return to the last page
                         viewed, click Back .

                         Print
                         Click Print    to print the selected page or all pages in the
                         selected heading.



Conventions used within the text
                         Words in bold mean that you can select the item—for
                         example, ‘click Cancel’ means ‘click the Cancel button’.
                         Words in italics mean that the item in italics is a unique
                         part of the interface—for example, the Map window.
                         Menu | Command – for example, File | Open is short for
                         ‘from the File menu, select Open'.
                         Ctrl+A means that you hold two keys down at the same
                         time—‘Ctrl’ and ‘A’ in this example.
                         Alt,V means that you press and release one key (‘Alt’),
                         then press another key (‘V’).
Analyzing data with Actix Solutions
Using Actix Solutions
                             Actix 'A' Solutions post-process cellular network data, and
                             can load network performance data from many different
                             sources, including field-test equipment and switch call
                             traces. The data could be a one-off test, or part of a planned
                             series of samples to build up an image of overall network
                             performance. Once the data is loaded, a variety of analysis
                             tools and displays provide a clear view of network
                             performance for engineers, technicians or operations
                             management staff.
                             The 'A' Solutions address a wide range of applications,
                             including:
                                    •    Network performance optimization
                                    •    Feature testing
                                    •    Service validation
                                    •    Problem diagnosis and analysis
                                    •    Network bench-marking
                                    •    Competitive analysis
                             Various reports are provided within each Solution for these
                             applications; however, your A Solution can also be used in
                             free or ad hoc analysis mode, where you can use the
                             various tools within the Solution to investigate any message
                             or attribute of interest within your logged data.

Managing data
                             Network configuration data
                             You can easily import cell site data and key configuration
                             parameters from planning tools using the Network
                             Explorer, which provides a link to all network data.




18 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                        Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               Import data
                               You can load log files from all supported data collection
                               formats (see Appendix A – File formats supported on page
                               336). However, if your data collection device is not
                               supported, you can import the data as an ASCII text file
                               using the text file import wizard. Note that, in general,
                               loading small files results in increased performance, and
                               loading large files results in decreased performance.

                               Minimal Load for PCM Link files
                               PCM Link data files can be sizeable, so A Solutions allow
                               such files to be loaded with a relevant subset of data. The A
                               Solution must be switched into Minimal Load mode for this
                               to work.

                               Batch processing and data storage
                               The Network Image data import facility allows you process
                               multiple data files at the same time. The results of single or
                               multiple analysis sessions can be saved for network trend
                               analysis.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                        Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 19
Visualizing data

                                     Problem
 1   Manage the data                            Open data files
                                                Import text files
                                                Batch-load data


 2   Filter the data                            Filters
                                                Workspace Explorer
                                                Favorites



 3   View the data                              Maps, Charts, Tables, Workbooks
                                                Replay, Synchronized data views
                                                StateForms, Statistics Explorer
                                                Message Browser

 4   Record results                             Print workbooks, maps, charts
                                                Save workspace
                                                Export as text file

                                     Solution




Analyzing data

                                     Problem
 1   Manage the data                            Open data files
                                                Import text files
                                                Merge data files
                                                Batch-load data

 2   Find problem areas                         Analysis reports
     using top-level pre-defined                CDMA StateTip
                                                CDMA Toolkit
     reports                                    Histograms, Tables

 3   Isolate problem areas                      Filters, Queries
     using ad hoc methods to drill              Workbooks, Message Browser
                                                Synchronized data views
     down into the data                         Statistics Explorer

 4   Record results                             Print workbooks, maps, charts
                                                Save workspace
                                                Export as text file

                                     Solution




20 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions              Actix A Solutions User Guide
Optimizing networks
       APPLICATION LAYERS
                               Each solution provides a set of pre-configured reports, each
                               concentrating on a particular type of network analysis.
                               These ‘application layers’ distil advanced analysis
                               techniques into simple, comprehensive spreadsheet reports,
                               ready for immediate use by staff of all levels of experience.

       CDMA TOOLKIT
                               The CDMA Toolkit utility provides a task bar designed to
                               automate key CDMA optimization tasks. A familiar task-
                               based layout allows you to quickly perform these tasks:
                                      •   Search Window analysis
                                      •   Neighbor List analysis
                                      •   Optimize coverage areas
                                      •   Analyze multi-carrier statistics
                               The Toolkit outputs a series of web-based reports, which
                               can be saved and printed for managerial use.

Free (ad hoc) data analysis
                               The sections below describe using A Solutions for free (ad
                               hoc) analysis with different telecoms technologies. Each
                               section introduces tasks and concepts in a logical order that
                               is not necessarily the same as that described under the
                               diagram on the previous page.
                               The major technologies are described here—other
                               technologies use similar techniques but different data
                               attributes.
                               To reduce the amount of screen area taken up by this help
                               window, you may want to click Hide at the top left of this
                               window.

       FREE ANALYSIS OF CDMA DATA
                               This section describes tasks that you might take to analyze
                               CDMA log files. These tasks have been chosen to
                               demonstrate most of the basic features. Practicing these
                               will allow you to be productive as soon as possible.
                               For an in-depth understanding of Actix A Solutions, you
                               should attend a full training / workshop session, as these



Actix A Solutions User Guide                        Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 21
                               can be tailored exclusively to your needs as individual staff
                               members and for the company as a whole.

               The interface for A Solutions
                               After the startup is complete, the application window looks
                               like this:




                               The arrangement of loaded help files and data display
                               windows is called the current workspace.
                               You can save and reuse workspaces as necessary.
       You may find it useful to create one or more workspaces to act as templates for future
       work sessions. Save these to your desktop, so you can double-click them to start up with
       your preferred layouts.

               Configure CDMA network information

                       Import CDMA network information
                              As well as geographical data, it is also useful to display
                              your network information on a map window.
                               You must have your network information defined in a text
                               file (usually called ‘cellrefs’, although it can be given any


22 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                            Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                name) before you can import it. You can use the Network
                                Explorer to import, view and edit the cellrefs file.
        If you manually create a cellrefs file, you must have this as the first line:
        ;#NetworkData - datafile
        If you import the file using Network Explorer, this line is added automatically.
                                   To maximize the benefit for CDMA network analysis, the
                                   following parameters should be included in data imported
                                   into the tool.
 Parameter            Workspace Name                 Purpose
 Site Name            CDMA_Site SiteName             Text description of the Site for display on map.
 Site Number          CDMA_Site SiteID               Numeric identifier for the Site.
 Latitude             CDMA_Site SiteLatitude         Locates Site icons on map.
 Longitude            CDMA_Site SiteLongitude        Locates Site icons on map.
 Sector Number        CDMA_Cell Sector ID Can        Sector-specific information useful for display on
                      1,2,3, etc, or a combination   maps.
                      of site numbers
 Azimuth              CDMA_Cell Azimuth              Orients the sector icons on the map.
 Beamwidth            CDMA_Cell Beamwidth            Governs the shape of the sector ‘wedge’ icon to
                                                     reflect the beamwidth of antenna deployed at the
                                                     site.
 Base Station Power   CDMA_Cell EIRP                 Base station power, used in CDMA Toolkit
                                                     calculations.
 PN Offset            CDMA_Cell PN                   Used in CDMA Toolkit calculations, lines to
                                                     neighbor cells and to color sector/site icons on
                                                     maps to reflect PN planning.
 MCC                  CDMA_Cell MCC                  Mobile Country Code
 SID                  CDMA_Cell SID                  System Identity
 NID                  CDMA_Cell NID                  Network Identity
 BID                  CDMA_Cell BID                  Broadcast Identity


                                To import the network information
                                   1 From the Tools menu, select Network Explorer to
                                      open the Network Explorer window.
                                   2 From the toolbar, click Import and select Import
                                      From New Template to open the Import dialog.
                                   3 Select the appropriate network data file.
                                   4 Click Open to display the Custom Import Wizard.
                                   5 Give the Template a meaningful Description.
                                   6 Under Delimiters, check Tab.
                                   7 Under General Settings, enter ‘1’ for Ignore
                                      header rows and ‘;’ for Array (list) Separator. If
                                      your file has more than one header or uses a
                                      different array list separator, set these options
                                      accordingly.
                                   8 Click on the Column Settings tab.


Actix A Solutions User Guide                             Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 23
                                          The Column Settings tab allows you to associate a
                                          network parameter with a column of data in the text
                                          file.
                                          Note that each of the field names has an associated
                                          icon:
                                             Key fields (see page 164)
                                              Required fields (see page 164)
                                              Other fields (see page 164)
                                     9 Under the Columns heading, click on a setting for a
                                          particular field.
                                     10 Select a column binding from the drop-down list.
                                          The Wizard then displays the selected parameter
                                          against the appropriate column.
                                     11 Select the appropriate column bindings for CDMA
                                          Site and Site Name. Repeat this for the SiteID,
                                          Latitude, and Longitude.
                                     12 For the remaining columns, look for the attribute
                                          headers under CDMA Cell. Use the Cell ID column
                                          for the CDMA Cell Sector ID, Azimuth,
                                          Beamwidth, EIRP, PN, MCC, SID, NID, and
                                          BID. These parameters are described in the table at
                                          the top of this section.
                                     13 Click Finish when all the columns have been
                                          assigned. The new cell information will be added at
                                          the bottom of the existing list in the Network
                                          Explorer.
       When the cellrefs file is updated, you should use the template you have created on the
       new file, so you do not have to repeat work you have already done, including the column-
       by-column parameter assignment.

                       Set a CDMA network information file
                                 1 From the Tools menu, select Preferences to open
                                     the Preferences dialog.




24 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                          Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                     2    Click on File Location to select the cellrefs file.
                                     3    Click OK to close the Preferences dialog.
                                          You will now see this message:




               Load CDMA data files
                                 1 From the toolbar, click the Open Logfile button:


                                           This displays the Open dialog.
                                      2 Select an appropriate file.
       Files of Type defaults to ‘All Formats’ but you can select a specific file type to look for.
       This also illustrates the many file formats available.

               Find and use CDMA data in the Workspace Explorer
                             The Workspace Explorer window is a graphical display of
                             all loaded data or log files and the data structure contained
                             within each file. Loaded files are at the highest level, with
                             devices and other data streams displayed at lower levels.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                             Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 25
                                1   Click on the symbols to open out and explore the
                                    data in your logfile. See how your data relates to the
                                    structure shown above.
                                    In the example below, the file ‘MyFile1’ contains a
                                    data stream called ‘Qualcomm MDM 1900’ (the
                                    number is the data stream number within the file,
                                    starting from zero). The ‘CDMA’ group contains
                                    the ‘Pilot Sets’ set, which contains the
                                    ‘SearcherMaxEnergy’ data attribute:




                                    However, the only objects that you actually need to
                                    recognize are filenames, data streams and data
                                    attributes.
                                    The logical tree-view layout of the Workspace
                                    Explorer allows you to drill down and identify all
                                    logged data. Once you have located the appropriate
                                    data attribute, you can open it in a data window—
                                    for example, a map, chart, table or spreadsheet—to
                                    examine the data in detail. You can examine data
                                    streams using the Message Browser tool.
                                    You may also want additional information about a
                                    particular data attribute.
                                    See here for more information on CDMA event
                                    detection (see page 27).
                                2   Select 'ActiveDelay_Max1'.
                                3   From the Help menu, select Attribute Help to open
                                    the attribute help window.




26 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                      Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                  4   Click the button to dock the attribute help
                                      window and drag it to a useful position.




                                  5   Select a new attribute. Note that the help now
                                      provides information on that attribute.

                      CDMA Event Detection
                            The CDMA event detection engine identifies key network
                            events in CDMA IS-95, IS95-B and IS.2000 networks by
                            monitoring the air interface messaging. Using this
                            messaging, the engine tracks the handset’s state as it moves
                            between Idle, Origination, and Dedicated states.
                               Idle State – This is the state that the phone is in, before a
                               call is originated or received. After a call is terminated
                               through normal or abnormal means, it returns to the Idle
                               State.
                               Origination State – This is the state that the phone is in
                               after an Origination or Page Response is sent on the access
                               channel, but before the forward and reverse traffic channels
                               are active.


Actix A Solutions User Guide                         Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 27
                                 Dedicated State (Conversation) – This is the state that the
                                 phone is in, after transmission has started on both the
                                 forward and reverse traffic channels.
       The start state is the default state for all phones until an air interface message is received.
       Based on this message, the phone is immediately transitioned to the appropriate state.
       This is to account for log files where the phone is already in origination or conversation.

                                 CDMA Event Technical Reference

                                 Call Completed
                                 This attribute indicates successful outgoing call initiations
                                 triggered by the following sequence of messages:
                                         •    Origination or Enhanced Origination message
                                         •    Followed by a Service Connect or a Service
                                              Connect Completion message

                                 Call Dropped
                                 This attribute indicates abnormal call terminations triggered
                                 by the following sequence of events:
                                         •    Outgoing Call Setup OK or Incoming Call
                                              Setup OK (defined below)
                                         •    Not followed by a Forward Release Order
                                         •    Followed by a return to the Sync Channel

                                 Call Setup Time
                                 Call Setup time provides the difference in time between the
                                 Service Connect Completion message and the associated
                                 Origination, Enhanced Origination, or Page Response
                                 message.

                                 CDMA Call Id
                                 Call ID provides an integer identifier for each call in a log
                                 file.

                                 CDMA Call Type
                                 CDMA Call Type provides a description for each call in a
                                 log file:
                                 0       Outgoing Call Successfully Terminated
                                 1       Incoming Call Successfully Terminated
                                 2       Outgoing Call Failed Initiation
                                 3       Incoming Call Failed Initiation
                                 4       Outgoing Call Dropped


28 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                               Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               5      Incoming Call Dropped

                               CDMA to AMPS Handoff Fail
                               This attribute indicates failed handoff attempts for mobiles
                               handing off from a CDMA system to an AMPS system.
                               This attribute is triggered by the following sequence of
                               messages:
                                      •   Analog Handoff Direction message
                                      •   Not followed by an Extended Handoff
                                          Completion message
                                      •   Followed by another Analog Handoff Direction
                                          message

                               CDMA to AMPS Handoff OK
                               This attribute indicates successful handoff attempts for
                               mobiles handing off from a CDMA system to an AMPS
                               system. This attribute is triggered by the following
                               sequence of messages:
                                      •   Analog Handoff Direction message
                                      •   Followed by an Extended Handoff Completion

                               Handoff Interval
                               Handoff Interval provides the difference in time between
                               the sequential Handoff events.

                               Handoff OK
                               This attribute indicates handoff events for mobiles handing
                               off within the same carrier of a CDMA system. This
                               attribute is triggered by the following sequence of
                               messages:
                                      •   Extended Handoff Direction, Universal Handoff
                                          Direction, or General Handoff Direction
                                          messages
                                      •   Followed by a Handoff Completion or Extended
                                          Handoff Completion messages

                               Handoff Time
                               Handoff Time provides the difference in time between the
                               Handoff Completion, or Extended Handoff Completion
                               messages and the associated Extended Handoff Direction,
                               Universal Handoff Direction, or General Handoff Direction
                               messages.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                        Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 29
                             Hard Handoff OK
                             This attribute indicates successful hard handoff attempts for
                             mobiles handing off between carriers or CDMA systems.
                             This attribute is triggered by the following sequence of
                             messages:
                                    •    Extended Handoff Direction, Universal Handoff
                                         Direction, or General Handoff Direction
                                         messages with a Hard_Included Flag set to True
                                    •    Followed by a Handoff Completion or Extended
                                         Handoff Completion message in response to the
                                         previously identified Direction message

                             Hard Handoff Retry
                             This attribute indicates a retransmission of a hard handoff
                             command for mobiles handing off between carriers or
                             CDMA systems. This attribute is triggered by the following
                             sequence of messages:
                                    •    Extended Handoff Direction, Universal Handoff
                                         Direction, or General Handoff Direction
                                         messages with a Hard_Included Flag set to True
                                    •    Followed by another Extended Handoff
                                         Direction, Universal Handoff Direction, or
                                         General Handoff Direction messages with a
                                         Hard_Included Flag set to True without
                                         receiving a Handoff Completion or Extended
                                         Handoff Completion message

                             Incoming Call Fail
                             This attribute indicates failed incoming call attempts
                             triggered by the following sequence of messages:
                                    •    Page Response message
                                    •    Not followed by a Service Connect Completion
                                    •    Followed by another Page Response message or
                                         a transition back to Idle mode

                             Incoming Call OK
                             This attribute indicates successful incoming call initiations
                             triggered by the following sequence of messages:
                                    •    Page Response message
                                    •    Followed by a either a Service Connect or
                                         Service Connect Completion message




30 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                       Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               Outgoing Call Fail
                               This attribute indicates failed outgoing call initiations
                               triggered by the following sequence of messages:
                                       •   Origination or Enhanced Origination message
                                       •   Not followed by a Service Connect Completion
                                           message
                                       •   Followed by an Origination message or a
                                           transition back to idle mode

                               Outgoing Call OK
                               This attribute indicates successful outgoing call initiations
                               triggered by the following sequence of messages:
                                       •   Origination or Enhanced Origination message
                                       •   Followed by a Service Connect or a Service
                                           Connect Completion message
       When determining hand-off events, the HDM_SEQ and LAST_HDM_SEQ counters are
       used to ensure that the correct events are identified.

              Delete CDMA data files

                               To remove a data file from the Workspace Explorer
                                  1 Right-click on the name of the logfile to display the
                                     Close Logfile option.
                                  2 Click Close Logfile.
                                     The data file is now removed from the Workspace
                                     Explorer display.

              View CDMA summary data

                      Table view
                              Tables let you examine the numeric series, histogram and
                              statistical data for the selected attribute.
                                       •   From the Workspace Explorer, right-click on
                                           the data attribute ‘DownLink Measurements >
                                           EcIo_1stBest’ and select Display on Table.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                         Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 31
                                    This opens the Table window:




                                    •    Experiment with the other tabs in the window.

                     The Message Browser
                           The Message Browser differs from the previous data
                           windows in that it only appears as a pop-up menu option at
                           the data stream level in the Workspace Explorer.
                                    •    From the Workspace Explorer, right-click on a
                                         data stream and select Display Message
                                         Browser.




32 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                      Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               The Message Browser combines an event panel
                               (sequentially listing call events) with a panel of Layer 3
                               messaging, allowing you to pinpoint the root causes of
                               problems.




              View CDMA data
                           From the Workspace Explorer, you can right-click any data
                           attribute to display a suitable pop-up menu of options.
                                      •   Right-click on a data attribute.
                                      A pop-up menu opens, similar to this:




                                      Selecting one of the display methods opens the
                                      appropriate data window.


Actix A Solutions User Guide                        Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 33
                     View CDMA data in the Map window
                              1 Use the pop-up menu to display the data attribute
                                  ‘EcIo_1stBest’ in a map window.




                                2   Click on the Pan button.
                                3   Click and drag the data around the map window.
                                4   Experiment with the Zoom buttons.
                                5   In the Workspace Explorer, open up the ‘Event
                                    Data’ set and drag the ‘CallDropped’ event onto the
                                    map, which should look similar to this:




34 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                     Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                       Adding various events to the mapped data can help
                                       you see where problems are occurring.
                                   6 Drag another data attribute onto the map.
                                       You can also change the size, symbol or color of the
                                       data, apply offsets to an attribute or merge attributes
                                       for a multidimensional display. See the online help
                                       for further details.
                                       The map legend defines histogram ranges for charts.
                                   7 Click on one of the check boxes in the Map Legend
                                       pane to hide the related attribute data on the map.
                                       Click on it again to redisplay the data.
       To find out how to add background geographical and network information to map windows,
       see the section Configure Maps on page 44).

                      Replay the CDMA data
                             With a drive test file, you may want to recreate the drive
                             test by 'playing' through the data file from beginning to end.
                             You can do this using the Replay feature.
                               To open the Replay control, from the main menu, select
                               Tools, then Display Replay.




                      View CDMA data in StateForms
                             While examining data on a map, you can also view data
                             attributes for the same data point by using the StateForms
                             tool.
                                  1 From the Tools menu, select Display StateForms.
                                  2 If a blank or inappropriate form appears, right-click
                                    on the form and select Open File, then select the
                                    appropriate form (.axw) file.
                                  3 In the map window, click Select and select a data
                                    point.
                                    The StateForms window now displays a variety of
                                    attributes based on the data point you selected.


Actix A Solutions User Guide                        Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 35
                                4 If you have scanner data in your logfile, start
                                  another StateForm window.
                                5 Right-click on the form and select Open File, then
                                  select a form (.axw) file for a scanner.
                                6 Right-click on the form and select Stream Selector,
                                  then the scanner stream.
                                  Below is an example scanner form. Note that
                                  selecting Stream Selector again closes the stream
                                  selector field.




                             Advanced users can use the Design Mode of this feature to
                             create new forms for CDMA and other technologies.




36 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                     Actix A Solutions User Guide
                      Print the CDMA data
                                  1 From the map window, click Print to open the Map
                                    Layout Designer, which starts with the Page Setup
                                    dialog open.
                                  2 Set the paper size, orientation and margins, and
                                    specify the header and footer for the page. Click
                                    OK to continue.
                                    You can now see the Map Layout Designer
                                    window.




                                3   Click on the map, legend, headers or footers to edit,
                                    move or resize them as necessary.
                                4   To check on what the map will look like when
                                    printed, click Print Preview.
                                5   When satisfied with the layout, click Print to open
                                    the standard Windows Print dialog.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                     Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 37
                     View CDMA data in the Chart window
                              1 Use the pop-up menu to display the data attribute
                                  ‘EcIo_1stBest’ in a chart window.




                                    You can display more than one attribute on the
                                    same chart.
                                2   Select and drag the data attribute ‘ForwardFER’
                                    from the Workspace Explorer window onto the
                                    existing chart.




                                    You can also zoom into selected areas of the chart
                                    by defining a frame for the zoom.
                                3   On the chart, click the upper left corner of the
                                    zooming rectangle, and drag down to the lower
                                    right extent of the rectangle.




38 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                     Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               4   Release the mouse button to complete the zoom
                                   action:




                                   Note that the zoom only operates in the X-axis, not
                                   in the Y-axis.
                               5   Now return the chart its original state by dragging a
                                   box, but this time up and to the right.
                               6   Use the right mouse button to drag the axes around
                                   the chart window.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                    Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 39
                                    Although you can drag the Y-axis for all attributes
                                    on the chart, you can only change the X-axis for the
                                    last attribute to be displayed on the chart.
                                    Also, you will see that a pop-up menu appears when
                                    you release the right mouse button. You would
                                    usually activate this menu by a single right-click.
                                7   Select Chart Properties to display this dialog:




                                8   Experiment with changing various display
                                    parameters and observe the effect on the chart.




40 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                      Actix A Solutions User Guide
                      View synchronized CDMA data
                             The data in each of these windows is synchronized, so that
                             when displaying the same data attribute in a map, chart or
                             table, if you select a data point in one window, all related
                             map, chart or table windows also highlight the data point.
                               You should have a map and a chart window open, both
                               displaying the ‘EcIo_1stBest’ data attribute.
                                  1   From the map window, click on Select.



                                      Note the other toolbar buttons for selecting data
                                      points.
                                  2   Now click on a data point on the map.
                                      You should see that the relevant parts of the map
                                      and the chart look as shown below, with a line
                                      appearing at the equivalent ‘EcIo_1stBest’ point on
                                      the chart:




Actix A Solutions User Guide                       Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 41
              Generate CDMA reports
                           You may want to create high-level management reports
                           based on your collected data. You can print from map and
                           chart windows, but the Workbook function (using
                           Microsoft Excel™) allows you to collate these views and
                           perform other data analysis functions to produce an
                           integrated, polished report.
                                1   From the Workbook menu, select Open
                                    Workbook and select an appropriate Excel
                                    template.




                                2 Click Open.
                                3 Select the data source that you want to view in the
                                  workbook report.




                                4   Click OK to process and display the data in the
                                    workbook.




42 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                     Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               You can proceed to adapt the workbook, use other
                               Excel tools on the data, and so on.




Actix A Solutions User Guide               Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 43
              Configure Maps

                     Map backgrounds and layers
                           In the earlier example that looked at displaying data in a
                           map window, there was no background map image to put
                           the data into context. This section shows you how to add a
                           background and arrange the layers within a map window.
                                1   Display a data attribute in a map window.
                                2   Click Layers to open the Layer Control dialog.




                                    Making a checkmark in a layer’s box controls:
                                         if the layer is visible
                                         if objects on it can be selected
                                        if the layer can be annotated (clearing this box
                                    ‘locks’ the Annotations layer from having any
                                    further annotations added)
                                3   In the Layers box, click Add.
                                4   Select one or more MapInfo Map (.tab) files (see
                                    MapInfo layers (see page 46)).
                                5   Click Open to display the selected file(s) in the
                                    Layer Control dialog.




44 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                             Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                    The top of the layer list represents the uppermost
                                    layer in this map window.
                               6    Click Up and Down to move 'example' to the
                                    bottom and 'Annotations' to the top.
                               7    Click Close to return to the map view.
                                    In a new installation, the map location defaults to 0°
                                    longitude, 0° latitude, so you will need to arrange
                                    the map view to display the new map.
                               8    Pan the map viewing area by right-clicking in the
                                    map area, then choosing Zoom, Go to Layer and
                                    selecting the new map layer.
                               9    Use the Zoom and Pan controls to arrange the map
                                    as required. To zoom in to an area, click Zoom In,
                                    then click and drag a rectangle around the area of
                                    interest.
                                    For some detailed layers—like the Street layers—
                                    you can control at what degree of magnification
                                    they become visible. This helps to minimize map
                                    clutter.
                               10   Right-click on the map window and select Map
                                    Layers to display the Layer Control dialog.
                               11   Select the S1 (street names) layer.
                               12   Click Display to open the Display Properties
                                    dialog.
                               13   Check Display within Zoom range and enter '0' for
                                    Min Zoom and '10' for Max Zoom.



Actix A Solutions User Guide                     Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 45
                                   14 Now do the same for the street numbers layer, but
                                      set the visible range to 0-3.

                             MapInfo layers
                             MapInfo layers are named according to the geographic
                             location of the data (for example, the abbreviated US state
                             name and/or county name), and by the type of data
                             contained in the file. Here are some of the common
                             abbreviations used for MapInfo data types:
                              Suffix       Layer Type
                              Y1           RtHwy010_Top
                              Y2           RtHwy010_Bot
                              X1           IntShld010
                              X2           IntShld1040
                              Pc           Cultural Points
                              Pn           Natural Points
                              Pm           Municipal Points
                              R            Railroads
                              H            Highways
                              S            Streets
                              Wr           Water (rivers)
                              Wb           Water (bodies of water)
                              Lm           Landmarks
                              Cb           City Boundary
                              Mc           Minor Civic Division
                              Cy           County
                              Other MapInfo layers: Voting District, Native
                              American Lands, Sub-MCD, State level tables
                              (school districts and elevation contours).
                             For example, the MapInfo layer named GAFULTS.TAB
                             contains street-level data for Fulton County, Georgia.




46 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                        Actix A Solutions User Guide
                      Show lines to cells on a map
                                 1 From the map window, click on Layers to open the
                                     Layer Control dialog, which should look similar to
                                     this:




                                2   Select the ‘Lines to neighbor cells’ layer.
                                3   Click Lines to open the Line layer properties
                                    dialog.




                                4 As shown above, set the Lines draw mode to
                                  ‘Selection’ and Color lines with to
                                  ‘PN_1stBestEcIo’, and click OK.
                                5 Click Close to finish using the Layer Control
                                  dialog.



Actix A Solutions User Guide                     Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 47
                                6   Zoom In on data points near a cell site, and use
                                    Select to pick a data point.
                                    A solid line is drawn to the serving cell site, with
                                    dotted lines drawn to neighboring cells.




                                    If 'All datapoints' was selected in the Line layer
                                    properties dialog, you would not need to select a
                                    data point—all data points would have a line to
                                    their neighbor cells. This can be useful in some
                                    situations.

              Network Imaging
                            Files containing network data can be huge. Most of this
                            data will also go unexamined, and will simply create delays
                            in analyzing network behavior. The Network Imaging
                            feature lets you batch-process a number of files into a pre-
                            defined data set that can be archived and collated to see
                            how key network parameters have changed over time.




48 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                       Actix A Solutions User Guide
                      Create a Network Image
                                 1 From the Network Image menu, select Create
                                    Network Image to open the Create Network Image
                                    dialog:




                                2   Select the ‘CDMA Network Image’ template and
                                    click OK.
                                    The Select Network Image to Create dialog now
                                    opens:
                                3   Enter a File name and location for the network
                                    image file and click Save.
                                    The network image now appears in the Workspace
                                    Explorer.


                                    You are now ready to batch-load a set of related
                                    data files.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                     Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 49
                     Batch-load CDMA data files
                                1 From the Network Image menu, select Attach
                                   Network Image to open the Select Network Image
                                   File dialog.




                                2   Select the appropriate file and click Open.
                                    The network image now appears in the Workspace
                                    Explorer.


                                3   Right-click on the Network Image file and select the
                                    Batch Load Files option.




50 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                     Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                   This opens the Select Files to Load dialog.




                               4   Select one or more data files and click Open.
                                   When the file processing is complete, a message
                                   similar to this is shown:




                               5   Click OK to close the message.
                               6   Open up the structure underneath the network
                                   image.




                               7   Now view the batched network image data
                                   attributes in the same way as you would for



Actix A Solutions User Guide                    Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 51
                                    standard data attributes, using maps, charts and so
                                    on.

              CDMA pre-configured reports
                           With each solution are a set of pre-configured reports, each
                           concentrating on a particular type of network analysis.
                           These 'application layers' distil advanced analysis
                           techniques into simple, comprehensive spreadsheet reports,
                           ready for immediate use by staff of all levels of experience.
                             The application layers are listed under the Analysis menu–
                             which ones actually appear depend on the type of data file
                             loaded. Note that if you do not have a loaded data file, the
                             Analysis menu option will be grayed-out.
                             A description of the reports contained within each
                             application layer is provided after the next section.

                             To use an application layer
                                1 Ensure that you have a data file loaded and that a
                                    valid CellRefs file has been set.
                                2 From the Analysis menu, select an application layer
                                    (in this example, 'CDMA Distant Server Analysis').
                                    Once you select an application layer, this window
                                    opens:




                                    The top pane shows a tree-view of the network
                                    structure against various statistics produced by the
                                    application layer.



52 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                       Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                  3 Use the top pane as necessary to narrow down the
                                    data in your selection.
                                    All reports appropriate to your selection are
                                    displayed under the Suggested tab. If you want to
                                    use another report, look under the All tab to view all
                                    reports available within the current application
                                    layer.
                                  4 Double-click on a report icon to open the report
                                    window. This will report on all data selected in the
                                    upper tree-view panel.
                                  5 As required, use the buttons at the bottom of the
                                    window to Save the report as a web-compatible
                                    HTML file set, Print the report to your printer or
                                    open the report in Excel using Show Excel Report.

                               Reset thresholds for a new analysis
                               A number of the application layer reports use Custom
                               Attributes. To change the thresholds for a new analysis,
                               you need to re-run these Custom Attributes directly from
                               the Custom Attribute Manager:
                                      •   Distance_Input
                                      •   EcIo_Threshold_Input
                               You can now re-run the application layer.

                      CDMA Drive Test application layers

                               CDMA Summary Reports
                               These reports are for cdmaOne technology.
                                  Call Statistics Summary
                               A summary of major call events and cdmaOne performance
                               statistics.
                                 FER and EcIo
                               Forward FER and Combined_EcIo statistics.
                                 Handoff State
                               A breakdown of cdmaOne Handoff State.
                                  Mtx and Mrx
                               Mobile Transmit and Mobile Receive Power performance
                               statistics.
                                  Handset Distant Server Analysis
                               Prompts you for a maximum distance in miles from the
                               serving cell and an EcIo value to calculate the number of
                               pilots exceeding the threshold. The report returns key


Actix A Solutions User Guide                       Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 53
                              performance metrics by CDMA carrier frequency, for cases
                              exceeding the maximum serving cell distance.

                              CDMA Cluster Optimization
                                Summary Report
                              Designed for Forward and Reverse Link data for cdmaOne
                              systems.
                                 Cluster Optimization Measurement Charts
                              Forward and Reverse FER PDF & CDFs, EcIo_Combined
                              statistics.

                              CDMA Distant Server Analysis
                                 CDMA Scanners Distant Server Delays
                              Prompts you for a maximum distance in miles from the
                              serving cell and an EcIo value to calculate the number of
                              pilots exceeding the threshold. The report returns key delay
                              metrics obtained from a PN scanner, for cases exceeding
                              the maximum serving cell distance.
                                 CDMA Scanners Distant Server EcIo
                              Prompts you for a maximum distance in miles from the
                              serving cell and an EcIo value to calculate the number of
                              pilots exceeding the threshold. The report returns key EcIo
                              metrics obtained from a PN scanner, for cases exceeding
                              the maximum serving cell distance.

                              CDMA Event Inspection
                                Call Dropped Window Stats
                              For every dropped call, this reports key performance
                              metrics for a 5-second window before the drop.
                                Setup Failure Window Stats
                              For every dropped call, this reports key performance
                              metrics for a 5-second window before the drop.

              CDMA StateTip
                              The CDMA StateTip utility provides a synchronized view
                              of Handset and PN Scanner data, allowing for a detailed
                              evaluation of neighbor list and pilot pollution problems.
                              By displaying the state of many different engineering
                              parameters at a given trouble spot, you can best judge how
                              to make changes to correct the problem.




54 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                       Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               The StateTip provides a simple but powerful window
                               (shown on the right of the window in the above example)
                               that is fully configurable and synchronizes with all other
                               active windows.

              CDMA Toolkit
                               Once you are familiar with the
                               basic techniques of ad-hoc data
                               analysis, you may like to use the
                               CDMA Toolkit utility. CDMA
                               Toolkit automates key CDMA
                               optimization tasks, and appears
                               within the interface as a task bar to
                               the right of the Workspace
                               Explorer.
                               The Toolkit uses a task-based
                               layout to let you perform these
                               analyses:
                                      •   Search Window analysis
                                      •   Neighbor List analysis
                                      •   Optimize coverage areas
                                      •   Analyze multi-carrier
                                          statistics



Actix A Solutions User Guide                        Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 55
                             Every analysis contains several web-based reports, each of
                             which can be saved and printed out for management use.




              Integrate reverse and forward link data
                              The reverse link data from the switch or a protocol analyzer
                              can be integrated with the drive-test data. This lets you see
                              how parameters such as EcIo behave at specific mobile
                              locations.
                             In Actix Solutions, this technique of integrating data files is
                             known as ‘superstreaming’.
                                 1   Ensure that you have loaded the two files that you
                                     want to synchronize into a superstream.
                                 2   From the View menu, select Superstream to open
                                     the Superstreaming dialog. This dialog shows all
                                     currently available data streams.
                                 3   Change the superstream name from the default to
                                     something more meaningful.
                                 4   Check the box of each data stream that you want to
                                     combine to form a superstream. You can also use
                                     the All or None buttons to change the box settings
                                     of every listed data stream.




56 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                        Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                  5    Click the Settings button. This expands the dialog
                                       to show the Merge Method options.
                                  6 To superstream data from the reverse link and the
                                       forward link, click the Correlated Parameters
                                       option. This lets you select attributes from each
                                       stream that correspond to one another.
                                  7 Highlight the uplink data stream.
                                  8 From the attribute picker button on the right, select
                                       ‘Cell_PN_Primary’.
                                  9 Highlight the downlink data stream.
                                  10 From the attribute picker, select ‘PN_Primary’.
                                  11 Click OK.
                               The superstream is now generated and appears in the
                               Workspace Explorer. You can view data from the
                               superstream in any of the standard data display windows.

              Aggregate CDMA data
                           Actix' adaptable data structure lets you select different
                           aggregation modes for the data, depending upon how you
                           want to view the data. These aggregation modes are
                           supported:
                                      •   Location/grid
                                      •   Time
                                      •   Message
                                      •   Distance
                               To change the aggregation mode—also known as the
                               ‘binning’ mode:
                                  1 From the Tools menu, select Preferences to open
                                    the Preferences dialog.
                                  2 Under the heading Binning, select the appropriate
                                    Binning Mode.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                         Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 57
                                3   Click Apply.

              Use Queries
                             The querying interface assists you in constructing simple or
                             complex expressions. These expressions extract meaningful
                             performance data, based on user-defined thresholds or the
                             value of other expressions. As an example, you can create a
                             query that returns statistics for a particular event—such as a
                             dropped call—for a given window in time around that
                             event. This is useful when looking for data trends.
                             Queries are created and edited from the Tools menu,
                             Analysis Manager option. You can create these query
                             types:
                                    •    Filter queries
                                    •    Binned queries
                                    •    Histogram queries
                                    •    Statistical queries
                                    •    Crosstab queries
                                    •    Event queries
                             You can also:
                                    •    Perform logical and arithmetic operators
                                    •    Save queries to a default Workspace
                                    •    Apply filters to queries



58 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                         Actix A Solutions User Guide
                      Create a filter
                             This example query is designed to filter poor quality in
                             CDMA data.
                                 1   From the Workspace Explorer, right-click on a data
                                     stream and select Filter, then Create a New Filter.




                                     The Filter Wizard opens.
                                 2   Enter ‘Poor Quality’ as the name of the filter.
                                 3   Click on the right-arrow of the attribute picker and
                                     select ‘CDMA > DownLink Measurements >
                                     ForwardFER’.




                                 4   Set the filter operation to ‘Greater than (>)’.
                                 5   Set the threshold to ‘5’.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                       Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 59
                                6   Click OK to close the Wizard.
                                    If you already have a filter applied to the stream,
                                    you will see this dialog:




                                7   Click Yes.
                                    Any other data display windows update to show the
                                    areas with poor quality.
                                    You can turn off this and any other filters from the
                                    Workspace Explorer, just by clicking on them.




60 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                       Actix A Solutions User Guide
       FREE ANALYSIS OF GSM DATA
                               This section describes tasks that you might take to analyze
                               GSM log files. These tasks have been chosen to
                               demonstrate most of the basic ad-hoc analysis features.
                               Practicing these will allow you to be productive with your
                               Actix Solution as soon as possible.
                               For an in-depth understanding, you should attend a full
                               training / workshop session, as these can be tailored
                               exclusively to your needs as individual staff members and
                               for the company as a whole.

              The interface for A Solutions
                              After the startup is complete, the application window looks
                              like this:




                               The arrangement of loaded help files and data display
                               windows is called the current workspace. You can save and
                               reuse workspaces as necessary.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                       Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 61
                 Configure GSM network information

                        Import GSM network information
                               As well as geographical data, it is also useful to display
                               your network information on a map window.
                                You must have your network information defined in a text
                                file (usually called 'cellrefs', although it can be given any
                                name) before you can import it. You can use the Network
                                Explorer to import, view and edit the cellrefs file.
                                To maximize the benefit brought to GSM network analysis,
                                the following parameters should be included in data
                                imported into the tool.
 Parameter            Workspace Name                 Purpose
 Site Name            GSM_Site_SiteName              Text description of the Site for display on map.
 Site Number           GSM_Site ID                   Numeric identifier for the Site. Used as the linking
                                                     column to associate the GSM_Site and GSM_Cell
                                                     rows.
 Latitude             GSM_Site Latitude              Locates Site icons on map.
 Longitude             GSM_Site Longitude            Locates Site icons on map.
 Sector Number        GSM_Cell Sector ID Can be      Sector-specific ID information useful for display on
                      1,2,3, etc, or a combination   maps.
                      of site numbers
 Azimuth              GSM_Cell Azimuth               Orients the sector icons on the map.
 Beamwidth            GSM_Cell Beamwidth             Governs the radius of the sector 'wedge' icon to
                                                     reflect the beamwidth of antenna deployed at the
                                                     sector.
 Base Station Power    GSM_Cell EIRP                 Base station power
 BCCH                  GSM_Cell BCCH                 Broadcast control channel.
 MNC                  GSM_Cell MNC                   Mobile Network Code
 MCC                  GSM_Cell MCC                   Mobile Color Code
 LAC                  GSM_Cell LAC                   Location Area Code
 CI                   GSM_Cell CI                    Cell ID value
 BSIC                 GSM_Cell BSIC                  Base Station Identity Code, comprising of a
                                                     concatenation of the NCC and BCC values.


                                To import GSM network information
                                   1 From the Tools menu, select Network Explorer to
                                      open the Network Explorer window.
                                   2 From the toolbar, click Import and select Import
                                      From New Template to open the Import dialog.
                                   3 Select the appropriate network data file.
                                   4 Click Open to display the Custom Import Wizard.
                                   5 Give the Template a meaningful Description.
                                   6 Under Delimiters, check Tab.



62 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                                Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                  7       Under General Settings, enter '1' for Ignore
                                          header rows and ';' for Array (list) Separator. If
                                          your file has more than one header or uses a
                                          different array list separator, set these options
                                          accordingly.
                                     8 Click on the Column Settings tab.
                                          The Column Settings tab allows you to associate a
                                          network parameter with a column of data in the text
                                          file.
                                          Note that each of the field names has an associated
                                          icon:
                                             Key fields (see page 164)
                                              Required fields (see page 164)
                                              Other fields (see page 164)
                                     9 Under the Columns heading, click on a setting for a
                                          particular field.
                                     10 Select a column binding from the drop down list.
                                          The Wizard then displays the selected parameter
                                          against the appropriate column.
                                     11 Select the appropriate column binding for Site
                                          Name from inside the GSM Site group. Repeat this
                                          for the SiteID, Latitude, and Longitude.
                                     12 For the remaining columns, look for the attribute
                                          headers under GSM Cell group. Use the Cell ID
                                          column for the GSM Sector ID, and repeat for the
                                          Azimuth, Beamwidth, EIRP, BCCH, MNC, MCC,
                                          LAC, CI, and BSIC columns. A description of each
                                          of these parameters and their use appears in the
                                          table at the top of this section.
                                     13 Click Finish when all the columns have been
                                          assigned. The new cell information will be added at
                                          the bottom of the existing list in the Network
                                          Explorer.
       When the cellrefs file is updated, you should use the template you have created on the
       new file so that you do not have to repeat work you have already done, including the
       column-by-column parameter assignment.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                        Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 63
                        Set a GSM network information file
                                  1 From the Tools menu, select Preferences to open
                                      the Preferences dialog:




                                     2    Click on File Location to select the cellrefs file.
                                     3    Click OK to close the Preferences dialog.
                                          You will now see this message:




                                          You may now want to close and restart for the
                                          change to take effect.

               Load GSM data files
                                 1        From the toolbar, click the Open Logfile button:


                                           This displays the Open dialog.
                                      2 Select an appropriate file.
       Files of Type defaults to ‘All Formats’ but you can select a specific file type to look for.
       This also illustrates the many file formats available.




64 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                                Actix A Solutions User Guide
              Find and use GSM data in the Workspace Explorer
                            The Workspace Explorer window is a graphical display of
                            all loaded data or log files and the data structure contained
                            within each file. Loaded files are at the highest level, with
                            devices and other data streams displayed at lower levels.




                                 1   Click on the symbols to open out and explore the
                                     data in your logfile.
                                     See how your data relates to the structure shown
                                     above. In the example below, the file ‘edgec1’
                                     contains a data stream called ‘Tems’ (the number is
                                     the data stream number within the file, starting from
                                     zero). The ‘GSM’ group contains the ‘UpLink
                                     Measurements’ set, which contains the
                                     ‘ULDTXUsed’ data attribute:




                                     However, the only objects that you actually need to
                                     recognize are filenames, data streams and data
                                     attributes.
                                     The logical tree-view layout of the Workspace
                                     Explorer allows you to drill down and identify all
                                     logged data. Once you have located the appropriate
                                     data attribute, you can open it in a data window—
                                     for example, a map, chart, table or spreadsheet—to
                                     examine the data in detail. You can examine data
                                     streams using the Message Browser tool.
                                     You may also want additional information about a
                                     particular data attribute.
                                 2   Select 'ServRxLevFull'.


Actix A Solutions User Guide                      Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 65
                                3     From the Help menu, select Attribute Help to open
                                      the attribute help window.




                                4     Click the button to dock the attribute help
                                      window and drag it to a useful position.




                                5     Select a new attribute. Note that the help now
                                      provides information on that attribute.

              Delete GSM data files

                             To remove a data file from the Workspace Explorer
                                1 Right-click on the name of the logfile to display the
                                   Close Logfile option.
                                2 Click Close Logfile.
                                   The data file is now removed from the Workspace
                                   Explorer display.




66 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                        Actix A Solutions User Guide
              View GSM summary data

                      Table view
                              Tables let you examine the numeric series, histogram and
                              statistical data for the selected attribute.
                                    •   From the Workspace Explorer, right-click on
                                        the data attribute ‘DownLink Measurements >
                                        ServRxLevIdle’ and select Display on Table.




                                    This opens the Table window:




                                    •   Experiment with the other tabs in the window.

                      The Message Browser
                            The Message Browser differs from the previous data
                            windows in that it only appears as a pop-up menu option at
                            the data stream level in the Workspace Explorer.
                                    •   From the Workspace Explorer, right-click on
                                        the data stream and select Display Message
                                        Browser.



Actix A Solutions User Guide                     Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 67
                              The Message Browser combines an event panel
                              (sequentially listing call events) with a panel of Layer 3
                              messaging, allowing you to pinpoint the root causes of
                              problems.




              View GSM data
                              From the Workspace Explorer, you can right-click any data
                              attribute to display a suitable pop-up menu of options.
                                     •   Right-click on a data attribute.
                                     A pop-up menu opens, similar to this:




                                     Selecting one of the display methods opens the
                                     appropriate data window.



68 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                        Actix A Solutions User Guide
                      Viewing GSM data in the Map window
                                1 Use the pop-up menu to display the data attribute
                                   ‘ServRxLevFull’ in a map window.




                                2   Click on the Pan button.
                                3   Click and drag the data around the map window.
                                4   Experiment with the Zoom buttons.
                                5   In the Workspace Explorer, open up the ‘Event
                                    Data’ set and drag the ‘EventCallCompleted’ event
                                    onto the map, which should look similar to this:




                                    Adding various events to the mapped data can help
                                    you see where problems are occurring.


Actix A Solutions User Guide                    Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 69
                                  6    Drag another data attribute onto the map.
                                       You can also change the size, symbol or color of the
                                       data, apply offsets to an attribute or merge attributes
                                       for a multidimensional display. See the online help
                                       for details.
                                       The map legend defines histogram ranges for charts.
                                   7 Click on one of the check boxes in the Map Legend
                                       pane to hide the related attribute data on the map.
                                       Click on it again to redisplay the data.
       To find out how to add background geographical and network information to map windows,
       see the section Configure Maps on page 77.

                      Replay the GSM data
                             With a drive test file, you may want to recreate the drive
                             test by 'playing' through the data file from beginning to end.
                             You can do this using the Replay feature. To open the
                             Replay control, from the main menu, select Tools, then
                             Display Replay.




70 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                         Actix A Solutions User Guide
                      View GSM data in StateForms
                            While examining data on a map, you can also view data
                            attributes for the same data point by using the StateForms
                            tool.
                                 1   From the Tools menu, select Display StateForms.
                                 2   In the map window, click Select and select a data
                                     point.
                                     The StateForms window now displays a variety of
                                     attributes based on the data point you selected,
                                     which should look similar to this:




                                     This is the default GSM StateForm. Advanced users
                                     can use the Design Mode of this feature to create
                                     new forms for GSM and other technologies. For
                                     details, see Create a new StateForm.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                     Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 71
                     Print the GSM data
                                 1 From the map window, click Print to open the Map
                                    Layout Designer, which starts with the Page Setup
                                    dialog open.
                                 2 Set the paper size, orientation and margins, and
                                    specify the header and footer for the page. Click
                                    OK to continue.
                                    You can now see the Map Layout Designer
                                    window.




                                3   Click on the map, legend, headers or footers to edit,
                                    move or resize them as necessary.
                                4   To check on what the map will look like when
                                    printed, click Print Preview.
                                5   When satisfied with the layout, click Print to open
                                    the standard Windows Print dialog.




72 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                      Actix A Solutions User Guide
                      View GSM data in the Chart window
                                1 Use the pop-up menu to display the data attribute
                                    ‘ServRxLevFull’ in a chart window.




                                    You can display more than one attribute on the
                                    same chart.
                                2   Select and drag the data attribute ‘ServRxQualFull’
                                    from the Workspace Explorer window onto the
                                    existing chart.




                                    You can also zoom into selected areas of the chart
                                    by defining a frame for the zoom.
                                3   On the chart, click the upper left corner of the
                                    zooming rectangle, and drag down to the lower
                                    right extent of the rectangle.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                     Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 73
                                4   Release the mouse button to complete the zoom
                                    action:




                                    Note that the zoom only operates in the X-axis, not
                                    in the Y-axis.
                                5   Now return the chart its original state by dragging a
                                    box, but this time up and to the right.
                                6   Use the right mouse button to drag the axes around
                                    the chart window.




                                    Although you can drag the Y-axis for all attributes
                                    on the chart, you can only change the X-axis for the
                                    last attribute to be displayed on the chart.




74 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                      Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                      Also, you will see that a pop-up menu appears when
                                      you release the right mouse button. You would
                                      usually activate this menu by a single right-click.
                                  7   Select Chart Properties to display this dialog:




                                  8   Experiment with changing various display
                                      parameters and observe the effect on the chart.

                      View synchronized GSM data
                             The data in each of these windows is synchronized, so that
                             when displaying the same data attribute in a map, chart or
                             table, if you select a data point in one window, all related
                             map, chart or table windows also highlight the data point.
                               You should have a map and a chart window open, both
                               displaying the ServRxLevFull data attribute.
                                  1   From the map window, click on Select.



                                      Note the other toolbar buttons for selecting data
                                      points.
                                  2   Now click on a data point on the map.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                       Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 75
                                    You should see that the relevant parts of the map
                                    and the chart look as shown below, with a line
                                    appearing at the equivalent ‘ServRxLevFull’ point
                                    on the chart:




              Generate GSM reports
                           You may want to create high-level management reports
                           based on your collected data. You can print from map and
                           chart windows, but the Workbook function allows you to
                           collate these views and perform other data analysis
                           functions to produce an integrated, polished report.
                                1   From the Workbook menu, select Open
                                    Workbook and select an appropriate Microsoft
                                    Excel template.
                                2   Click Open.
                                3   Select the data source that you want to view in the
                                    workbook report.




                                4   Click OK to process and display the data in the
                                    workbook.



76 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                      Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                    You can proceed to adapt the workbook, use other
                                    Excel tools on the data, and so on.

              Configure Maps

                      Map backgrounds and layers
                            In the earlier example that looked at displaying data in a
                            map window, there was no background map image to put
                            the data into context. This section shows you how to add a
                            background and arrange the layers within a map window.
                                1   Display a data attribute in a map window.
                                2   From the map window, click Layers to open the
                                    Layer Control dialog.




                                    Making a checkmark in a layer’s box controls:
                                        if the layer is visible
                                        if objects on it can be selected
                                        if the layer can be annotated (clearing this box
                                    ‘locks’ the Annotations layer from having any
                                    further annotations added)
                                3   In the Layers box, click Add.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                      Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 77
                                4   Select one or more MapInfo Map (.tab) file (see
                                    MapInfo layers (see page 46)).
                                5   Click Open to display the new map layer(s) in the
                                    Layer Control dialog.




                                    The top of the layer list represents the uppermost
                                    layer in this map window.
                                6   Click Up and Down to move 'example' to the
                                    bottom and 'Annotations' to the top.
                                7   Click Close to return to the map view.
                                    In a new installation, the map location defaults to 0°
                                    longitude, 0° latitude, so you will need to arrange
                                    the map view to display the new map.




78 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                      Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                8    Pan the map viewing area by right-clicking in the
                                     map area, then choosing Zoom, Go to Layer and
                                     selecting the new map layer.
                                9    Use the Zoom and Pan controls to arrange the map
                                     as required. To zoom in to an area, click Zoom In,
                                     then click and drag a rectangle around the area of
                                     interest.
                                     For some detailed layers, you can control at what
                                     degree of magnification they become visible. This
                                     helps to minimize map clutter.
                                10   Right-click on the map window and select Map
                                     Layers to display the Layer Control dialog.
                                11   Select a detailed layer—for example, street names.
                                12   Click Display to open the Display Properties
                                     dialog.
                                13   Check Display within Zoom range and enter '0' for
                                     Min Zoom and '10' for Max Zoom.

                      Show lines to cells on a map
                                 1 From the map window, click on Layers to open the
                                     Layer Control dialog, which should look similar to
                                     this:




                                2    Select the ‘Lines to neighbor cells’ layer.
                                3    Click Lines to open the Line layer properties
                                     dialog.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                      Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 79
                                4 As shown above, set the Lines draw mode to
                                  ‘Selection’ and Color lines with to ‘ServBCCH’,
                                  and click OK.
                                5 Click Close to finish using the Layer Control
                                  dialog.
                                6 Zoom In on data points near a cell site, and use
                                  Select to pick a data point.
                                  A solid line is drawn to the serving cell site, with
                                  dotted lines drawn to neighboring cells.




80 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                      Actix A Solutions User Guide
              Network Imaging
                            Files containing network data can be huge. Most of this
                            data will also go unexamined, and will simply create delays
                            in analyzing network behavior. The Network Imaging
                            feature lets you batch-process a number of files into a pre-
                            defined data set that can be archived and collated, to see
                            how key network parameters have changed over time.

                      Create a Network Image
                                 1 From the Network Image menu, select Create
                                    Network Image to open the Create Network Image
                                    dialog:




                                2   Select the ‘GSM Network Image’ template and
                                    click OK.
                                    The Select Network Image to Create dialog now
                                    opens.
                                3   Enter a File name and location for the network
                                    image file and click Save.
                                    The network image now appears in the Workspace
                                    Explorer.


                                    You are now ready to batch-load a set of related
                                    data files.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                     Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 81
                     Batch-load GSM data files
                                1 From the Network Image menu, select Attach
                                   Network Image to open the Select Network Image
                                   File dialog.




                                2   Select the appropriate file and click Open.
                                    The network image now appears in the Workspace
                                    Explorer.


                                3   Right-click on the Network Image file and select the
                                    Batch Load Files option.




                                    This opens the Select Files to Load dialog.




82 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                      Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               4   Select one or more data files and click Open.
                                   When the file processing is complete, a message is
                                   displayed similar to this:




                               5   Click OK to close the message.
                               6   Open up the structure underneath the network
                                   image.




                               7   Now view the batched network image data
                                   attributes in the same way as you would for
                                   standard data attributes, using maps, charts and so
                                   on.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                    Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 83
              GSM Application Layers
                            Each Actix Solution provides a set of pre-configured
                            reports, each concentrating on a particular type of network
                            analysis. These 'application layers' distil advanced analysis
                            techniques into simple, comprehensive spreadsheet reports,
                            ready for immediate use by staff of all levels of experience.
                             The application layers are listed under the Analysis menu–
                             which ones actually appear depend on the type of data file
                             loaded. Note that if you do not have a loaded data file, the
                             Analysis menu option will be grayed-out.
                             The following application layers are available:
                             GSM DT Design Validation and Quick Analysis
                             (see page 86)
                             GSM DT Handover Settings & Power Control Analysis
                             (see page 86)

                             To use an application layer
                                1 Ensure that you have a data file loaded and that a
                                    valid CellRefs file has been set.
                                2 From the Analysis menu, select an application layer
                                    (in this example, 'DT Design Validation and Quick
                                    Analysis').
                                    Once you select an application layer, this window
                                    opens:




84 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                       Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                   The top pane shows a tree-view of the network
                                   structure against various statistics produced by the
                                   application layer.
                               3   Use the top pane as necessary to narrow down the
                                   data in your selection.
                                   All reports appropriate to your selection are
                                   displayed under the Suggested tab. If you want to
                                   use another report, look under the All tab to view all
                                   reports available within the current application
                                   layer.
                               4   Double-click on a report icon to open the report
                                   window:




Actix A Solutions User Guide                    Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 85
                                    This will report on all data selected in the upper
                                    tree-view panel.
                                5   As required, use the buttons at the bottom of the
                                    window to Save the report as a web-compatible
                                    HTML file set, Print the report to your printer or
                                    open the report in Excel using Show Excel Report.

                     GSM DT Design Validation and Quick Analysis
                           This analysis contains the following reports:
                               Call Details
                             Counts of CC, RR & MM messages, with a summary
                             showing call and handover success rates.
                               Design Validation
                             Breakdown of good/bad design, and a chart of poor design
                             by class of poor design.
                               Measurement Charts
                             Graphs showing distribution of RxLevSub, RxQualSub and
                             TA.
                                Neighbor Level - Single Band
                             Shows percentage of samples where at least one neighbor is
                             stronger than the serving cell, and neighbors within 5 dBm
                             from the server for PDF and CDF, in table and graph form.
                               Neighbor Level - Double Band
                             Shows percentage band usage, intra/inter band handover
                             and neighbors within 5dB from the server for PDF and
                             CDF, in table and graph form.

                     GSM DT Handover Settings & Power Control Analysis
                           This analysis contains the following reports:
                                Handover Quality
                             Graph of quality measurements for the whole file, and for
                             the five seconds before and the five seconds after each
                             handover.
                                Handover Level
                             Graph of change in downlink received level due to
                             handover, measured in the five-second windows before and
                             after each handover.
                               Handover Interval
                             Graph shows the time interval between handovers.
                               Handover Classification
                             Shows percentage breakdown between good/poor design,
                             and poor design by class.


86 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                      Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                  Power Distribution
                               Histogram of power in dBm by number of occurrences,
                               also showing the mean dBm.
                                 Power Step Distribution
                               Histogram of power step changes in dB.
                                  Power Step Interval
                               Histogram of the time interval (in seconds) between power
                               step changes.

              Integrate uplink and downlink data
                              The reverse link data from the switch or a protocol can be
                              integrated with the drive-test data. This lets you see how
                              parameters such as ULRxQual behave at specific mobile
                              locations.
                               In Actix Solutions, this technique of integrating data files is
                               known as ‘superstreaming’.
                                  1    Ensure that you have loaded the two files that you
                                       want to synchronize into a superstream.
                                  2 From the View menu, select Superstream to open
                                       the Superstreaming dialog. This dialog shows all
                                       currently available data streams.
                                  3 Change the superstream name from the default to
                                       something more meaningful.
                                  4 Check the box of each data stream that you want to
                                       combine to form a superstream. You can also use
                                       the All or None buttons to change the box settings
                                       of every listed data stream.
                                  5 Click the Settings button. This expands the dialog
                                       to show the Merge Method options.
                                  6 To superstream data from the reverse link and the
                                       forward link, click the Correlated Parameters
                                       option. This lets you select attributes from each
                                       stream that correspond to one another.
                                  7 Highlight the uplink data stream.
                                  8 From the attribute picker button on the right, select
                                       ‘ServRxLevFull’.
                                  9 Highlight the downlink data stream.
                                  10 From the attribute picker, select ‘ServRxLevFull’.
                                  11 Click OK.
                               The superstream is now generated and appears in the
                               Workspace Explorer. You can view data from the
                               superstream in any of the standard data display windows.


Actix A Solutions User Guide                        Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 87
              Aggregate GSM data
                           Actix A Solutions have an adaptable data structure, so you
                           can select different aggregation modes for the data,
                           depending upon how you want to view the data. These
                           aggregation modes are supported:
                                    •    Location/grid
                                    •    Time
                                    •    Message
                                    •    Distance
                             To change the aggregation mode—also known as the
                             ‘binning’ mode:
                                1 From the Tools menu, select Preferences to open
                                  the Preferences dialog.
                                2 Under the heading Binning, select the appropriate
                                  Binning Mode.




                                3   Click Apply.

              Use Queries
                             The querying interface lets you construct simple or
                             complex expressions. These expressions extract meaningful
                             performance data, based on user-defined thresholds or the
                             value of other expressions.
                             As an example, you can create a query that returns statistics
                             for a particular event—such as a dropped call—for a given



88 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                       Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               window in time around that event. This is useful when
                               looking for data trends.
                               Queries are created and edited from the Tools menu,
                               Analysis Manager option. You can create these query
                               types:
                                      •   Filter queries
                                      •   Binned queries
                                      •   Histogram queries
                                      •   Statistical queries
                                      •   Crosstab queries
                                      •   Event queries
                               You can also:
                                      •   Perform logical and arithmetic operators
                                      •   Save queries to a default Workspace
                                      •   Apply filters to queries

                      Create a filter
                             This query is designed to filter poor quality in GSM data.
                                  1   From the Workspace Explorer, right-click on a data
                                      stream and select Filter, then Create a New Filter.




                                      The Filter Wizard opens.
                                  2   Enter ‘Poor Quality’ as the name of the filter.
                                  3   Click on the right-arrow of the attribute picker and
                                      select ‘GSM > DownLink Measurements >
                                      ServRxQual’.
                                  4   Set the filter operation to ‘Greater than or equal to
                                      (>=)’.
                                  5   Set the threshold to ‘4’.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                        Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 89
                                6   Click OK to close the Wizard.
                                    If you already have a filter applied to the stream,
                                    you will see this dialog:




                                7   Click Yes.
                                    Any other data display windows update to show the
                                    areas with poor quality.
                                    You can turn off this and any other filters from the
                                    Workspace Explorer, just by clicking on them.




       A AND ABIS ANALYSIS
                             You can perform PCM Link data analysis:
                                    •    Using Actix Scenarios (see page 91)
                                    •    Using user-defined analyses (see page 92)
                                    •    To develop user-defined analyses (see page 92)




90 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                       Actix A Solutions User Guide
              Using Actix PCM Link Scenarios
                            This is the standard method for PCM Link analysis, and
                            follows this general pattern:
                               1 Start your Actix Solution. Do not load a logfile yet.
                               2 Choose one or more pre-generated Scenarios.
                               3 Select Tools | Preferences, and set Load Mode to
                                 'Minimal Load'.
                                 This avoids loading unnecessary data from the
                                 logfile and reduces the load time.
                               4 Load the logfile to be examined.
                               5 Select an application layer.
                               6 Narrow the data selection.
                               7 Display the results in a report.
                               8 Use ad-hoc tools to identify problem areas in the
                                 logfile.
                                 These tools, such as maps, charts, tables, the
                                 Message Browser (and so on) are described in GSM
                                 analysis (see page 61).




Actix A Solutions User Guide                    Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 91
                             See also
                             Choose A or Abis Scenarios on page 92
                             Choose Gb Scenarios on page 100

              Using user-defined analyses
                             These are non-standard analysis methods produced by
                             advanced users for co-workers.
                                 1 Start your Actix Solution. Do not load a logfile yet.
                                 2 Set or import the appropriate Load Time Queries
                                   from the Analysis Manager.
                                 3 Select Tools | Preferences, and set Load Mode to
                                   'Minimal Load'.
                                   This avoids loading unnecessary data from the
                                   logfile and reduces the load time.
                                 4 Load the logfile to be examined.
                                 5 Use custom reports to analyze data.

              Developing user-defined analyses
                            This is for advanced users who want to expand on the
                            reports and queries provided as standard with , using their
                            own expert knowledge of the technology and their network.
                                 1 Start your Actix Solution.
                                 2 Select Tools | Preferences, and set Load Mode to
                                   'Full Load'.
                                 3 Load a small example logfile.
                                 4 Write Load Time Queries and Reports as required.
                                   Crosstab and Event queries can be used with PCM
                                   Link data to create suitable call analyses (that is,
                                   queries that can be used with the Statistics
                                   Explorer).
                                 5 Set Load Mode back to 'Minimal Load' before
                                   attempting to examine any new logfiles.

              Choose A or Abis Scenarios
                            Scenarios are collections of analyses that can be performed
                            on any PCM Link data as it is loaded. You select the
                            Scenarios you need, depending on the tasks you want to
                            perform. However, the more Scenarios that are selected, the
                            longer the data takes to load, so only the basic analysis sets
                            are selected by default.
                             Note that you must have at least one A or Abis (as
                             appropriate) Scenario selected for A and Abis analysis
                             features to work correctly.


92 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                       Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               To choose a Scenario
                                  1 From the Tools menu, select Choose Scenario to
                                     open the Attach Load Time Queries dialog.




                                  2   Select one or more appropriate Scenarios and click
                                      OK.

              The Statistics Explorer
                              The Statistics Explorer is a powerful data-manipulation
                              tool that lets you rapidly pinpoint problems by displaying
                              statistical data from Crosstab and Event queries.

                               To use the Statistics Explorer
                                  1 From the Tools menu, select Choose Scenario to
                                      open the Attach Load Time Queries dialog.
                                  2 Select 'Abis Call Analysis'.
                                  3 Open the Abis file.
                                  4 From the View menu, select Statistics Explorer.
                                  5 From the Queries pane on the left of the Statistics
                                      Explorer, select Analyze Connection Errors or
                                      Analyze Handover Failures. Note that queries
                                      beginning with 'Analyze' can be used for call
                                      analysis.
                                      The processed data is now displayed in the Statistics
                                      Explorer.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                       Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 93
                     Abis Call Analysis
                            Once you have displayed the data for an Abis file within
                            the Statistics Explorer, you can create a call analysis stream
                            of selected data to view from the Workspace Explorer.
                                1   In the Statistics Explorer, select a row of data.
                                2   Click Analyze.
                                    The stream of the selected data appears in the
                                    Workspace Explorer:




                                    The data in this new stream can now be analyzed
                                    using maps, charts, tables etc.


94 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                       Actix A Solutions User Guide
                      Filter the Workspace Explorer
                               Once you have displayed the data for an Abis file within
                               the Statistics Explorer, you can reduce the quantity of data
                               displayed in the Workspace Explorer.
                                  1   In the Statistics Explorer, select a row of data.
                                  2   Click Filter.
                                      The Workspace Explorer now only shows data
                                      relating to the row selected in the Statistics
                                      Explorer.
                                  3   When you have finished examining the filtered data,
                                      click Filter again to switch off the filtering.

              Superstream PCM Link/Drive Test data
                           PCM data—for example from A, Abis or Gb logfiles—can
                           be combined with drive test data collected at the same time.
                           This means that the GPS coordinates in the drive test data
                           can be matched to the uplink information, so the uplink
                           information (or the difference between uplink and
                           downlink information) can then be plotted on a map.

                               To Superstream the data
                                  1 From the Tools menu, select Choose Scenario to
                                     open the Attach Load Time Queries dialog.
                                  2 Select 'Abis Call Analysis'.
                                  3 Open the PC Link file and the drive test file to be
                                     superstreamed.
                                  4 From the Tools menu, select Superstream
                                     PCMLink/DT to open the PCM-Link/Drive Test
                                     Superstreaming dialog.
                                  5 Select the appropriate Drive Test stream(s) and
                                     PCM-Link stream(s).
                                  6 Select the appropriate Search Method settings for
                                     synchronizing the data streams.
                                  7 Click OK to begin the superstreaming process.
                                     When the process is complete, the superstream is
                                     displayed in the Workspace Explorer, and the
                                     normal data displays (maps, charts, tables, analysis
                                     reports) may be used to examine the data.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                       Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 95
               GSM A and Abis pre-configured reports
                            See the section GSM Application Layers on page 84 for
                            information on how to use application layers.
       A data file must be loaded and a valid CellRefs file must have been set.
       You must also select a Scenario for the related application layer option to be displayed
       under Tools | Analysis, as not all A and Abis Scenarios are checked by default.

                       GSM A application layers

                                A General Analysis
                                  Location Update
                                Count, percentage and breakdown of Location Update
                                messages, types and reject causes.
                                  Clear Cause
                                Cause Code count and percentage for Clear Command
                                messages.
                                  Services Requested
                                Count, percentage and breakdown.
                                  Channel Assignment
                                Assignment message count and percentage, Assignment
                                Failure breakdown.
                                  Channel Assignment by Cell
                                Assignment message count and percentage for each cell.
                                  Connection Analysis
                                Count and percentage of SCCP Connection messages.
                                Breakdowns of SCCP Services Requested and CSSP
                                Connection Refused Causes.
                                  Connection Analysis by Cell
                                Connection statistics for each cell.

                                A Handover Analysis
                                  Handover Cause
                                HO Performed and HO Required-Attempt cause counts,
                                percentages and graph.
                                  Handover Reject and Fail Cause
                                Counts, percentages and graph for HO Request Reject and
                                Failure.
                                   BSS Handover Cause by Cell
                                Intra-BSC handover statistics for each cell.
                                   SSS Handover Cause by Cell
                                Inter-BSC handover statistics for each cell.


96 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                             Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                  Handover Messages by Cell
                               Inter-BSC outgoing and incoming statistics for each cell.
                                  BSS Handover Matrix
                               Intra-BSC Handovers by Source and Target.
                                  SSS Handover Matrix
                               Inter-BSC Handovers by Source and Target.

                               A Subscriber Analysis
                                 Handset Types
                               Breakdown of mobile handsets based on Type Approval
                               Code.
                                 Channel Type
                               Speech and Data channel type counts and percentages.
                                 Classmark
                               Classmark count, phase and graph.
                                  Roaming by Country
                               Lists the count and proportion of Roaming Subscribers
                               from each country in a table and graph.
                                  Roaming by Network
                               Lists the count and proportion of Roaming Subscribers
                               from each network in a table and graph.

                      GSM Abis application layers

                               Abis Quick Analysis
                                 Traffic Statistics
                               Setup, TCH and SDCCH statistics by TRX.
                                 Quality Distribution
                               Counts of uplink and downlink quality, and graphs of
                               downlink quality vs. downlink level and uplink quality vs.
                               uplink level.
                                  Timing Advance and Interference
                               Interference vs. timing advance followed by interference
                               definition chart.
                                  Handover Statistics
                               Statistics by TRX for incoming, outgoing and intra-cell
                               handovers and directed retries.
                                  Connection Failure
                               Statistics for TCH and SDCCH, and cause breakdown.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                        Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 97
                                Link Balance Distribution
                             Graph showing corrected downlink level – corrected uplink
                             level.

                             Abis Balance and Sensitivity
                               System Sensitivity
                             Mean uplink and downlink quality and number of valid
                             points for a range of levels.
                                Link Balance Distribution
                             Graph showing corrected downlink level – corrected uplink
                             level.
                                Link Balance by Timeslot
                             Graphs showing mean link balance by TRX and by
                             timeslot.
                                Link Balance UL vs DL
                             Corrected uplink level plotted against corrected downlink
                             level.
                               Link Balance by DL Level
                             Mean link balance and number of data points plotted
                             against downlink level.

                             Abis Network Design
                               Quality Distribution
                             Counts of uplink and downlink quality, and graphs of
                             downlink quality vs. downlink level and uplink quality vs.
                             uplink level.
                               Poor Quality Contributors
                             Poor qualities for uplink and downlink plotted against
                             corresponding level.
                                Level and Interference
                             Interference vs. downlink Rx level followed by interference
                             definition chart.
                                Timing Advance and Interference
                             Interference vs. timing advance followed by interference
                             definition chart.

                             Abis Traffic Handovers and Failures
                               Traffic Statistics
                             Setup, TCH and SDCCH statistics by TRX.
                               Channel Configuration
                             Breakdown by cell and TRX.



98 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                      Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                  Handover Statistics
                               Statistics by TRX for incoming, outgoing and intra-cell
                               handovers and directed retries.
                                 Handover Fail Cause
                               Count and breakdown of handover fail causes.
                                  Handovers by Target
                               Stats and graph of handovers by BSIC-BCCH.
                                  Connection Failure
                               Statistics for TCH and SDCCH, and cause breakdown.
                                 Error Indication Cause
                               Cause breakdown for TCH and SDCCH.
                                 Handset Performance
                               Breakdown of mobile handset performance statistics based
                               on Type Approval Code.

       FREE ANALYSIS OF GPRS DATA
                               You can perform Gb Link data analysis:
                                      •   Using Actix Scenarios (see page 91)
                                      •   Using user-defined analyses (see page 92)
                                      •   To develop user-defined analyses (see page 92)




Actix A Solutions User Guide                       Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 99
                             For more information on GPRS analysis, see GPRS
                             analysis engineering notes.

              Choose Gb Scenarios
                           Scenarios are collections of analyses that can be performed
                           on any PCM Link data as it is loaded. You select the
                           Scenarios you need, depending on the tasks you want to
                           perform. However, the more Scenarios that are selected, the
                           longer the data takes to load, so only the basic analysis sets
                           are selected by default.
                             Note that you must have at least one Gb Scenario selected
                             for Gb analysis features to work correctly.
                             For more information on Scenarios, see Load Time Queries
                             in each Scenario (see page 102).

                             To choose a Scenario
                                1 From the Tools menu, select Choose Scenario to
                                   open this dialog:




                                2   Select one or more appropriate Scenarios and click
                                    OK.




100 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                     Actix A Solutions User Guide
              Examine Gb Load Time Queries
                           If you have selected one or more Scenarios, the related
                           Load Time Queries are displayed in the Workspace
                           Explorer.




                               To display a Load Time Query in the Statistics Explorer
                                  1 From the Workspace Explorer, right-click on the
                                      appropriate Load Time Query to open the pop-up
                                      menu.
                                  2 Select Display the Statistics Explorer.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                    Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 101
                                    The Statistics Explorer opens with the Load Time
                                    Query selected. All other queries are also displayed
                                    in the Queries panel, and may be selected as
                                    required.

              Load Time Queries in each Scenario

                            Gb Signaling Analysis (see page 105)
                            This Scenario's Load Time Queries are those used in the
                            application layer of the same name.

                            Gb Throughput Analysis (see page 106)
                            The 'Traffic Type' Load Time Queries are those used in the
                            Gb Throughput Analysis application layer, but there are
                            also eight other Load Time Queries containing useful
                            information that can be displayed in the Statistics Explorer.
                            These Scenarios each contain one query:

                            Gb TCP Session Analysis
                            Gb TLLI Analysis
                            Gb Throughput Analysis
                            MS TLLI Analysis
                            Display one of these queries in the Statistics Explorer,
                            highlight an interesting row and click the Analyze button.



102 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                     Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               In the example below, Gb Handset Analysis has been
                               displayed in the Statistics Explorer. The user has identified
                               a high number of PDP Activation Failures for a particular
                               mobile, and so clicks Analyze.




                               This generates a new analysis stream for the mobile in
                               question that can be examined in the Protocol Stack
                               Browser (without needing to set the Load Mode to 'Full')
                               and the Message Browser.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                       Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 103
              Analyze GPRS Drive Test data
                           You can analyze GPRS Drive Test data using charts,
                           queries and so on just like any other drive test data.




                            The data attributes shown in the box are described under:
                                    •     Calculating Block Error (BLER) and Block
                                          Success Rates


104 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                     Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                        •   Timing
                                        •   Bit Sums

               Map DT files lacking GPS data
                               Some GPRS Drive Test files do not contain GPS data. If
                               you want to display data on a map, you will need to:
                                    1   Create your own GPS data file using your logging
                                        tool.
                                    2   Use the Text Import Wizard (File | Import Text
                                        File) to import the log file
                                    3   Superstream the imported file with the GPRS Drive
                                        Test file (as described in the section Superstream
                                        PCM Link/Drive Test data in the chapter Analyzing
                                        A and Abis data).
                                        You can now plot the superstreamed data attributes
                                        on a map.

               Gb pre-configured reports
                             See the section GSM Application Layers on page 84 for
                             information on how to use application layers.
       A data file must be loaded and a valid CellRefs file must have been set.
       You must also select a Scenario for the related application layer option to be displayed
       under Tools | Analysis, as not all Scenarios are checked by default.

                         GPRS Gb application layers
       Note that the following Scenarios do not correspond to an application layer, although each
       contain one Load Time Query:
       Gb TCP Session Analysis
       Gb TLLI Analysis
       Gb Throughput Analysis
       MS TLLI Analysis
       Each Load Time Query can be examined using the Statistics Explorer. For more
       information see Load Time Queries in each Scenario on page 102.

                                GPRS Gb Signaling Analysis
                                  Msg Breakdown
                                Can be used as a high-level overview of the messaging
                                used at each protocol layer of the Gb interface.
                                   MM Attach
                                Attach count and percentage, breakdowns of cause value,
                                attach type and attach result.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                          Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 105
                               MM Detach
                            MOD and MTD detach count and percentage, breakdowns
                            of cause value and detach type.
                              MM RA Update
                            RAU count and percentage, breakdowns of cause value,
                            update type and update result.
                               MM Error Conditions
                            Breaks down the GMM cause values reported in the GMM
                            status messages.
                              SM Error Conditions
                            SM cause value breakdowns for uplink and downlink.
                               SM PDP Context
                            Count, percentage, and cause value breakdowns for MS-
                            initiated and network-initiated activations.
                               SM PDP Context Deactivation
                            Count, percentage, and cause value breakdowns for MS-
                            initiated and network-initiated deactivations.
                              Flow Control Statistics
                            BVC and MS Flow Control Statistics including bucket size
                            and leak rates.
                              Discarded LLC-PDU Statistics
                            Shows average LLC frames discarded and Octets deleted.
                               Cell Update Table
                            Shows the GPRS cell update occurrences using the Cell
                            Identity in the uplink messages of the BSSGP protocol
                            layer.
                               Flush Statistics
                            Shows Flush Action and average number of Octets
                            affected.

                            GPRS Gb Throughput Analysis
                              TCP Traffic Type Analysis
                            Using the Source and Destination ports from the TCP
                            header, the traffic type for the data packets can be analyzed.
                               UDP Traffic Type Analysis
                            As above but uses the Source and Destination ports from
                            the UDP header.




106 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                     Actix A Solutions User Guide
       FREE ANALYSIS OF IS-136 DATA
                               This section describes tasks that you might take to analyze
                               IS-136 log files. These tasks have been chosen to
                               demonstrate most of the basic analysis features. Practicing
                               these will allow you to be productive as soon as possible.
                               For an in-depth understanding, you should attend a full
                               training / workshop session, as these can be tailored
                               exclusively to your needs as individual staff members and
                               for the company as a whole.

              The interface for A Solutions
                              After the startup is complete, the application window looks
                              like this:




                               The arrangement of loaded help files and data display
                               windows is called the current workspace. You can save and
                               reuse workspaces as necessary.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                      Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 107
                 Configure IS-136 network information

                        Import IS-136 network information
                                As well as geographical data, it is also useful to display
                                your network information on a map window.
                                 You must have your network information defined in a text
                                 file (usually called 'cellrefs', although it can be given any
                                 name) before you can import it. You can use the Network
                                 Explorer to import, view and edit the cellrefs file.
                                 To maximize the benefit that can be brought to IS-136
                                 network analysis, the following parameters should be
                                 included in data imported into the tool.
 Parameter             Name                          Purpose
 Site Name             IS-54/IS-136_Site_SiteName    Text description of the Site for display on map.
 Site Number           IS-54/IS-136_SiteID           Numeric identifier for the Site.
 Latitude              IS-54/IS-136_SiteLatitude     Locates Site icons on map.
 Longitude             IS-54/IS-136_SiteLongitude    Locates Site icons on map.
 Sector Number         IS-54/IS-136_Cell Sector ID   Sector-specific information useful for display on
                       Can 1,2,3, etc, or a          maps.
                       combination of site numbers
 Azimuth               IS-54/IS-136_Cell Azimuth     Orients the sector icons on the map.
 Beamwidth             IS-54/IS-136_Cell             Governs the shape of the sector 'wedge' icon to
                       Beamwidth                     reflect the beamwidth of antenna deployed at the
                                                     site.
 Base Station Power    IS-54/IS-136_Cell EIRP        Base station power
 ACCH                  IS-54/IS-136_Cell ACCH        Analog control channel.
 Color Codes           IS-54/IS-136_Cell             A list of color codes (SAT and DVCCs) separated
                       Color_Codes                   by semicolons. This list is designed to match the
                                                     entries in the Traffic_Channels field. Used for
                                                     determining likely serving and neighbor cells.
 DCC                   IS-54/IS-136_Cell DCC         Digital Color Code used to determine lines to
                                                     serving cells for Analog servers in idle mode.
 DCCH                  IS-54/IS-136_Cell DCCH        Digital Control Channel
 DVCC                  IS-54/IS-136_Cell DVCC        Digital Voice Color Code
 Traffic_Channels      IS-54/IS-136_Cell             A list of traffic channels separated by semicolons.
                       Traffic_Channels              This list is designed to match the entries in the
                                                     Color_Codes field. Used for determining likely
                                                     serving and neighbor cells.
 MCC                   IS-54/IS-136_Cell MCC         Mobile Country Code
 SID                   IS-54/IS-136_Cell SID         System Identity


                                 To import IS-136 network information
                                    1 From the Tools menu, select Network Explorer to
                                       open the Network Explorer window.
                                       For more information, see Network Explorer.
                                    2 From the toolbar, click Import and select Import
                                       From New Template to open the Import dialog.


108 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                                Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                     3 Select the appropriate network data file.
                                     4 Click Open to display the Custom Import Wizard.
                                     5 Give the Template a meaningful Description.
                                     6 Under Delimiters, check Tab.
                                     7 Under General Settings, enter '1' for Ignore
                                          header rows and ';' for Array (list) Separator. If
                                          your file has more than one header or uses a
                                          different array list separator, set these options
                                          accordingly.
                                     8 Click on the Column Settings tab.
                                          The Column Settings tab allows you to associate a
                                          network parameter with a column of data in the text
                                          file.
                                          Note that each of the field names has an associated
                                          icon:
                                             Key fields (see Key fields on page 164)
                                          Required fields (see Required fields on page 164)
                                              Other fields (see Other fields on page 164)
                                     9 Under the Columns heading, click on a setting for a
                                          particular field.
                                     10 Select a column binding from the drop-down list.
                                          The Wizard then displays the selected parameter
                                          against the appropriate column.
                                     11 Set the appropriate column bindings for IS-54/IS-
                                          136_Site and SiteName. Repeat this for the SiteID,
                                          Latitude, and Longitude.
                                     12 For the remaining columns, look for the attribute
                                          headers under IS-54/IS-136 Cell. Use the Cell ID
                                          column for the IS-54/IS-136_Cell Sector ID,
                                          Azimuth, Beamwidth, EIRP, ACCH, DCC,
                                          Color_Codes, Traffic_Channels, DVCC, DCCH. A
                                          description of each of these parameters and their use
                                          appears in the table at the top of this section.
                                     13 Click Finish when all the columns have been
                                          assigned. The new cell information will be added at
                                          the bottom of the existing list in the Network
                                          Explorer.
       When the cellrefs file is updated, you should use the template you have created on the
       new file so that you do not have to repeat work you have already done, including the
       column-by-column parameter assignment.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                       Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 109
                        Set an IS-136 network information file
                                    1 From the Tools menu, select Preferences to open
                                       the Preferences dialog:




                                     2    Click on File Location to select the cellrefs file.
                                     3    Click OK to close the Preferences dialog.
                                          You will now see this message:




                                          You may now want to close and restart for the
                                          change to take effect.

               Load IS-136 data files
                                   1 From the toolbar, click the Open Logfile button:


                                           This displays the Open dialog.
                                      2 Select an appropriate file.
       Files of Type defaults to ‘All Formats’ but you can select a specific file type to look for.
       This also illustrates the many file formats available.

               Find and use IS-136 data in the Workspace Explorer
                              The Workspace Explorer window is a graphical display of
                              all loaded data or log files and the data structure contained
                              within each file. Loaded files are at the highest level, with
                              devices and other data streams displayed at lower levels.




110 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                               Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               1   Click on the symbols to open out and explore the
                                   data in your logfile.
                                   See how your data relates to the structure shown
                                   above. In the example below, the file ‘0408_001’
                                   contains a data stream called ‘Tems IS136 1900 (0)’
                                   (the number is the data stream number within the
                                   file, starting from zero). The ‘IS-136’ group
                                   contains the ‘Dedicated Radio Link’ set, which
                                   contains the ‘FACCH_CurChannel’ data attribute:




                                   However, the only objects that you actually need to
                                   recognize are filenames, data streams and data
                                   attributes.
                                   The logical tree-view layout of the Workspace
                                   Explorer allows you to drill down and identify all
                                   logged data. Once you have located the appropriate
                                   data attribute, you can open it in a data window—
                                   for example, a map, chart, table or spreadsheet—to
                                   examine the data in detail. You can examine data
                                   streams using the Message Browser tool.
                                   You may also want additional information about a
                                   particular data attribute.
                               2   Select 'DVCC'.
                               3   From the Help menu, select Attribute Help.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                  Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 111
                                  4      Click the button to dock the attribute help
                                         window and drag it to a useful position.




                                  5      Select a new attribute. Note that the help now
                                         provides information on that attribute.

              Delete IS-136 data files

                              To remove a data file from the Workspace Explorer
                                 1 Right-click on the name of the logfile to display the
                                    Close Logfile option.
                                 2 Click Close Logfile.
                                    The data file is now removed from the Workspace
                                    Explorer display.




112 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                          Actix A Solutions User Guide
              View IS-136 summary data

                      Table view
                              Tables let you examine the numeric series, histogram and
                              statistical data for the selected attribute.
                                    •    From the Workspace Explorer, right-click on
                                         the data attribute ‘DownLink Measurements >
                                         FACCH_CurBER_Level’ and select Display on
                                         Table.




                                    This opens the Table window:




                                    •    Experiment with the other tabs in the window.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                     Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 113
                     The Message Browser
                           The Message Browser differs from the previous data
                           windows in that it only appears as a pop-up menu option at
                           the data stream level in the Workspace Explorer.
                                    •     From the Workspace Explorer, right-click on
                                          the data stream and select Display Message
                                          Browser.




                            The Message Browser combines an event panel
                            (sequentially listing call events) with a panel of Layer 3
                            messaging, allowing you to pinpoint the root causes of
                            problems.




114 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                      Actix A Solutions User Guide
              View IS-136 data
                             From the Workspace Explorer, you can right-click any data
                             attribute to display a suitable pop-up menu of options.
                                    •   Right-click on a data attribute.
                                    A pop-up menu opens, similar to this:




                                    Selecting one of the display methods opens the
                                    appropriate data window.

                      View IS-136 data in the Map window
                                 1 Use the pop-up menu to display the data attribute
                                     ‘FACCH_CurRSSI’ in a map window.




                                2   Click on the Pan button.
                                3   Click and drag the data around the map window.
                                4   Experiment with the Zoom buttons.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                    Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 115
                                  5   In the Workspace Explorer, open up the ‘Event
                                      Data’ set and drag the ‘Call_Dropped’ event onto
                                      the map, which should look similar to this:




                                       (Here there is only one dropped call, as the drive-
                                       test is completed.)
                                       Adding various events to the mapped data can help
                                       you see where problems are occurring.
                                   6 Drag another data attribute onto the map.
                                       You can also change the size, symbol or color of the
                                       data, apply offsets to an attribute or merge attributes
                                       for a multidimensional display. See the online help
                                       for details.
                                       The map legend defines histogram ranges for charts.
                                   7 Click on one of the check boxes in the Map Legend
                                       pane to hide the related attribute data on the map.
                                       Click on it again to redisplay the data.
       To find out how to add background geographical and network information to map windows,
       see the section Configure Maps (see Configure Maps on page 123).




116 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                        Actix A Solutions User Guide
                      Replay the IS-136 data
                             With a drive test file, you may want to recreate the drive
                             test by 'playing' through the data file from beginning to end.
                             You can do this using the Replay feature. To open the
                             Replay control, from the main menu, select Tools, then
                             Display Replay.




                      View IS-136 data in StateForms
                             While examining data on a map, you can also view data
                             attributes for the same data point by using the StateForms
                             tool.
                                 1 From the Tools menu, select Display StateForms.
                                 2 In the map window, click Select and select a data
                                   point.
                                   The StateForms window now displays a variety of
                                   attributes based on the data point you selected.




                                     Note that in this example, an appropriate cellrefs
                                     file has not been set, so no Cell or Sector ID
                                     information is displayed.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                     Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 117
                            Advanced users can use the Design Mode of this feature to
                            create new forms for IS-136 and other technologies. For
                            details, see Create a new StateForm.

                     Print the IS-136 data
                                  1 From the map window, click Print to open the Map
                                     Layout Designer, which starts with the Page Setup
                                     dialog open.
                                  2 Set the paper size, orientation and margins, and
                                     specify the header and footer for the page. Click
                                     OK to continue.
                                     You can now see the Map Layout Designer
                                     window.




                                3   Click on the map, legend, headers or footers to edit,
                                    move or resize them as necessary.
                                4   To check on what the map will look like when
                                    printed, click Print Preview.
                                5   When satisfied with the layout, click Print to open
                                    the standard Windows Print dialog.




118 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                     Actix A Solutions User Guide
                      View IS-136 data in the Chart window
                                 1 Use the pop-up menu to display the data attribute
                                     ‘FACCH_CurRSSI’ in a chart window.




                                    You can display more than one attribute on the
                                    same chart.
                                2   Select and drag the data attribute
                                    ‘DedicatedCell_BER’ from the Workspace Explorer
                                    window onto the existing chart.




                                    You can also zoom into selected areas of the chart
                                    by defining a frame for the zoom.
                                3   On the chart, click the upper left corner of the
                                    zooming rectangle, and drag down to the lower
                                    right extent of the rectangle.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                    Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 119
                                4   Release the mouse button to complete the zoom
                                    action:




                                    Note that the zoom only operates in the X-axis, not
                                    in the Y-axis.
                                5   Now return the chart its original state by dragging a
                                    box, but this time up and to the right.
                                6   Use the right mouse button to drag the axes around
                                    the chart window.




120 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                     Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                      Although you can drag the Y-axis for all attributes
                                      on the chart, you can only change the X-axis for the
                                      last attribute to be displayed on the chart.
                                      Also, you will see that a pop-up menu appears when
                                      you release the right mouse button. You would
                                      usually activate this menu by a single right-click.
                                  7   Select Chart Properties to display this dialog:




                                  8   Experiment with changing various display
                                      parameters and observe the effect on the chart.

                      View synchronized IS-136 data
                             The data in each of these windows is synchronized, so that
                             when displaying the same data attribute in a map, chart or
                             table, if you select a data point in one window, all related
                             map, chart or table windows also highlight the data point.
                               You should have a map and a chart window open, both
                               displaying the ‘FACCH_CurRSSI’ data attribute.
                                  1   From the map window, click on Select.



                                      Note the other toolbar buttons for selecting data
                                      points.
                                  2   Now click on a data point on the map.
                                      You should see that the relevant parts of the map
                                      and the chart look as shown below, with a line


Actix A Solutions User Guide                      Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 121
                                    appearing at the equivalent ‘FACCH_CurRSSI’
                                    point on the chart:




              Generate IS-136 reports
                             You may want to create high-level management reports
                             based on your collected data. You can print from map and
                             chart windows, but the Workbook function allows you to
                             collate these views and perform other data analysis
                             functions to produce an integrated, polished report.
                                1   From the Workbook menu, select Open
                                    Workbook and select an appropriate Excel
                                    template.
                                2   Click Open.
                                3   Select the data source that you want to view in the
                                    workbook report.




                                4   Click OK to process and display the data in the
                                    workbook.
                                    You can proceed to adapt the workbook, use other
                                    Excel tools on the data, and so on.




122 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                     Actix A Solutions User Guide
              Configure Maps

                      Map backgrounds and layers
                            In the earlier example that looked at displaying data in a
                            map window, there was no background map image to put
                            the data into context. This section shows you how to add a
                            background and arrange the layers within a map window.
                                1   Display a data attribute in a map window.
                                2   From the map window, click Layers to open the
                                    Layer Control dialog.




                                    Making a checkmark in a layer’s box controls:
                                        if the layer is visible
                                        if objects on it can be selected
                                        if the layer can be annotated (clearing this box
                                    ‘locks’ the Annotations layer from having any
                                    further annotations added)
                                3   In the Layers box, click Add to display the Open
                                    Layer dialog.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                     Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 123
                                4   Select one or more MapInfo Map (.tab) files. For
                                    details, see MapInfo layers (see page 46).
                                5   Click Open to display the map layer(s) in the Layer
                                    Control dialog.




                                    The top of the layer list represents the uppermost
                                    layer in this map window.
                                6   Click Up and Down to move the new 'examplemap'
                                    layer to the bottom and 'Annotations' to the top.
                                7   Click Close to return to the map view.
                                    In a new installation, the map location defaults to 0°
                                    longitude, 0° latitude, so you will need to arrange
                                    the map view to display the new map.




124 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                     Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                  8    Pan the map viewing area by right-clicking in the
                                       map area, then choosing Zoom, Go to Layer and
                                       selecting the new map layer.
                                  9    Use the Zoom and Pan controls to arrange the map
                                       as required. To zoom in to an area, click Zoom In,
                                       then click and drag a rectangle around the area of
                                       interest.
                                       For some detailed layers, you can control at what
                                       degree of magnification they become visible. This
                                       helps to minimize map clutter.
                                  10   Right-click on the map window and select Map
                                       Layers to display the Layer Control dialog.
                                  11   Select a detailed layer—for example, S1 (street
                                       names).
                                  12   Click Display to open the Display Properties
                                       dialog.
                                  13   Check Display within Zoom range and enter '0' for
                                       Min Zoom and '10' for Max Zoom.
                                  14   Now do the same for the street numbers map layer,
                                       entering a zoom range of 0-3.

                      Display IS-136 network information
                             To display your network information on a map window,
                             you must have your network information defined in a text
                             file (usually called ‘cellrefs’, although it can be given any
                             name) before you can import it. You can use the Network
                             Explorer to view and edit the cellrefs file.
                               You should see graphics for each cell site appear on the
                               map, but they may be too big or two small. Here is a
                               zoomed-in map view, with a sample cell site in the lower
                               left and data points in a line on the right:




                               To alter the size of the cell symbols
                                  1 From the map legend pane, right-click on IS-54_IS-
                                      136_Cell-DVCC and select Multi-d dataset Style.



Actix A Solutions User Guide                      Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 125
                                2   Select a new Size for the symbol font and click OK.

                     Show lines to cells on a map
                                1 From the map window, click on Layers to open the
                                    Layer Control dialog, which should look similar to
                                    this:




                                2   Select the ‘Lines to neighbor cells’ layer.
                                3   Click Lines to open the Line layer properties
                                    dialog.




                                4   As shown above, set the Lines draw mode to
                                    ‘Selection’ and Color lines with to
                                    ‘DedicatedCell_BER’, and click OK.



126 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                    Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                  5   Click Close to finish using the Layer Control
                                      dialog.
                                  6   Zoom In on data points near a cell site, and use
                                      Select to pick a data point.
                                      A solid line is drawn to the serving cell site, with
                                      dotted lines drawn to neighboring cells.

              Network Imaging
                            Files containing network data can be huge. Most of this
                            data will also go unexamined, and will simply create delays
                            in analyzing network behavior.
                               The Network Imaging feature lets you batch-process a
                               number of files into a pre-defined data set that can be
                               archived and collated to see how key network parameters
                               have changed over time.

                      Create a Network Image
                                 1 From the Network Image menu, select Create
                                    Network Image to open the Create Network Image
                                    dialog:




                                  2   Select a template and click OK.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                      Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 127
                                    The Select Network Image to Create dialog now
                                    opens:




                                3   Enter a File name and location for the network
                                    image file and click Save.
                                    The network image now appears in the Workspace
                                    Explorer.


                                    You are now ready to batch-load a set of related
                                    data files.

                     Batch-load data files
                                1 From the Network Image menu, select Attach
                                    Network Image to open the Select Network Image
                                    File dialog.




                                2   Select the appropriate file and click Open.


128 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                     Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                   The network image now appears in the Workspace
                                   Explorer.


                               3   Right-click on the Network Image file and select the
                                   Batch Load Files option.




                                   This opens the Select Files to Load dialog.




                               4   Select one or more data files and click Open.
                                   When the file processing is complete, a message
                                   similar to this is displayed:




                               5   Click OK to close the message.
                               6   Open up the structure underneath the network
                                   image.



Actix A Solutions User Guide                   Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 129
                                    7   Now view the batched network image data
                                        attributes in the same way as you would for
                                        standard data attributes, using maps, charts and so
                                        on.

               TDMA pre-configured reports
                             Each Actix Solution provides a set of pre-configured
                             reports, each concentrating on a particular type of network
                             analysis. These 'application layers' distil advanced analysis
                             techniques into simple, comprehensive spreadsheet reports,
                             ready for immediate use by staff of all levels of experience.
                                The application layers are listed under the Analysis menu–
                                which ones actually appear depend on the type of data file
                                loaded. Note that if you do not have a loaded data file, the
                                Analysis menu option will be grayed-out.
       You must also have set a valid CellRefs file.

                       Use an application layer
                                  1 Ensure that you have a data file loaded and a
                                      cellrefs file selected.
                                  2 From the Analysis menu, select Summary
                                      Reports.
                                      Once you select an application layer, the application
                                      layer window opens. The top pane shows a tree-
                                      view of the network structure against various
                                      statistics produced by the application layer.




130 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                         Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               3   Use the top pane as necessary to narrow down the
                                   data in your selection.
                                   All reports appropriate to your selection are
                                   displayed under the Suggested tab. If you want to
                                   use another report, look under the All tab to view all
                                   reports available within the current application
                                   layer.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                   Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 131
                                4   Double-click on a report icon to open the report:




                                    This will report on all data selected in the upper
                                    tree-view panel.
                                5   As required, use the buttons at the bottom of the
                                    window to Save the report as a web-compatible
                                    HTML file set, Print the report to your printer or
                                    open the report in Excel using Show Excel Report.

                            Reset thresholds for a new analysis
                            A number of the application layer reports use Custom
                            Attributes. To change the thresholds for a new analysis,
                            you need to re-run this Custom Attribute directly from the
                            Custom Attribute Manager:
                                    •     Distance_Input
                            You can now re-run the application layer.




132 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                     Actix A Solutions User Guide
                      TDMA application layers

                               TDMA Summary Reports
                               These reports will only run reliably on Tems IS-136 data.
                               This is due to current limitations on our event detection for
                               IS-136. The most robust format supported for IS-136 to
                               date is Tems. It is also primarily designed for all digital
                               files.
                                 TDMA Call Statistics
                               Summary call statistics for TDMA log file(s).
                                 BER and RSSI Stats
                               PDF and CDF of BER and RSSI.
                                  Handoff Quality Breakdown
                               For a five-second window around each handoff, the report
                               determines if the handoff was to a better or worse RSSI and
                               a better or worse BER.
                                  Handoff Quality Stats
                               For a five-second window around the handoff event, this
                               reports PDF and CDF of the RSSI and BER before and
                               after the event. From this report, you can see if the majority
                               of handoffs occurred to a better or worse quality condition.
                                 Dropped Call Stats
                               For every dropped call, this reports key performance
                               metrics for a five-second window before the drop.
                                  Tems- C to A Stats
                               Available only for Tems IS-136 data, the report returns
                               relevant stats for potential serving cells undergoing
                               adjacent channel interference. The lower and upper
                               adjacent C/A measurement is less then 9 dB.

              Integrate uplink and downlink data
                              The reverse link data from the switch or a protocol can be
                              integrated with the drive-test data. This lets you see how
                              parameters such as ‘DedicatedCell_SignalStrength’ behave
                              at specific mobile locations.
                               In Actix Solutions, this technique of integrating data files is
                               known as ‘superstreaming’.
                                  1   Ensure that you have loaded the two files that you
                                      want to synchronize into a superstream.
                                  2   From the View menu, select Superstream to open
                                      the Superstreaming dialog. This dialog shows all
                                      currently available data streams.


Actix A Solutions User Guide                       Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 133
                                3   Change the superstream name from the default to
                                    something more meaningful.
                               4 Check the box of each data stream that you want to
                                    combine to form a superstream. You can also use
                                    the All or None buttons to change the box settings
                                    of every listed data stream.
                               5 Click the Settings button. This expands the dialog
                                    to show the Merge Method options.
                               6 To superstream data from the reverse link and the
                                    forward link, click the Correlated Parameters
                                    option. This lets you select attributes from each
                                    stream that correspond to one another.
                               7 Highlight the uplink data stream.
                               8 From the attribute picker button on the right, select
                                    ‘DedicatedCell_SignalStrength’.
                               9 Highlight the downlink data stream.
                               10 From the attribute picker, select
                                    ‘DedicatedCell_SignalStrength’.
                               11 Click OK.
                            The superstream is now generated and appears in the
                            Workspace Explorer. You can view data from the
                            superstream in any of the standard data display windows.

              Aggregate IS-136 data
                            Actix Solutions have an adaptable data structure, so you
                            can select different aggregation modes for the data,
                            depending upon how you want to view the data. These
                            modes are supported:
                                    •     Location/grid
                                    •     Time
                                    •     Message
                                    •     Distance
                            To change the aggregation (‘binning’) mode:
                                1 From the Tools menu, select Preferences to open
                                  the Preferences dialog.
                                2 Under Binning, select the appropriate Binning
                                  Mode.




134 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                    Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                  3   Click Apply.

              Use Queries
                               The querying interface lets you construct simple or
                               complex expressions. These expressions extract meaningful
                               performance data, based on user-defined thresholds or the
                               value of other expressions.
                               As an example, you can create a query that returns statistics
                               for a particular event—such as a dropped call—for a given
                               window in time around that event. This is useful when
                               looking for data trends.
                               Queries are created and edited from the Tools menu,
                               Analysis Manager option. You can create these query
                               types:
                                      •   Filter queries
                                      •   Binned queries
                                      •   Histogram queries
                                      •   Statistical queries
                                      •   Crosstab queries
                                      •   Event queries
                               You can also:
                                      •   Perform logical and arithmetic operators
                                      •   Save queries to a default Workspace
                                      •   Apply filters to queries



Actix A Solutions User Guide                      Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 135
                     Create a filter
                            This query is designed to filter poor quality in IS-136 data.
                                1   From the Workspace Explorer, right-click on a data
                                    stream and select Filter, then Create a New Filter.




                                    The Filter Wizard opens.
                                2   Enter ‘Poor Quality’ as the name of the filter.
                                3   Click on the right-arrow of the attribute picker and
                                    select ‘IS-136 > DownLink Measurements >
                                    ForBER’.
                                4   Set the filter operation to ‘Greater than (>)’.
                                5   Set the threshold to ‘5’.




                                6   Click OK to close the Wizard.
                                    If you already have a filter applied to the stream,
                                    you will see this dialog:




                                7   Click Yes.
                                    Any other data display windows update to show the
                                    areas with poor quality.
                                    You can turn off this and any other filters from the
                                    Workspace Explorer, just by clicking on them.



136 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                      Actix A Solutions User Guide
       FREE ANALYSIS OF IDEN DATA
                               This section describes tasks that you might take to analyze
                               IS-136 log files. These tasks have been chosen to
                               demonstrate most of the basic analysis features. Practicing
                               these will allow you to be productive with as soon as
                               possible.
                               For an in-depth understanding, you should attend a full
                               training / workshop session, as these can be tailored
                               exclusively to your needs as individual staff members and
                               for the company as a whole.

              The interface for A Solutions
                              After the startup is complete, the application window looks
                              like this:




Actix A Solutions User Guide                      Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 137
                                The arrangement of loaded help files and data display
                                windows is called the current workspace. You can save and
                                reuse workspaces as necessary.

                 Configure iDEN network information

                        Import iDEN network information
                                As well as geographical data, it is also useful to display
                                your network information on a map window. You must
                                have your network information defined in a text file
                                (usually called 'cellrefs', although it can be given any name)
                                before you can import it. You can use the Network
                                Explorer to import, view and edit the cellrefs file. To
                                maximize the benefit that can be brought to iDEN network
                                analysis, the following parameters should be included in
                                data imported into the tool.
 Parameter             Workspace Name                Purpose
 Site Name             IDEN_Site_SiteName            Text description of the Site for display on map.
 Site Number           IDEN_SiteID                   Numeric identifier for the Site.
 Latitude              IDEN_SiteLatitude             Locates Site icons on map.
 Longitude             IDEN_SiteLongitude            Locates Site icons on map.
 Sector Number         IDEN_Cell Sector ID Can       Sector-specific information useful for display on
                       use 1,2,3, etc, or a          maps.
                       combination of site numbers
 Azimuth               IDEN_Cell Azimuth             Orients the sector icons on the map.
 Beamwidth             IDEN_Cell Beamwidth           Governs the shape of the sector 'wedge' icon to
                                                     reflect the beamwidth of antenna deployed at the
                                                     site.
 Base Station Power    IDEN_Cell EIRP                Base station power
 CCCH                  IDEN_Cell CCCH                Common control channel. Can be used to color
                                                     the sector wedges.
 Color Codes           IDEN_Cell Color_Codes         A list of color codes separated by semicolons.
                                                     This list is designed to match the entries in the
                                                     TCH_List field. Used for determining likely serving
                                                     and neighbor cells.
 DCCH                  IDEN_Cell DCCH                Digital Control Channel
 DVCC                  IDEN_Cell DVCC                Digital Voice Color Code
 TCH_List              IDEN_Cell TCH_List            A list of traffic channels separated by semicolons.
                                                     This list is designed to match the entries in the
                                                     Color_Codes field. Used for determining likely
                                                     serving and neighbor cells.
 MCC                   IDEN_Cell MCC                 Mobile Country Code
 CI                    IDEN_Cell CI                  Cell Identity


                                To import iDEN network information
                                   1 From the Tools menu, select Network Explorer to
                                      open the Network Explorer window.



138 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                               Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                  2       From the toolbar, click Import and select Import
                                          From New Template to open the Import dialog.
                                     3 Select the appropriate network data file.
                                     4 Click Open to display the Custom Import Wizard.
                                     5 Give the Template a meaningful Description.
                                     6 Under Delimiters, check Tab.
                                     7 Under General Settings, enter '1' for Ignore
                                          header rows and ';' for Array (list) Separator. If
                                          your file has more than one header or uses a
                                          different array list separator, set these options
                                          accordingly.
                                     8 Click on the Column Settings tab. Here, you can
                                          associate a network parameter with a column of
                                          data in the text file. Each field name has an
                                          associated icon:
                                             Key fields (see page 164)
                                             Required fields (see page 164)
                                             Other fields (see page 164)
                                     9 Under the Columns heading, click on a setting for a
                                          particular field.
                                     10 Select a column binding from the drop-down list.
                                          The Wizard then displays the selected parameter
                                          against the appropriate column.
                                     11 Set the default value for that field as appropriate.
                                     12 Select the appropriate column bindings for IDEN
                                          Site and Site Name. Repeat this for the SiteID,
                                          Latitude, and Longitude.
                                     13 For the remaining columns, look for the attribute
                                          headers under IDEN Cell. Use the Cell ID column
                                          for the IDEN Cell Sector ID, Azimuth,
                                          Beamwidth, EIRP, CCCH, Color_Codes,
                                          TCH_List. A description of each of these
                                          parameters and their use appears in the table at the
                                          top of this section.
                                     14 Click Finish when all the columns have been
                                          assigned. The new cell information will be added at
                                          the bottom of the existing list in the Network
                                          Explorer.
       When the cellrefs file is updated, you should use the template you have created on the
       new file so that you do not have to repeat work you have already done, including the
       column-by-column parameter assignment.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                       Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 139
                       Set an iDEN network information file
                                  1 From the Tools menu, select Preferences to open
                                      the Preferences dialog:




                                    2    Click on File Location to select the cellrefs file.
                                    3    Click OK to close the Preferences dialog.
                                         You will now see this message:




                                         You may now want to close and restart for the
                                         change to take effect.

              Load iDEN data files
                                 1       From the toolbar, click the Open Logfile button:


                                          This displays the Open dialog.
                                     2 Select an appropriate file.
          Files of Type defaults to 'All Formats' but you can select a specific file type to look for.
          This also illustrates the many file formats available.

              Find and use iDEN data in the Workspace Explorer
                             The Workspace Explorer window is a graphical display of
                             all loaded data or log files and the data structure contained
                             within each file. Loaded files are at the highest level, with
                             devices and other data streams displayed at lower levels.




140 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                              Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               1   Click on the symbols to open out and explore the
                                   data in your logfile.
                                   See how your data relates to the structure shown
                                   above. In the example below, the file 'atlantW'
                                   contains a data stream called 'Nextel iDEN Handset
                                   (0)' (the number is the data stream number within
                                   the file, starting from zero). The 'iDEN' group
                                   contains the 'DownLink Measurements' set, which
                                   contains the 'ServRSSI' data attribute:




                                   However, the only objects that you actually need to
                                   recognize are filenames, data streams and data
                                   attributes.
                                   The logical tree-view layout of the Workspace
                                   Explorer allows you to drill down and identify all
                                   logged data. Once you have located the appropriate
                                   data attribute, you can open it in a data window—
                                   for example, a map, chart, table or spreadsheet—to
                                   examine the data in detail. You can examine data
                                   streams using the Message Browser tool.
                                   You may also want additional information about a
                                   particular data attribute.
                               2   From the Help menu, select Show Context Help.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                  Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 141
                                 3     Click the button to dock the attribute help
                                       window and drag it to a useful position, as shown
                                       here:




                                 4     Select a new attribute. Note that the help now
                                       provides information on that attribute.

              Delete iDEN data files

                             To remove a data file from the Workspace Explorer
                                1 Right-click on the name of the logfile to display the
                                   Close Logfile option.
                                2 Click Close Logfile.
                                   The data file is now removed from the Workspace
                                   Explorer display.

              Table view
                             Tables let you examine the numeric series, histogram and
                             statistical data for the selected attribute.



142 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                        Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                   •   From the Workspace Explorer, right-click on
                                       the data attribute 'DownLink Measurements >
                                       ServRSSI' and select Display on Table.




                                   This opens the Table window:




                                   •   Experiment with the other tabs in the window.

              The Message Browser
                           The Message Browser differs from the previous data
                           windows in that it only appears as a pop-up menu option at
                           the data stream level in the Workspace Explorer.
                                   •   From the Workspace Explorer, right-click on
                                       the data stream and select Display Message
                                       Browser.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                   Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 143
                               The Message Browser combines an event panel
                               (sequentially listing call events) with a panel of Layer 3
                               messaging, allowing you to pinpoint the root causes of
                               problems.




              View iDEN data
                               From the Workspace Explorer, you can right-click any data
                               attribute to display a suitable pop-up menu of options.
                                      •   Right-click on a data attribute.
                                      A pop-up menu opens, similar to this:




                                      Selecting one of the display methods opens the
                                      appropriate data window.

              View iDEN data in the Map window
                                 1 Use the pop-up menu to display the data attribute
                                     'ServRSSI' in a map window.




144 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                        Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               2   Click on the Pan button.
                               3   Click and drag the data around the map window.
                               4   Experiment with the Zoom buttons.
                               5   In the Workspace Explorer, open up the 'Event
                                   Data' set and drag the 'HandOver_Complete' event
                                   onto the map, which should look similar to this:




                                   Adding various events to the mapped data can help
                                   you see where problems are occurring.
                               6   Drag another data attribute onto the map.
                                   You can also change the size, symbol or color of the
                                   data, apply offsets to an attribute or merge attributes
                                   for a multidimensional display. See the online help
                                   for details.


Actix A Solutions User Guide                   Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 145
                                     The map legend defines histogram ranges for charts.
                                 7   Click on one of the check boxes in the Map Legend
                                     pane to hide the related attribute data on the map.
                                     Click on it again to redisplay the data.

              Replay the iDEN data
                            With a drive test file, you may want to recreate the drive
                            test by 'playing' through the data file from beginning to end.
                            You can do this using the Replay feature. To open the
                            Replay control, from the main menu, select Tools, then
                            Display Replay.




              View iDEN data in StateForms
                            While examining data on a map, you can also view data
                            attributes for the same data point by using the StateForms
                            tool.
                                 1 From the Tools menu, select Display StateForms.
                                 2 In the map window, click Select and select a data
                                   point.
                                   The StateForms window now displays a variety of
                                   attributes based on the data point you selected.




146 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                      Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                        Note that in this example, an appropriate cellrefs
                                        file has not been set, so no Cell or Sector ID
                                        information is displayed.
                               Advanced users can use the Design Mode of this feature to
                               create new forms for iDEN and other technologies. For
                               details, see Create a new StateForm.

              Print the iDEN data
                                    1 From the map window, click Print to open the Map
                                      Layout Designer, which starts with the Page Setup
                                      dialog open.
                                    2 Set the paper size, orientation and margins, and
                                      specify the header and footer for the page. Click
                                      OK to continue.
                                      You can now see the Map Layout Designer
                                      window.




                                    3   Click on the map, legend, headers or footers to edit,
                                        move or resize them as necessary.
                                    4   To check on what the map will look like when
                                        printed, click Print Preview.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                        Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 147
                                5   When satisfied with the layout, click Print to open
                                    the standard Windows Print dialog.

              View iDEN data in the Chart window
                                 1 Use the pop-up menu to display the data attribute
                                     'ServRSSI' in a chart window.




                                    You can display more than one attribute on the
                                    same chart.
                                2   Select and drag the data attribute 'ServSQE' from
                                    the Workspace Explorer window onto the existing
                                    chart.




                                    You can also zoom into selected areas of the chart
                                    by defining a frame for the zoom.
                                3   On the chart, click the upper left corner of the
                                    zooming rectangle, and drag down to the lower
                                    right extent of the rectangle.



148 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                     Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               4   Release the mouse button to complete the zoom
                                   action:




                                   Note that the zoom only operates in the X-axis, not
                                   in the Y-axis.
                               5   Now return the chart its original state by dragging a
                                   box, but this time up and to the right.
                               6   Use the right mouse button to drag the axes around
                                   the chart window.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                   Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 149
                                    Although you can drag the Y-axis for all attributes
                                    on the chart, you can only change the X-axis for the
                                    last attribute to be displayed on the chart.
                                    Also, you will see that a pop-up menu appears when
                                    you release the right mouse button. You would
                                    usually activate this menu by a single right-click.
                                7   Select Chart Properties to display this dialog:




                                8   Experiment with changing various display
                                    parameters and observe the effect on the chart.

              View synchronized iDEN data
                            The data in each of these windows is synchronized, so that
                            when displaying the same data attribute in a map, chart or
                            table, if you select a data point in one window, all related
                            map, chart or table windows also highlight the data point.
                             You should have a map and a chart window open, both
                             displaying the 'ServRSSI' data attribute.
                                1   From the map window, click on Select.



                                    Note the other toolbar buttons for selecting data
                                    points.
                                2   Now click on a data point on the map.
                                    You should see that the relevant parts of the map
                                    and the chart look as shown below, with a line


150 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                     Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                        appearing at the equivalent 'ServRSSI' point on the
                                        chart:




               Generate iDEN reports
                             You may want to create high-level management reports
                             based on your collected data. You can print from map and
                             chart windows, but the Workbook function (using
                             Microsoft Excel™) allows you to collate these views and
                             perform other data analysis functions to produce an
                             integrated, polished report.
       This task assumes that you have created an Excel template that you can use to generate a
       report. If you do not have a report template, see Reports for details of how to create one.
                                     1 From the Workbook menu, select Open
                                         Workbook and select an appropriate Excel
                                         template.
                                     2 Click Open.
                                     3 Select the data source that you want to view in the
                                         workbook report.




                                   4    Click OK to process and display the data in the
                                        workbook.
                                        You can proceed to adapt the workbook, use other
                                        Excel tools on the data, and so on.



Actix A Solutions User Guide                         Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 151
              Map backgrounds and layers
                           In the earlier example that looked at displaying data in a
                           map window, there was no background map image to put
                           the data into context. This section shows you how to add a
                           background and arrange the layers within a map window.
                                1   Display a data attribute in a map window.
                                2   From the map window, click Layers to open the
                                    Layer Control dialog.




                                    Making a checkmark in a layer’s box controls:
                                          if the layer is visible
                                          if objects on it can be selected
                                        if the layer can be annotated (clearing this box
                                    ‘locks’ the Annotations layer from having any
                                    further annotations added)
                                3   In the Layers box, click Add.




152 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                             Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               4   Select one or more MapInfo Map (.tab) files. For
                                   more information see MapInfo layers (see page 46).
                               5   Click Open to display the new map layer(s) in the
                                   Layer Control dialog.




                                   The top of the layer list represents the uppermost
                                   layer in this map window.
                               6   Click Up and Down to move the new 'examplemap'
                                   layer to the bottom and 'Annotations' to the top.
                               7   Click Close to return to the map view.
                                   In a new installation, the map location defaults to 0°
                                   longitude, 0° latitude, so you will need to arrange
                                   the map view to display the new map.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                   Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 153
                                 8    Pan the map viewing area by right-clicking in the
                                      map area, then choosing Zoom, Go to Layer and
                                      selecting the new map layer.
                                 9    Use the Zoom and Pan controls to arrange the map
                                      as required. To zoom in to an area, click Zoom In,
                                      then click and drag a rectangle around the area of
                                      interest.
                                      For some detailed layers, you can control at what
                                      degree of magnification they become visible. This
                                      helps to minimize map clutter.
                                 10   Right-click on the map window and select Map
                                      Layers to display the Layer Control dialog.
                                 11   Select a detailed layer—for example, S1 (street
                                      names).
                                 12   Click Display to open the Display Properties
                                      dialog.
                                 13   Check Display within Zoom range and enter '0' for
                                      Min Zoom and '10' for Max Zoom.
                                 14   Now do the same for street numbers, entering a
                                      zoom range of 0-3.

              Display iDEN network information
                            To display your network information on a map window,
                            you must have your network information defined in a text
                            file (usually called ‘cellrefs’, although it can be given any
                            name) before you can import it. You can use the Network
                            Explorer to view and edit the cellrefs file.
                             You should see graphics for each cell site appear on the
                             map, but they may be too big or two small. Here is a
                             zoomed-in map view, with a sample cell site in the lower
                             left and data points in a line on the right:




                             To alter the size of the cell symbols
                                1 From the map legend pane, right-click on IS-54_IS-
                                    136_Cell-DVCC and select Multi-d dataset Style.



154 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                      Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                  2   Select a new Size for the symbol font and click OK.

              Network Imaging
                            Files containing network data can be huge. Most of this
                            data will also go unexamined, and will simply create delays
                            in analyzing network behavior.
                               The Network Imaging feature lets you batch-process a
                               number of files into a pre-defined data set that can be
                               archived and collated to see how key network parameters
                               have changed over time.

                      Create a Network Image
                                 1 From the Network Image menu, select Create
                                    Network Image to open the Create Network Image
                                    dialog:




                                  2   Select a template and click OK.




                                  3   Enter a File name and location for the network
                                      image file and click Save.


Actix A Solutions User Guide                     Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 155
                                    The network image now appears in the Workspace
                                    Explorer.


                                    You are now ready to batch-load a set of related
                                    data files.

                     Batch-load iDEN data files
                                1 From the Network Image menu, select Attach
                                   Network Image to open the Select Network Image
                                   File dialog.




                                2   Select the appropriate file and click Open.
                                    The network image now appears in the Workspace
                                    Explorer.


                                3   Right-click on the Network Image file and select the
                                    Batch Load Files option.




                                    This opens the Select Files to Load dialog.




156 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                     Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               4   Select one or more data files and click Open.
                                   processes the files and, when complete, displays a
                                   message similar to this:




                               5   Click OK to close the message.
                               6   Open up the structure underneath the network
                                   image.




                               7   Now view the batched network image data
                                   attributes in the same way as you would for
                                   standard data attributes, using maps, charts and so
                                   on.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                   Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 157
              iDEN pre-configured reports
                              provides a set of pre-configured reports, each
                             concentrating on a particular type of network analysis.
                             These 'application layers' distil advanced analysis
                             techniques into simple, comprehensive spreadsheet reports,
                             ready for immediate use by staff of all levels of experience.
                              The application layers are listed under the Analysis menu–
                              which ones actually appear depend on the type of data file
                              loaded. Note that if you do not have a loaded data file, the
                              Analysis menu option will be grayed-out.
       You must also have set a valid CellRefs file.
                               A description of the reports contained within each
                               application layer is provided after the next section.

                              To use an application layer
                                 1 Ensure that you have a data file loaded.
                                 2 From the Analysis menu, select an application
                                     layer.
                                     Once you select an application layer, the application
                                     layer window opens.




                                      The top pane shows a tree-view of the network
                                      structure against various statistics produced by the
                                      application layer.




158 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                        Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                  3 Use the top pane as necessary to narrow down the
                                    data in your selection.
                                    All reports appropriate to your selection are
                                    displayed under the Suggested tab. If you want to
                                    use another report, look under the All tab to view all
                                    reports available within the current application
                                    layer.
                                  4 Double-click on a report icon to open the report.




                                      This will report on all data selected in the upper
                                      tree-view panel.
                                  5   As required, use the buttons at the bottom of the
                                      window to Save the report as a web-compatible
                                      HTML file set, Print the report to your printer or
                                      open the report in Excel using Show Excel Report.

                               To reset thresholds for a new analysis
                               A number of the application layer reports use Custom
                               Attributes. To change the thresholds for a new analysis,
                               you need to re-run this Custom Attribute from the Custom
                               Attribute Manager:
                                      •   Distance_Input
                               You can now re-run the application layer.


Actix A Solutions User Guide                      Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 159
                     iDEN Drive Test application layers

                            iDEN Summary Reports
                              iDEN Call Statistics
                            Summary of major call events and performance statistics.
                              iDEN SQE and RSSI Breakdown
                            RSSI and SQE PDFs and CDFs.
                                Handoff Quality Breakdown
                            For a five-second window around each handoff, determines
                            if the handoff was to a better or worse RSSI and a better or
                            worse SQE.
                              Handoff Quality Stats
                            For a five-second window around the handoff event, gives
                            PDF and CDF of the RSSI and SQE before and after the
                            event. Shows if the majority of handoffs occurred to a
                            better or worse quality condition.
                               iDEN Distant Servers- HS
                            Prompts you for a maximum distance in miles from the
                            serving cell. Returns key performance metrics by Serving
                            Site, for cases where the maximum serving cell distance is
                            exceeded.

                            iDEN Event Inspection
                              Dropped Call Statistics
                            For every dropped call, this reports key performance
                            metrics for a 5-second window before the drop.
                              Handover Failure Statistics
                            For every handover failure, this reports key performance
                            metrics for a 5-second window before the event.
                               Measurement Inquiry Statistics
                            For every measurement inquiry, this reports key
                            performance metrics for an 8-second window before and
                            after each event.
                               Measurement Reports Exceeded at Handoff
                            Returns key performance parameters for instances where
                            the number of measurement reports, 8 seconds before
                            handoff, exceeds a user-defined threshold.




160 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                    Actix A Solutions User Guide
              Aggregate iDEN data
                             has an adaptable data structure, so you can select different
                            aggregation modes for the data, depending upon how you
                            want to view the data. supports these modes:
                                      •   Location/grid
                                      •   Time
                                      •   Message
                                      •   Distance
                               To change the aggregation ('binning') mode:
                                  1 From the Tools menu, select Preferences to open
                                    the Preferences dialog.
                                  2 Under Binning, select the appropriate Binning
                                    Mode.




                                  3   Click Apply.

              Use Queries
                                provides a querying interface that lets you construct simple
                               or complex expressions. These expressions extract
                               meaningful performance data, based on user-defined
                               thresholds or the value of other expressions.
                               As an example, you can create a query that returns statistics
                               for a particular event—such as a dropped call—for a given
                               window in time around that event. This is useful when
                               looking for data trends.



Actix A Solutions User Guide                      Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 161
                                Queries are created and edited from the Tools menu,
                                Analysis Manager option. You can create these query
                                types:
                                       •   Filter queries
                                       •   Binned queries
                                       •   Histogram queries
                                       •   Statistical queries
                                       •   Crosstab queries
                                       •   Event queries
                                You can also:
                                       •   Perform logical and arithmetic operators
                                       •   Save queries to a default Workspace
                                       •   Apply filters to queries

              Create a filter
                                This query is designed to filter poor quality in iDEN data.
                                   1   From the Workspace Explorer, right-click on a data
                                       stream and select Filter, then Create a New Filter.




                                       The Filter Wizard opens.
                                   2   Enter 'Poor Quality' as the name of the filter.
                                   3   Click on the right-arrow of the attribute picker and
                                       select 'iDEN > DownLink Measurements >
                                       ServSQE'.
                                   4   Set the filter operation to 'Less than ( < )'.
                                   5   Set the threshold to '-20'.




162 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                          Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               6   Click OK to close the Wizard.
                                   If you already have a filter applied to the stream,
                                   you will see this dialog:




                               7   Click Yes.
                                   Any other data display windows update to show the
                                   areas with poor quality.
                                   You can turn off this and any other filters from the
                                   Workspace Explorer, just by clicking on them.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                   Analyzing data with Actix Solutions 163
              Key fields
                                You must select a field type for this field, but you cannot
                                set a default value.

              Required fields
                                These must be either bound to a particular type or have a
                                default value set.

              Other fields
                                Binding particular field types or setting default values is
                                not strictly necessary for this field.




164 Analyzing data with Actix Solutions                          Actix A Solutions User Guide
Workspaces

About workspaces
                               The workspace constitutes all data display windows within
                               the Actix application window, together with the Workspace
                               Explorer (see page 166).




                               When you start your Actix Solution, you start with an
                               empty workspace, but you can load a previously saved
                               workspace. A workspace contains the layout of all
                               windows plus all loaded data files and all defined items
                               such as reports and queries.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                             Workspaces 165
About the Workspace Explorer
                        The Workspace Explorer window—on the left of the
                        application window—graphically displays all loaded data
                        files and the data contained within each file. The example
                        on the right also shows the Attribute Help window docked
                        underneath. This provides help on attributes as they are
                        selected in the Workspace Explorer.
                        The logical groupings in the tree-view layout let you drill
                        down to all logged data held under the Loaded Data Files
                        section. Loaded files are at the highest level, with data
                        streams produced for each logging device, and data groups,
                        sets and attributes displayed at lower levels:




                        You can view stream messages in the Message Browser
                        window by right-clicking on them and selecting Display
                        Message Browser from the pop-up menu. You can open
                        option menus for most objects in the Workspace Explorer.
                        Click on the plus and minus signs in front of an object to
                        open and close that part of the tree. Opening a branch
                        displays any objects at a lower level in the structure.




166 Workspaces                                          Actix A Solutions User Guide
Although the Workspace Explorer looks similar to the Microsoft Windows Explorer, the structure
shown under a log file is a logical display of data—there is no corresponding set of files or folders
on your hard drive.
                                  Once you have found the appropriate data attribute, you can
                                  use the mouse to drag and drop the attribute from the
                                  Workspace Explorer onto a data display window. This
                                  window can be a map, chart, spreadsheet or table, and can
                                  also be opened by right-clicking on an attribute and
                                  selecting an option (see Show a menu of attribute options
                                  on page 173).




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                                     Workspaces 167
                 When examining the data from a drive test, you may want
                 to step through each data point in sequence. The Replay
                 Control (see Use the Replay Control on page 174) allows
                 you to do this.
                 Maps, charts, tables and the Message Browser are
                 synchronized, so that if you click on a data point, message
                 or row of data, the equivalent point is displayed in each
                 open window.

                 You can also produce artificial data streams by merging
                 data files together. This process is called ‘superstreaming’.
                 In the example below, a drive test and a call trace file have
                 been superstreamed so that uplink data can be displayed on
                 a map.




                 You can also superstream PCM Link data (for example, an
                 Abis file) with drive test data.
                 At the bottom of the Workspace Explorer window are two
                 tabs, All and Favorites.


168 Workspaces                                   Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               The All tab shows all items displayed in the Workspace
                               Explorer.
                               The Favorites tab shows only certain user-defined
                               attributes, selected by right-clicking on an attribute and
                               selecting Add To Favorites. You may find this useful if
                               you only regularly use a few particular attributes.
                               You can also right-click on the attribute to open a pop-up
                               command list. From this list you can select various display
                               options for the attribute.

                               See also
                               View an attribute in a data window (see page 21)
                               View a data stream in the Message Browser (see page 174)

About binning data
                               Binning is a method of grouping and averaging the data
                               loaded from a log file.
                               Initially the data to be binned is partitioned according to a
                               user-defined criterion. This binning criterion can be
                               specified in terms of:
                                      •   Time
                                      •   geographic Location
                                      •   Distance traveled
                                      •   Message number
                               For example, with Time binning based on one-second
                               intervals, data values are sorted according to the time at
                               which they were logged. All values are sorted into one-
                               second ‘bins’.
                               An averaging operation is then performed on the data
                               collected in each bin, to produce a single value. This
                               operation may be a simple Mean or one of a number of
                               other operations such as Mode or Minimum value. The
                               appropriate operation for each data attribute is
                               automatically used.
                               The net result of this process is a data set comprising values
                               averaged from the original set of data values and it is this
                               data set that is viewed on graphs, charts and reports




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                               Workspaces 169
                          One example of an application of binning is the export of
                          CW scanning data into a propagation prediction tool. This
                          is often done as part of a validation process by RF Planning
                          departments. Since planning tools handle data in
                          geographic bins, it can be useful to convert the CW data
                          into bins of the correct size before exporting. The Location
                          binning mode is ideal for this task.
                          To set the default binning settings for the workspace, from
                          the Tools menu, select Preferences. This opens the
                          Preferences dialog.

Use workspaces
To…                       Do this…
Create a new workspace    Select File | New Workspace
Open an existing          Select File | Open Workspace
workspace
Save a workspace          Select File | Save Workspace As…
                          Select File | Save Workspace
                          All loaded data files and positions of all data display
                          windows—such as maps and charts—and their contents.
Add an attribute to the   Right-click on an attribute and select Add To Favorites.
Favorites tab             Selected attributes appear in the Favorites tab:




170 Workspaces                                           Actix A Solutions User Guide
Open a data file
                                       •   From the File menu, select Open Logfile         .
                                       The name of the data file now appears in the
                                       Workspace Explorer window under Loaded Data
                                       Files. You can now click on and open out the file’s
                                       data structure.




Import a text file
                               From the File menu, select Import Text File to open the
                               Text File Import Wizard.
                               For each step of the Wizard, enter the appropriate
                               information and click Next to proceed.
                                    1 Select the name of the text file to import.
       If an Import Configuration was saved from a previous text import, you have the option to
       use it for this import.
                                    2 Select the delimiters to separate the data fields. The
                                        Data Preview pane shows the raw data, with lines
                                        indicating how the data will be separated.
                                        If appropriate, select First line contains attribute
                                        names to automatically name each data column.
                                        Appropriate formatting and binning options will be
                                        selected where possible.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                                 Workspaces 171
                              3   If you did not select the 'First line' option, click on
                                  each data field and enter an Attribute name or select
                                  on from the attribute picker (shown below).




                                  You can also change the default formatting and
                                  binning options.

      Bin operation   Does this for each bin…
      Count           Returns the number of values.
      Mean            Returns the average value.
      Linear Mean     Converts log values to linear values, averages the result,
                      then converts this average linear value back to a log value.
      GSM RxQual      As Linear Mean, but used for RxQual values ranging from
                      0-7.
      Max             Returns the highest value.
      Most            Returns the most frequent value.
      Most Hold       As Most but retains the last value. Used for attributes
                      where values are reported infrequently.


                              4   If desired, save the Import Configuration defined in
                                  this Wizard, and click Finish to complete the
                                  import.
                                  The text file is displayed in the Workspace Explorer
                                  just like any other data file.



172 Workspaces                                             Actix A Solutions User Guide
Run an analysis on the data
                               Once you have loaded a logfile, you can select an analysis
                               type, which allows you to run one or more pre-configured
                               analysis reports.
                                  1 From the Analysis menu, select an appropriate
                                    analysis.
                                    The Application Pack dialog opens to show network
                                    information with related information derived from
                                    the logfile data. Potential problem areas are
                                    highlighted in red.
                                  2 Select one or more 'problem' network elements from
                                    this view.
                                    This narrows down the data to be included in a
                                    report (useful for A/Abis files or any large files).
                                    Underneath the top section of the dialog is a tabbed
                                    section containing icons for each report within the
                                    analysis. The Suggested tab shows all reports
                                    appropriate to the currently selected network
                                    elements. The All tab shows all available reports for
                                    the analysis, regardless of suitability for the selected
                                    data.
                                  3 Double-click a report icon to open a report window
                                    on the selected data.
                                  4 From here you can Save the report as a web (*htm)
                                    page, Print the report or open it in Excel by
                                    clicking Show Excel Report.

Show a menu of attribute options
                                      •   From the Workspace Explorer, right-click on an
                                          attribute to show a pop-up menu. This menu
                                          lists all the options that you can perform
                                          involving this attribute.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                             Workspaces 173
View an attribute in a data window
                                 1   From the Workspace Explorer, right-click on the
                                     attribute to open a pop-up menu.




                                 2      Select one of the Display options.
                                 3      The attribute now appears in a new data window of
                                        the selected type.
      If a chart window is already open, you can also drag an attribute from the Workspace
      Explorer and drop it onto an existing data window.

Use the Replay Control
                                 1   From the Workspace Explorer, select the stream
                                     name.
                                 2   From the Tools menu, select Display Replay to
                                     open the Replay Control dialog.
                                 3   Click on the buttons to move forwards and
                                     backwards by one data point at a time, or at a
                                     selectable speed through the data. A bar at the
                                     bottom of the dialog shows the current position
                                     within the file.




View a data stream in the Message Browser
                                 1   From the Workspace Explorer, right-click on the
                                     data stream to display a pop-up menu.




174 Workspaces                                               Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               2   Select Display Message Browser. The data stream
                                   now appears in the Message Browser window.




View the results of a query
                               1   From the Workspace Explorer window’s Queries
                                   heading, select the appropriate query.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                       Workspaces 175
                           2   Right-click on the query to display the pop-up
                               option menu.




                           3   Select the desired choice from the menu.

Export data to a file
                        You may want to export data to a file.
                           1   From the File menu, select Export as Text to open
                               the Export Wizard.
                           2   For each step of the Wizard, enter the appropriate
                               information and click Next to proceed.
                               Wizard Step 1—select the data stream that you want
                               to export data from.
                               Wizard Step 2—select one or more data attributes
                               that are to be exported.
                               Wizard Step 3—specify the export format using the
                               options provided:
                               Data Process Method – choose whether or not to
                               use the current binning settings on the data before it
                               is exported.
                               Delimiter Type – select how you want each data
                               item to be separated.
                               Hold last valid value – check to cause the last valid
                               data value that was exported to be re-exported when
                               an invalid value is encountered.
                               Export time as absolute time – check to force time
                               attribute data to be exported in absolute time in the
                               format ‘hh:mm:ss dd-mm-yyyy’. By default, when
                               exporting the time attribute the time data is exported
                               in relative time.
                               Write column heading as first line – check to
                               generate a header containing the names of all the
                               attributes.
                               Output unit type – check to include the unit type in
                               the header.


176 Workspaces                                         Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                   Export to File – enter the location and the name of
                                   the output file.
                               3   Click Finish to write the text file using the specified
                                   format.

Merge data streams
                               1   From the Tools menu, select Create Superstream
                                   to open the Superstreaming dialog. This dialog
                                   shows all currently available data streams.
                               2   Check each data stream that you want to combine as
                                   a superstream.
                               3   Click Settings to expand the dialog.
                               4   Select the Merge Method settings:
                                   Use timestamps – this uses timestamp data within
                                   each stream to synchronize the data.
                                   Correlated Parameters – use specified data
                                   attributes to correlate the data streams. To achieve a
                                   strong correlation, choose attributes that represent
                                   the same measurement on the uplink and downlink,
                                   as shown in this example of superstreaming GSM
                                   drive test and call-trace data streams:




                                   Time Offsets – select this to apply a shift to the
                                   time value for one of the streams. This is a good
                                   option for superstreaming mobile and land-based
                                   log files collected using speech quality equipment.
                               5   Click OK to start the superstreaming.



Actix A Solutions User Guide                                           Workspaces 177
      SUPERSTREAM PCM LINK AND DRIVE TEST DATA
                             PCM Link data, for example from A, Abis or Gb logfiles
                             can be combined with drive test data collected
                             simultaneously. This allows the GPS coordinates from the
                             drive test to be matched to the uplink information, so the
                             uplink information or the difference between uplink and
                             downlink information can then be plotted on a map.
                                 1 From the Tools menu, select Choose Scenario to
                                   open the Attach Load Time Queries dialog.
                                 2 Select an appropriate Load Time Query (e.g. Abis
                                   Call Analysis).
                                 3 Now Open the PCM Link file and the drive test file
                                   to be superstreamed.
                                 4 From the Tools menu, select Superstream
                                   PCMLink/DT to open the PCM-Link/Drive Test
                                   Superstreaming dialog.
                                 5 Select the appropriate Drive Test stream(s).
                                 6 Select the appropriate PCM-Link stream(s).
                                 7 Select the appropriate Search Method settings for
                                   synchronizing the data streams.
                                 8 Click OK to begin the Superstreaming process.
                                   When the process is complete, the superstream is
                                   displayed in the Workspace Explorer, and the
                                   normal data displays (maps, charts, tables, analysis
                                   reports) may be used to examine the data.

Use Load Time Queries
                             When using 'PCM link' data from—for example—A/Abis
                             or Gb logfiles, you may find that the most of the data in
                             these files is not relevant to your requirements. Load Time
                             queries allow you to only load the data that you need for
                             your analyses.

                             To select one or more Load Time queries
      Ensure that under Tools | Preferences, Load Mode is set to 'Minimal'.
                             Either:
                                     •   Import the Load Time queries
                                     •   Set existing queries to be Load Time queries
                             Once you have selected one or more Load Time queries, all
                             subsequently loaded data files will be processed by the



178 Workspaces                                                Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               queries, and you can analyze the data just like normal data
                               attributes.

Workspace toolbar reference

This control        Does this…
  New               Discards the current workspace for an empty workspace.
Workspace
  Open              Discards the current workspace for a specified workspace.
Workspace
 Save               Saves the current workspace as an .xml file.
Workspace
   Open Logfile     Loads a specified logfile.



Preferences dialog

Setting             Notes

CellRefs
File Location       Specifies the text file containing network element data. This file
                    must be in the Actix 'cellrefs' format. The information from this
                    cellrefs file takes effect from the next time a new workspace is
                    created.

Automatic
Import
Enable Automatic    Check this box to override the cellrefs file specified above, and
Import              instead automatically import a new file using an import template
                    (both specified below). This is useful in situations where the
                    network element data is liable to be updated frequently.
                    Note that each Automatic Import will overwrite your existing cellrefs.txt file.
Automatic Import    Specifies the text file containing network element data, which is
Input File          imported automatically in future when the system determines that
                    the file has been updated. The information from this file takes effect
                    from the next time a new workspace is created.
Automatic Import    Specifies the template to be used for the automatic network element
Template            data import. A set of default templates are provided for the main
                    network technologies.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                                   Workspaces 179
WCDMA Neighbor List
Reporting Range Cells from the active and monitored sets must fall within this value
                of the best pilot to be included in the neighbor list (the default is
                5dB).
Maximum Size        The maximum number of neighbor cells allowed in the list at any
                    one time (the default is 15).

General Settings
Auto Synch to
Stream
GPS Interpolation   This takes effect from the next time a file is loaded.
                    Drive-test data is often affected by inaccuracies in GPS navigation
                    devices. These inaccuracies can be caused in various ways—often
                    through the ‘selective availability’ artificially introduced into the
                    system for civilian signals, but also by atmospheric conditions and
                    operation in urban areas where the line-of-sight to GPS satellites
                    changes very quickly. The end results are ‘jumps’ or gaps in the
                    positioning of the data. If the distance over time between
                    consecutive points exceeds a threshold (‘Distance Units’) and GPS
                    Interpolation is checked, the actual position of the data is
                    automatically estimated.
Distance Units      This takes effect immediately.
                    This defines the distance threshold used for ‘GPS Interpolation’.
Use Small
Toolbars




180 Workspaces                                                Actix A Solutions User Guide
                    This takes effect from the next time a file is loaded.
Time Offsets
                    Switch or Mobile time offsets are used to shift the start time of call
                    trace files taken in various parts of the world so that they can be
                    viewed in other time zones properly.
                    These settings take effect immediately, and affect files that are
Binning             currently loaded.
Binning Mode        Time—This mode combines data in the time domain. Data points
                    are generated in increments of time, with the duration of each
                    increment determined by the setting ‘Time (ms)’.
                    Location—This mode groups data into bins in a spatial grid. The
                    ‘Location’ settings are used to define the grid.
                    Distance—The Distance bin mode combines data in bins
                    corresponding to distance neighbor by the test mobile. The
                    ‘Distance’ setting defines this bin size.
                    Message—This mode combines data with respect to the timing of
                    received messages. When this mode is selected, data is combined
                    within bins, defined by the time stamps of sequential messages
                    logged by the test mobile.
Time (ms)           If using the ‘Time’ Binning Mode, this specified the duration in
                    milliseconds of each bin size.
Distance (m)        If using the ‘Distance’ Binning Mode, this specifies the bin size in
                    units of meters from the first point in the data file.
Message             If using the ‘Message’ Binning Mode, this specifies the number of
                    messages over which the data will be averaged.
                    These settings are used for the Location Binning Mode.
Location
Projection          The units of the X Size and Y Size will depend on the Projection
                    method selected here.
X Size / Y Size     These define the X and Y widths of each cell in the grid for the
                    Location Binning Mode.
                    Map projection systems such as WGS84 will require that the grid
                    size must be entered in units of seconds (of latitude and longitude).
                    With local-grid co-ordinate systems such as UK NGR, all values are
                    entered in units of meters – X being the Easting value and Y the
                    Northing.
                    These values take effect from the next time a file is loaded.
Decode Settings
Minimum Valid       Defines the minimum threshold for which an RSSI is valid. On
Signal Level        loading a log file, signals are filtered out below this user-defined
(dBm)               range.



Actix A Solutions User Guide                                                 Workspaces 181
Ec/Io Threshold     Used to calculate the threshold at which multipath components are
for Delay (dB)      counted in the delay histograms for the Active, Candidate,
                    Neighbor, and Remaining sets from the searcher finger data.
Scan Resolution     Defines how often measurements are reported, measured in chips.
(chips)
Number of           Defines the number of multipaths that will be extracted and
multipaths          displayed in the Workspace Explorer.
Scanner Scan        Defines how often scanner measurements are reported, measured in
Resolution          chips.
Pilot Increment     Used to calculate the PN Offset (units of 64 chips) associated with
                    the PN Phase (units of chips) data reported in the CDMA air-
                    interface messaging. PN Offset is calculated by dividing the
                    PILOT_PN_PHASE by 64 and then rounding to the closest integer
                    multiple of the PN increment entered. This feature forces all PN
                    Offsets calculated to be part of a valid PN reuse plan.
Too Many            Defines the maximum number of entries in the neighbor lists. When
Neighbors           neighbor list entries in the air interface messaging exceed this
Threshold           threshold, an event (TooManyNeighbors) is displayed in the
                    Workspace Explorer and a warning message is indicated in the
                    *.warning output file.
Weak Ec/Io Pilot    Defines when the best server pilot has dropped beneath a tolerable
Threshold           threshold and is considered weak. This displays an event
                    (WeakPilotAlert) in the Workspace Explorer and in the warning file.
Display Cell        Check the box to display the Cell Identity (CI) in hexadecimal
Identity as Hex     (rather than decimal) in the Message Browser.
No of Frame         Defines the size of a burst for Burst Error Rate calculations (time
Errors in a Burst   series parameter: For_FBER).
Searcher            The dB threshold for reporting QUALCOMM Searcher data is set to
Threshold           15dB. This control is no longer used.
Ec/Io Threshold     Determines whether a multipath component may be evaluated and
(dB)                displayed in the Workspace Explorer. The Explorer will only
                    display the top n multipaths, where n is the ‘Number of multipaths’.
Use 20ms
resolution for
CDMA




182 Workspaces                                               Actix A Solutions User Guide
PCM Link
Load Mode             This is used for PCM Link data such as A, Abis and Gb files. Select
                      between:
                      Minimal (default) – Only loads data produced by the currently
                      attached Load Time Queries.
                      Full – Loads the entire file.
PCU Abis Vendor       For example, Alcatel.
A-interface file      ITU (Europe) / ANSI (USA). This setting takes effect from the next
standard              time a file is loaded.
                      These settings take effect from the next time a file is loaded.
Agilent MDB
Show Agilent data     Select No to load all data from an Agilent file.
selection dialog      Select Yes to display the dialog when opening an Agilent file. The
                      dialog allows selection of specific data sets rather than loading the
                      entire file.
                      The following controls can also be selected from the Agilent dialog:
Intermediate file     Remove intermediate files after load / Keep intermediate files in
handling              log-file folder / Keep intermediate files in selected folder
Intermediate file     Select the file location.
folder
Use intermediate      No / Yes
files if available
                      These settings take effect from the next time a file is loaded.
Agilent SD5
Show Agilent-
specific attributes
EcIo Nth Best         Sort by EcIo Aggregate/EcIo Max
Sorting
                      This sets the values for the WCDMA Soft Handover algorithm, as
WCDMA                 indicated in the 3GPP specifications.
Reporting Range       Add/Remove/Replace cell
Event1A/1B/1C
(dB)
Hysteresis            Add/Remove/Replace cell
Event1A/1B/1C
(dB)




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                               Workspaces 183
Time to Trigger   Add/Remove/Replace cell
Event1A/1B/1C
(ms)
Max. Active Set
Size (up to 8)




184 Workspaces                              Actix A Solutions User Guide
Viewing data
Workbooks/reports
       ABOUT WORKBOOKS
                               The Workbook window allows you to manipulate data
                               within a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet environment, display
                               the data in charts and produce management reports.
       Microsoft Excel must be installed for this functionality to work.
                               If you want to quickly browse numerical data, you may
                               find the Table functionality easier to use.
                               A typical workbook containing attribute data will look
                               similar to this:




                               To find out about how to manipulate data, see the MS
                               Excel online help, which you can view by clicking on the
                               help button on the toolbar.
       You can also display queries in a workbook in the same way as you would for an attribute.
                               Once you have the appropriate data displayed in the
                               workbook, you may want to add formatting, headings and
                               so on to create a presentable report. You can then save this
                               workbook as a workbook file or as a template file. A
                               template may be better if you intend to reuse the same
                               report many times in the future, using different data.



Actix A Solutions User Guide                                                 Viewing data 185
                               When you open the file later, the data will be regenerated
                               using the currently loaded data. See a CDMA example of
                               reporting.

      DISPLAY DATA ATTRIBUTES IN A WORKBOOK
                                       •   From the Workspace Explorer, right-click on a
                                           data attribute and select Display on Workbook.
                                           A workbook opens, displaying the appropriate
                                           data.
                                       •   If you already have a workbook open, you can
                                           also select the option Display on Workbook
                                           (active) to display the data on the existing MS
                                           Excel workbook.
      As Microsoft Excel is a separate application, clicking on either Excel or the Actix Solution
      window will hide the other application. However, you can drag an attribute onto an existing
      workbook by dragging it onto the Excel button on the taskbar at the bottom of the Windows
      screen.

              View Series data in a workbook
                             The bottom of the Microsoft Excel workbook shows
                             several tabs. Check that the Series Formatted Data tab is
                             selected. This displays in numeric form the same data that
                             would be displayed in a Series Chart. Other related
                             information may also be displayed—for example, time and
                             coordinate data.




186 Viewing data                                                  Actix A Solutions User Guide
              View Histogram data in a workbook
                            The bottom of the Microsoft Excel workbook shows
                            several tabs. Check that the Histogram Formatted Data tab
                            is selected. This displays in numeric form the same data
                            that would be displayed in a Histogram Chart.




              View Statistic data in a workbook
                              The bottom of the Microsoft Excel workbook shows
                              several tabs. Check that the Statistic Formatted Data tab is
                              selected. This displays various statistical values related to
                              the selected data attribute.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                             Viewing data 187
      SAVE A WORKBOOK/REPORT
                                  1  From the Microsoft Excel menu bar, select File |
                                     Save As to open the Save As dialog.
                                 2 Enter the Name of the workbook file.
                                 3 Select the Type to be ‘.xls’ (for a workbook) or
                                     ‘.xlt’ (for a template).
                                 4 Select the appropriate folder in which to save the
                                     file.
                                 5 Click OK.
      When you place a query in a workbook and save the workbook, the query definition is
      stored in the workbook.

      OPEN AN EXISTING WORKBOOK/REPORT
                                    1 From the main menu bar, select Workbook | Open
                                        Workbook / Report to open the Open Workbook
                                        File dialog.
                                    2 Select the appropriate workbook file and click OK.
      If you are trying to open a workbook that is already open, you will be warned that if you
      continue the existing workbook will be closed.
                                        The Stream Selection dialog opens, showing all data
                                        streams in the current workspace.
                                  3   For the named data stream used in the workbook,
                                      select an equivalent source in the current workspace
                                      and click OK.


188 Viewing data                                                Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                    4    Repeat step 3 for each additional data stream in the
                                         workbook.
                                         Microsoft Excel opens to display the workbook,
                                         with all data now regenerated based on the current
                                         data in the stream(s).
       Note that if you make any changes to the data—for example if you filter the data in the
       workspace—the workbook does not automatically update.
       If the workbook contains a query that is not in the current workspace, the results of the
       query will be regenerated within the workbook and the query will be added to the
       workspace, appearing in the Workspace Explorer.
       If the workspace contains a new version of a query in the workbook, the results of the
       query will be regenerated and the existing query updated to the new version in the
       workbook.



Charts
       ABOUT CHARTS
                                Charts provide a graphical display of statistical data, which
                                allow you to interpret the behavior over time of
                                performance statistics.




                                The chart displays the data according to the current
                                charting mode. Buttons on the chart window toolbar set the
                                charting mode.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                                    Viewing data 189
                            By default, synchronization between data windows is
                            enabled, so if you click on a data point on a chart, you can
                            see the same data point highlighted in any other open data
                            display window.


      DISPLAY DATA IN A CHART WINDOW
                                       •   From the Workspace Explorer, right-click on a
                                           data attribute and select Display on chart. A
                                           chart window opens, displaying the appropriate
                                           data:




190 Viewing data                                              Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                       •   If you already have a chart window open, you
                                           can also drag a data attribute onto the existing
                                           chart. This example shows two attributes
                                           displayed on one chart:




       VIEW DATA SYNCHRONIZED WITH THE CHART
                                       •   From the Chart window toolbar, click on a
                                           position on a chart.
       If you have an open Map window displaying the same data attribute, the same data point is
       highlighted.
       If you have an open Message Browser window, the appropriate message containing the
       same data point is highlighted.

       ZOOM THE CHART VIEW

                               To zoom the chart view
                                     • With the mouse, drag a box around the area of
                                        the chart that you want to zoom in on. Start at
                                        the top left of the box and drag down to the
                                        bottom right corner of this rectangular area. The
                                        chart view now zooms in to this area.
       The zoom only operates in the X-axis. The Y-axis is unaffected by the zoom.

                               To restore the chart view
                                      • Drag a box—the position does not matter—
                                         starting from the bottom to the top. The chart is
                                         now restored to its previous extents.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                                Viewing data 191
      PAN THE CHART VIEW
                                        •    Drag by moving the mouse while holding down
                                             the right mouse button. The unit information on
                                             each axis moves along with the data values.
      If there is more than one attribute on the chart, only the last attribute displayed can be
      panned in both X- and Y-axes. All attributes can be panned in the X-axis.

      VIEW A DIFFERENT CHART TYPE
                                From the toolbar at the top of the chart window, select a
                                button to display the data in that type of chart display.




      Note that some data is not suited to be displayed in particular chart types.


      PRINT THE CHART
                                    1   From the Chart window, click Print             to show the
                                        TeeChart Print Preview dialog.




192 Viewing data                                                    Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               2   Use the controls on this dialog to set how the
                                   printed page is to appear.
                               3   Click Print.

       EDIT THE CHART
                               1   Click Properties     to open the Editing dialog
                                   (also called the Chart Editor). Many controls for
                                   editing the appearance and layout of the chart are
                                   provided, spread over several tabs of the dialog.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                          Viewing data 193
      You can also right-click anywhere on the chart to open a pop-up menu, and select Chart
      Properties to open the Editing dialog.
                                   2 Experiment with the controls to achieve a preferred
                                       appearance for the chart.

                             Chart tab
                                    • From the 3D tab, select 3 Dimensions to
                                       produce a three-dimensional chart
                                     •   From the Panel tab, use the Gradient and Back
                                         Image controls to produce an attractive
                                         background

                             Series tab
                                     • Use the Format tab to control the data series
                                        line
                             For a full explanation of the function of each of these
                             controls, click Help to display the TeeChart user guide.

      EXPORT THE CHART TO OTHER APPLICATIONS
                                 1   From the chart window, right-click to open a pop-
                                     up menu:




194 Viewing data                                               Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                   2   Select Image Export to open this dialog:




                                   3   Select the appropriate format and select Save To
                                       File to open the Save As dialog.
                                   4   Enter a path and file name and click OK.
                                   5   Click Close to dismiss the Export dialog.


                Chart toolbar reference
This control       Does this…
   Properties      Opens the Editing (see Show a menu of attribute options on page 173)
                   dialog and lets you control the display of the chart.
   Series          Displays chart data as a series (see View a different chart type on page
                   192).
   Histogram       Displays chart data as a histogram (see View a different chart type on
                   page 192).
  Copy             Copies the chart to the Windows Clipboard. You can then paste it into
                   an appropriate application such as Word.
   Print           This displays the TeeChart Print Preview dialog (see Print the chart on
                   page 192). Use the controls on this dialog to set how the printed page
                   is to appear, then click Print.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                             Viewing data 195
Maps
       ABOUT MAPS
                    Within the Map window, the main panel displays the map
                    and any attribute data plotted on the map. Toolbars along
                    the top of the window provide commonly used functions.




                    Hovering the cursor over a data point displays information
                    on that point.
                    The left-hand panel displays the legends for any data series
                    on the map. Click on the plus sign by the data series title to
                    expand the legend. The number in brackets is the number
                    of data points lying within that particular range.




196 Viewing data                                    Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               You can access
                               map controls by
                               right-clicking on
                               the main map
                               panel.




                               You can also
                               access legend
                               controls by right-
                               clicking on the
                               legend panel.




                               When you select a data point on the map, ray lines can link
                               the point to the appropriate sector for serving and neighbor
                               sites. Associated configurable messages display signal
                               strength information.
                               By default, synchronization between data windows is
                               enabled, so if you click on a data point on the map, you can
                               see the same data point highlighted in any other open data
                               display window.
                               Each map window can be made up of several layers. There
                               is one layer for each attribute displayed on the map
                               window, one layer for each set of imported background
                               map objects, plus one layer on which you can create
                               annotations.
                               If you have a map containing several data attributes, you
                               can combine the attributes to see the situation on the map
                               more clearly. Each attribute is displayed with a different
                               color, shape or size.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                             Viewing data 197
                            The example here shows two attributes combined, one
                            using color and the other using shape:




                            In the middle of the example, the value of the second
                            attribute changes, so the shape changes from a triangle to a
                            square.

      DISPLAY ATTRIBUTE DATA ON A MAP
                                1   From the Map's tool bar, click Edit Series      to
                                    display this dialog:




                                2   Select any required attributes from the left panel
                                    and click Add to move them to the list of currently
                                    displayed attributes on the right.
                                3   When satisfied with the list of displayed attributes,
                                    click OK.




198 Viewing data                                            Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               Alternatively:
                                     • From the Workspace Explorer, right-click on a
                                         data attribute. From the pop-up menu that
                                         opens, select Display on Map. A map window
                                         opens, displaying the appropriate data.
                                      •   You can also drag an attribute from the
                                          Workspace Explorer onto an existing map.




       VIEW DATA SYNCHRONIZED WITH THE MAP
                                  1   From the Map window toolbar, click Select .
                                  2   Click on a data point to highlight it.
                                      If you have an open Chart window displaying the
                                      same data attribute, a line is displayed on the chart
                                      to show the position of the same data point.
                                      If you have an open Message Browser window, the
                                      appropriate message containing the same data point
                                      is highlighted.

       MOVE AROUND THE MAP
                                  1   From the Map window toolbar, click Pan to
                                      change the cursor to a hand shape.
                                  2   Drag the cursor in the viewing pane to move the
                                      map around.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                             Viewing data 199
      ZOOM IN AND OUT
                              1     Right-click on the map to open a pop-up menu.
                              2     Select Zoom to display the options shown below (or
                                    use the equivalent toolbar buttons):

                           Zoom menu         Does this…
                           command
                           Previous View Returns the map to the last zoom setting.
                           View Entire       Zooms out fully.
                           Map
                           Zoom In           Zooms in by a factor of two. With the
                                             toolbar button selected, you can define a
                                             rectangular area to zoom into by dragging
                                             the mouse to create a box.
                           Zoom Out          Zooms out by a factor of two.
                           Zoom at Scale     Opens a dialog that lets you specify the
                                             width in scale units and the coordinates of
                                             the center of the zoomed window.
                           Zoom              Zooms so the selected objects just fill the
                           Selection         available map window space.
                           Go to Layer       Zooms so the selected layer just fills the
                                             available map window space.
                           Zoom1-Zoom4 Zooms using the selected zoom setting.
                                       These are the last four zoom settings that
                                       you specified for the current map window.


      SELECT MAP OBJECTS
                              1     Right-click on the map to open a pop-up menu.
                              2     Select Tool to display the options shown below (or
                                    use the equivalent toolbar buttons):

                           Tool menu         Lets you…
                           command
                           Select            Click an individual object on the map to
                                             select it.
                           Clear             De-select all currently selected objects.




200 Viewing data                                            Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               Tool menu       Lets you…
                               command
                               Select Box      Click on the map and drag out to form the
                                               opposite corner of a rectangular selection
                                               area.
                               Radius Select   Click on the map and drag out to form a
                                               circular selection area.
                               Polygon         Click several places on the map to form a
                               Select          many-sided selection area. Double-click
                                               the last corner to complete the shape.

       MEASURE DISTANCES ON THE MAP
                                  1   Right-click over the main map pane to open the
                                      pop-up menu.
                                  2   Select Tools, then Distance to alter the cursor
                                      mode.




                                  3   Click and drag from one point to another. The
                                      distance in current map units appears below the
                                      cursor:




                                  4   Cancel the measuring mode by selecting another
                                      cursor mode—for example, by clicking on Select .


Actix A Solutions User Guide                                            Viewing data 201
      ADD ANNOTATIONS TO THE MAP
                           All symbols are drawn on the ‘annotations’ layer of the
                           map.
                           Annotation Does this…
                           tool
                               Symbol      Changes the cursor to the Symbol tool. Click
                                           anywhere on the map to place a symbol.
                              Text         Changes the cursor to the Text tool. Click
                                           anywhere on the map to place a text cursor
                                           and type in an annotation.
                             Edit          Click on any annotated text on the map to be
                           Text            able to edit the text.
                              Line         Changes the cursor to the Line tool. Click
                                           and drag on the map to create a line
                                           annotation.
                              Polyline     Changes the cursor to the Polyline tool. Click
                                           on the map to create a point on the polyline.
                                           A double-click signifies the last point in the
                                           polyline.
                              Polygon      Changes the cursor to the Polygon tool. Click
                                           on the map to create a point on the polygon.
                                           A double-click signifies the last point on the
                                           polygon, which is automatically connected to
                                           the first point by a line.


      REMOVE ANNOTATIONS FROM THE MAP
                               1     From the map toolbar, click Select or another
                                     selection tool.
                               2     Click on the appropriate annotation(s).
                               3     Press the Del key.




202 Viewing data                                            Actix A Solutions User Guide
       SHOW AND HIDE MAP DATA




                                      •   Click the box to check or empty it.
                               The data series is displayed in the tree-view panel on the
                               right of the map window. If the check box beside the data
                               series name is checked, the data appears in the map
                               window. If the check box is empty, the data is not
                               displayed.

       ALTER THE MAP LEGEND RANGE
                               The data series is displayed in the tree-view (Legend) panel
                               on the right of the map window.
                                  1   Click the plus sign to expand the data series range
                                      information.




                                  2   From the left-hand Legend panel, right-click on the
                                      data series name to open a pop-up menu.
                                  3   From the menu, select Modify ranges to open the
                                      Range Modification dialog. The center panel shows
                                      the existing range legend for the currently selected
                                      series.
                                  4   Make changes to the values in the dialog as
                                      described below.

       CHANGE THE NUMBER OF RANGES IN THE LEGEND
                                  1   From the left-hand Legend panel, right-click on the
                                      data series name to open a pop-up menu.
                                  2   From the menu, select Modify ranges to open the
                                      Range Modification dialog.
                                  3   Set the Method to:
                                      Uniform if each step or range is to cover an equal
                                      range of values.


Actix A Solutions User Guide                                             Viewing data 203
                                    Equal Count if an equal number of data points is to
                                    be used for each step.
                                4   Enter the # of Ranges.
                                    This is the number of divisions in the legend.
                                5   Click Recalc.
                                    The number of ranges is now modified.

      CUSTOMIZE EACH RANGE IN THE LEGEND
                                1 From the left-hand Legend panel, right-click on the
                                  data series name to open a pop-up menu.
                                2 From the menu, select Modify ranges to open the
                                  Modify Ranges dialog.
                                3 Set the Method to Custom.
                                4 Select a range row from the list.
                                  The minimum and maximum range values appear in
                                  the boxes below the list.
                                5 Alter the Custom Ranges Minimum and
                                  Maximum values as required.
                                  You can select 'Below’ and ‘Above’ when setting
                                  the extremes of the range. For example:




204 Viewing data                                           Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                  6    Click Add, Remove or Update as required.
                                  7    Click OK to exit the dialog.

       CHANGE THE ATTRIBUTE STYLE SETTING
                                  1    From the Legend panel, right-click on the attribute
                                       name to open the pop-up menu.
                                   2 Select Style Setting, then Symbol, Size or Color.
                                       Note that the current setting has a check mark
                                       against it.
                                       The attribute’s range is now indicated through this
                                       setting.
                               Here are examples of different style settings (color is the
                               default setting):

                               Color




                               Symbol




                               Size




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                             Viewing data 205
      CHANGE THE ATTRIBUTE FONT
                                   1 From the Legend panel, right-click on the attribute
                                     name to open the pop-up menu.
                                   2 Select Attribute style to open the Font dialog.
                                   3 Change the settings as required and click OK.
                                     Which settings you change depends on which style
                                     setting you are using for this attribute.
                                     If the Style Setting is Color, you may want to
                                     change the font Size or the Symbol used.
                                     If the Style Setting is Symbol, you may want to
                                     change the font Size or Color.
                                     If the Style Setting is Size, you may want to change
                                     the Color or the Symbol used.

      COMBINE DATA ATTRIBUTES ON THE MAP
      Before combining attributes, you should already have all attributes to be combined visible
      in the Legend panel.
                                   1 Within the Legend panel, drag one attribute onto
                                       another.
                                   2 Repeat with any other attributes you want to
                                       combine.
                                       The attributes are now grouped together.

      CONTROL MAP LAYERS
                               From the Map window toolbar, click Layers            to open the
                               Layer Control dialog:




206 Viewing data                                                  Actix A Solutions User Guide
       You can also open this dialog from the pop-up menu option Map Layers.
                               Layers are shown on top of each other on the map, so a
                               higher layer may hide details on a lower layer. The central
                               pane shows all layers in the current map window, with the
                               top layer in the list being uppermost on the map.
                                 You can change the order of a particular layer by selecting
                                 it in the list and then clicking the Up and Down buttons.
       You can select more that one layer by using these familiar Windows methods:
       - hold down the Shift key and click the first and last in a consecutive series of layers, or,
       - hold down the Ctrl key and click layers as required.
                                A checkmark in each layer’s box determines:

                                     if the layer is visible

                                     if objects on it can be selected

                                     if the layer can be annotated (clearing this box ‘locks’
                                 the Annotations layer from having any further annotations
                                 added)

       ADD A MAP FILE
                                     1  From the Map window toolbar, click Layers to
                                        open the Layer Control dialog.
                                    2 Click Add to open the Open Layer dialog.
                                    3 Select or type in the name of the file.
                                        This can be a MapInfo Workspace (*.wor), Map
                                        (*.tab) or Geoset (*.gst), or a tiled raster (*.atr) file.
                                    4 Click OK to close the dialog and display the new
                                        map in the Layer Control list pane.
                                        You may need to alter the position of the new layer
                                        to aid visibility.
       Everything inside a MapInfo Workspace will be inserted below any visible data and cellref
       layers, and above any other layers.
                                    5 Select the layer.
                                    6 Click Down until the map layer is below an existing
                                        attribute and annotation layers.

       ADD A RASTER MAP FILE
                                     1    From the map pane, right-click to open the pop-up
                                          menu.
                                     2    Select New Raster to open the Raster Image
                                          Registration dialog (see page 228).



Actix A Solutions User Guide                                                      Viewing data 207
                                   3   Browse for or specify the name of the BMP Source
                                       File.
                                   4   Specify the Projection type.
                                   5   Select the Units.
                                   6   Enter the Coordinates of the four corners of the
                                       map image.
                                   7   Click OK to close the dialog and display the new
                                       map.
                                       You may now want to reposition the map layer:
                                   8   Click Layers to open the Layer Control dialog.
                                   9   Select the layer and click Down until the map layer
                                       is below the other layers, at the bottom of the list of
                                       layers.

      CONTROL ATTRIBUTE LABELS
                                   1   From the Layer Control dialog, click Labels to
                                       open the Label Properties dialog.
                                   2   Set the controls as appropriate.
                                       For details, see the Label Properties dialog (see
                                       page 226).
                                   3   Click OK to close the dialog and return to the Layer
                                       Control dialog.

      EDIT A LAYER'S DISPLAY PROPERTIES
                                   1   From the Layer Control dialog, click Display to
                                       open the Display Properties dialog.
                                   2   Set the controls as appropriate.
                                       For details, see the Display Properties dialog (see
                                       page 227).
                                   3   Click OK to close the dialog and return to the Layer
                                       Control dialog.

      OFFSET THE DATA ON THE MAP
                                   1   From the Layer Control dialog, select the
                                       appropriate attribute to offset.
                                   2   Click Offset to open the Offset dialog.
                                   3   Click Offset Tool. The Offset dialog closes and the
                                       cursor changes to a cross.
                                   4   Click on the map twice to define a vector by which
                                       to offset the data.
                                       After a brief pause, the data is redrawn in the offset
                                       position.


208 Viewing data                                                Actix A Solutions User Guide
       Alternatively, from the Offset dialog, enter the X and Y distances (in map units) by which to
       reposition the selected attribute data, and click OK. This method is useful if you want to
       reset the offset to zero (enter 0 for each offset distance), or if you select more than one
       attribute in the Layer Control dialog - each subsequent layer is automatically offset by the
       same amount.

       CHOOSE THE MAP PROJECTION
                                    1    From the map pane, right-click to open the pop-up
                                         menu.
                                    2    Select Projection to open the Choose Projection
                                         dialog:




                                    3    Select the appropriate projection and click OK to
                                         close the dialog.

       CHANGE THE MAP UNITS
                                    1    From the map pane, right-click to open the pop-up
                                         menu.
                                    2    Select Map Units, then Distance or Area, then the
                                         appropriate units.

       DISPLAY THE MAP SCALE
                                    1    From the map pane, right-click to open the pop-up
                                         menu.
                                    2    Select Show Scale.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                                    Viewing data 209
      DISPLAY THE CURSOR LATITUDE AND LONGITUDE
                                   1   From the map pane, right-click to open the pop-up
                                       menu.
                                   2   Select Show Lat/Lon.




      DISPLAY CELL SITES ON THE MAP
      You will have to start a new workspace during this procedure.
      If you have selected a cellrefs file, you should already be able to see network information
      on a map. However, you may wish to change the display configuration.
                                    1 Select Tools | Preferences to open the Preferences
                                          dialog.
                                    2 Under CellRefs, click on File Location and ensure
                                          that you have specified a cellrefs.txt file (you may
                                          have edited and saved a network information file
                                          under a different name from the Network Editor).
                                    3 After the network information is loaded, you will be
                                          prompted to restart.
                                    4 Load your data file(s) and display an attribute on a
                                          map.



210 Viewing data                                                 Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                   5   From the map window toolbar, click Cell Sites
                                       to open the Sites/Cell Properties dialog.
                                   6   Configure the settings as appropriate for the cell
                                       definition. For example GSM_Cell, Color=BCCH,
                                       Size=none.
                                   7   Click OK to accept the settings.
                                       The list of layers in the Layer Control dialog should
                                       look similar to this:




                                     Ensure that the layer has a check in the 'visible'
                                     column.
       You can use the Network Data Settings tab to display all other network information on the
       map.

       DISPLAY LINES TO CELLS
                                This setting draws a line from the selected data point to its
                                neighbor or serving cell site sectors. The example below
                                shows lines to both neighbor and serving cell site sectors:




       You must already have specified a cellrefs file (see Display cell sites on the map on page
       210).
                                  1 From the map window, click Layers to open the
                                       Layer Control dialog.
                                  2 The list of layers in the Layer Control dialog should
                                       look similar to this:




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                                 Viewing data 211
                                   3    Select the ‘Lines to neighbor cells’ layer or the
                                        ‘Lines to serving cells’ layer.
                                   4    Click Lines to open the Line layer properties
                                        dialog.




                                   5    Make the appropriate selections:
                                        Selection – Only data points chosen with the Select
                                        (see Select map objects on page 200) tools will
                                        show lines to neighbor or serving cells.
                                        All datapoints – Every data point will show a line
                                        to its neighbor or serving cells.
                                        Technology – Ensure that the technology of your
                                        network is selected.
                                        Label lines with – In some cases you may want the
                                        lines to be labeled with an attribute, but use
                                        carefully as this can increase map clutter.
                                        Color lines with – This uses the selected attribute’s
                                        colors corresponding to its data range, as shown in
                                        the Legend panel. Some useful attributes to use are:
                                        CDMA           PN_1stBestEcIo
                                        GSM            ServBCCH
                                        IS-136         FACCH_CurChannel


                                     6 Click OK to close the dialogs.
      If you cannot see any lines to cells when you select a data point, check that the ‘Lines to
      neighbor cells’ or the ‘Lines to serving cells’ layers are above any potentially obscuring
      map layers.




212 Viewing data                                                   Actix A Solutions User Guide
       PRINT A MAP

                               To print a map
                                  1 From the map windows toolbars, click Print    to
                                      open the Print Setup dialog.
                                  2 Ensure that the settings are appropriate.
                                  3 Click OK to send the map to the printer.

                               To examine the layout of the map before printing
                                  1 From the map windows toolbars, click Layout    to
                                     open the Map Layout Designer window.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                        Viewing data 213
To                                               Do this
Alter the label text                             Double-click on the label and type in the new
                                                 text, then click outside the label box.
Change the label font and size                   Click on Properties         and change the
                                                 settings.
Change the paper size, headers and               Click on Page Settings (see Page Setup dialog
footers, paper orientation and margins           on page 220) and change the settings.
Move the label, map legend or the map            Click on the object and drag it to the new
itself                                           position.
Resize the label and map legend boxes,           Click on a corner box and drag it out. The
or change the legend font size                   map legend text will resize to fit the text box.
Check the appearance of the page before          Click Print Preview         .
printing
                                      2   Configure the layout as desired.
                                      3   Click Print to open the standard Windows Print
                                          dialog.
        On the output page, cell site sectors may appear as the letter 'b'. To fix this problem, from
        the Page Setup dialog, click 'Printer', then from the next dialog click 'Properties'. In the
        Fonts section, switch the option from 'Use font substitution' to 'Always send fonts to printer'
        (or similar settings, depending on your version of Windows and your printer type).

        COPY A MAP TO THE CLIPBOARD
                                      1   From the main map window, right-click to display
                                          the pop-up menu:




                                      2   Select Copy to Clipboard.
                                      3   You can now paste the map into any other active
                                          Windows application.




214 Viewing data                                                      Actix A Solutions User Guide
       EXPORT A MAP AS A BITMAP
                                  1    From the main map window, right-click to open the
                                       pop-up menu.
                                  2    Select Export Map, then the bitmap format in
                                       which to export the map:




                                  3    From the Export Map as Image dialog, specify the
                                       File name and path and click OK.

                               See also
                               Export the legend as a bitmap (see Preferences dialog on
                               page 179)
                               Export layers as TAB files (see Export layers as TAB files
                               on page 216)

       EXPORT THE LEGEND AS A BITMAP
                                  1 From the legend pane, right-click on an object to
                                    open the pop-up menu.
                                  2 Select Export to File, then Bitmap or Windows
                                    Metafile to open the Export Legend as Image
                                    dialog.
                                  3 Enter the File name and location and click OK.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                            Viewing data 215
      EXPORT LAYERS AS TAB FILES
                                1   From the Layer Control dialog, click Export to
                                    open the Export to TAB dialog:




                                 2 Select the layer(s) to export.
                                 3 Select the Destination folder.
                                 4 Click OK.
                             The appropriate TAB, MAP, ID and DAT files are created
                             in the specified folder.

      TROUBLESHOOTING MAPS

             How do I display a map background?
                            Click Layers     to open the Layer Control dialog. Ensure
                            that the map layer’s visibility box contains a check mark:




                             If there is no map layer, Add a map file as a new layer.

             How do I display network graphics on the map?
                            Click Cell Sites . From the Network Data Settings tab,
                            select appropriate settings for cells and other network
                            objects. (You must already have specified a cellrefs file –
                            see Display cell sites on the map on page 210.)

             How do I load a bitmap into a map?
                            Click Layers     and Add the bitmap as a new layer.


216 Viewing data                                            Actix A Solutions User Guide
              How do I display cell sites on the map?
                             See Display cell sites on the map (see page 210).

              How do I display lines to cells?
                             See Display lines to cells on page 211.
                               If you still can't see lines to cells, make sure the appropriate
                               lines to cells layer is visible and above other map layers
                               that may obscure it.

              How do I display cell coverage for all cells on the map?
                             You can see clearly on the map if there are any areas
                             throughout your drive test route where the serving cell
                             hands over to an undesired sector, by enabling all of the
                             lines to cells throughout the whole of the map trace.
                                   1  Simply open the Map Layers dialog and select the
                                      layer Lines to serving cells.
                                  2 Click on the Lines button and select All datapoints
                                      along with your appropriate technology.
                                  3 Leave the Labels setting blank, but set the color to
                                      be the ServBCCH (or appropriate) value and click
                                      OK.
                                  4 Close the Layers dialog.
                                      You can see on the map which cell was serving
                                      each point along the route. The color corresponds to
                                      the measured BCCH, and with the sector coloring
                                      set to BCCH, it becomes clear which sector on the
                                      site is the server.
                               See also Display lines to cells on page 211.

              How do I display more information about my cells on the map?
                             Once your cellsite database (cellrefs file) has been imported
                             into your Actix Solution, you can display more information
                             about your cells on the map by enabling the 'lines to cells'
                             layers.
                                   1 From the Map Layers dialog, click the Lines button.
                                   2 Choose your current technology.
                                   3 You can now choose to label or color the lines with
                                     one of the suggested attributes, or by selecting the
                                     attribute picker (right-pointing arrow button),
                                     selecting Independent > Site Data Node and
                                     selecting another attribute. For example, you can
                                     display the distance or the SectorID of any cells you




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                                Viewing data 217
                                   are currently served by, have as a neighbor or are in
                                   a handoff state between.
                            See also Display lines to cells on page 211.

             How can I display the LAC distribution of my cell sites?
                            It is possible to see the LAC distribution for your network
                            by changing the coloring for each sector on the map.
                                1   When you have imported your cellsite database
                                    (cellrefs file), the default settings for the Sector
                                    layer is Beamwidth = Symbol, and BCCH = Color.
                                2   With the map open, click on the Cellsite button. It
                                    will display all column names insider your imported
                                    cell database.
                                3   Expand BCCH and set the Style to None.
                                4   Now expand LAC and set the Style to Color.
                                5   Click OK.
                                    Your sectors will now be colored according to the
                                    Location Area they are in.

             How can I view multi-layer or multi-technology cells?
                               1 For the upper layer, set a false, narrower beamwidth
                                    value so that the sectors do not obscure sectors on
                                    the lower layer.
                               2 Set the cell size to be determined by another cellrefs
                                    field, for example EIRP.
                               3 Ensure that the upper layer follows the lower layer
                                    in the cellrefs file.




             How can I view sector azimuths?
                                    • Set very narrow beamwidth values (5 degrees or
                                       less) to see lines in the direction of sector
                                       azimuths.




218 Viewing data                                            Actix A Solutions User Guide
              How can I correct the displayed lines to cells?
                             In the map, there are often multiple data points at the same
                             pixel location. Sometimes this is because the latitude and
                             longitude values are identical. Sometimes it is because the
                             difference in latitude and longitude is so small that the
                             points are in the same screen pixel. In both these cases,
                             only the first data point corresponding to each pixel is
                             displayed, with subsequent data points being ignored.
                               This has some impact on data synchronization. As you
                               select different rows in the table, multiple rows may
                               synchronize to the same point in the map. On the other
                               hand, if you select that point on the map, the table always
                               synchronizes to the first associated row.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                              Viewing data 219
                             Since lines to cells are based on the bin corresponding to
                             the drawn point rather than the original bin, you will find
                             that the lines displayed are sensitive to the zoom level and
                             the attributes being displayed. This has some potentially
                             confusing symptoms. Open two maps at different zoom
                             levels. Then select a point in one map, causing the other
                             map to synchronize. You may find that lines to cells are
                             different. This is because the lines are based at different
                             bins, although they are at the same pixel. To ensure
                             matching lines to cells, zoom in and use location binning so
                             that there is never more than one bin per pixel.

      MAP DIALOG REFERENCE

             Page Setup dialog
                            This dialog opens when you click Page Settings from the
                            Map Layout Designer window:




220 Viewing data                                            Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               Headers and Footers
                               Provides a space for you to type header text that will appear
                               at the top of the page, or footer text that will appear at the
                               bottom of the page.
                               To print specific information as part of the header or footer,
                               include the following characters as part of the text.

                               Type      To print this
                               this
                               &w        Window title
                               &u        Page address (URL)
                               &d        Date in short format (as specified by Regional
                                         Settings in Control Panel)
                               &D        Date in long format (as specified by Regional
                                         Settings in Control Panel)
                               &t        Time in the format specified by Regional
                                         Settings in Control Panel
                               &T        Time in 24-hour format
                               &p        Current page number
                               &P        Total number of pages
                               &&        A single ampersand (&)
                               &b        The text immediately following these characters
                                         as centered
                               &b&b      The text after the first ‘&b’ as centered, the text
                                         after the second ‘&b’ as right-justified




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                              Viewing data 221
             Print Setup dialog
                             This dialog opens when you click Print from a map
                             window:




                           Options opens the Print Map dialog.




222 Viewing data                                          Actix A Solutions User Guide
              Print Map dialog
                             This dialog opens when you click Options from the Print
                             Setup dialog:




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                         Viewing data 223
             Properties dialog
                             This dialog opens when you click Properties from the Map
                             Layout Designer window:




224 Viewing data                                         Actix A Solutions User Guide
Actix A Solutions User Guide   Viewing data 225
             Label Properties dialog
                            This dialog opens when you click Labels from the Layer
                            Control dialog:




                          To use           Do this
                          Data Field       Select the data field to be displayed as the
                                           label.
                          Formatted        Set the formatted field to use as the label
                          Field            displayed, depending on the layer selected
                                           in the Layer Control dialog.
                          Show             Check the box to show labels on the map
                                           (which are otherwise hidden).
                          Allow            Check the box to allow labels to overlap.
                          overlapped
                          text
                          Hide adjacent    Uncheck the box to allow the same text to
                          duplicate text   appear for adjacent data points.
                          Display          Check the box to display labels only within
                          within range     the maximum and minimum zoom levels.
                                           A zoom level is the width of the map area
                                           displayed, in the current map units.
                          Min Zoom         Set the lowest zoom level at which labels
                                           will be displayed.


226 Viewing data                                           Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               To use            Do this
                               Max Zoom          Set the highest zoom level at which labels
                                                 will be displayed.
                               Max # of          Set the maximum number of labels that can
                               labels            be shown on the map.
                               Label Style       Set the font style for the label.
                               Position          Select the position of the label relative to
                                                 the data point.
                               Label X/Y         Set the offset of the label in the X or Y
                               offset (points)   direction. The offset is measured in points
                                                 (as used for fonts).
                               Label Style       Defines the appearance of the label.

              Display Properties dialog
                             This dialog opens when you click Display from the Layer
                             Control dialog:




                               This dialog controls the display of layers.

                               To use            Do this
                               Override          Check the box to override the default map
                               Style             style with the settings accessed through
                                                 Layer Style.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                                 Viewing data 227
                          To use          Do this
                          Layer Style     Set the style for the selected layer. The
                                          controls in this dialog will depend on the
                                          type of layer selected in the Layer Control
                                          dialog.
                          Display         Check the box to display layers only within
                          within range    the maximum and minimum zoom levels.
                                          A zoom level is the width of the map area
                                          displayed, in the current map units.
                          Min Zoom        Set the lowest zoom level at which layers
                                          will be displayed.
                          Max Zoom        Set the highest zoom level at which layers
                                          will be displayed.

             Raster Image Registration dialog
                           This dialog opens when you select the New Raster option
                           from the map window's right-click popup menu:




                          To use          Do this
                          BMP Source      Type in or Browse for the name and
                          File            location of the *.bmp file to use as the map
                                          image.
                          Coordinates     Each coordinate defines the position of one
                                          corner of the map image. Make sure these
                                          coordinates are sensible, given the
                                          Projection type and the Units selected.
                          Units           Click to select from a drop down list of unit
                                          types appropriate to the selected Projection
                                          type.




228 Viewing data                                         Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               To use           Do this
                               Projection       Click to select from a drop-down list of
                                                projection types. These define how to
                                                convert global positional data to a flat
                                                ‘projection’ of that position.

       MAP TOOLBAR REFERENCE

                               This control     Does this
                                Select          Lets you select individual data points on
                                                the map. You can also hold down the Ctrl
                                                key to select more than one data point, or
                                                use the Area Select (see Area Select toolbar
                                                reference on page 230) tools.
                                  Zoom In       Zooms in by a factor of two.
                                  Zoom Out      Zooms out by a factor of two.
                                  Pan           Changes the cursor to the Pan tool, which
                                                lets you drag the map as required.
                                  Layers        Opens the Layer Control dialog.
                                  Legend        Toggles the Legend panel on or off.
                                  Area          Toggles the Area Select (see Area Select
                               Select           toolbar reference on page 230) toolbar on
                                                or off.
                                                Toggles the Annotations (see Annotations
                               Annotations      toolbar reference on page 230) toolbar on
                                                or off.
                                  Layout        Opens the Map Layout Designer window
                                                for configuring the printed output.
                                  Print         Sends the current map to the printer.
                                   Cell Sites   Opens the Sites/Cell Properties dialog.
                                  Edit          Opens the Edit Series dialog, so you can
                               Series           easily add or remove data series to the map
                                                display.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                              Viewing data 229
             Annotations toolbar reference

                            This control     Does this
                              Symbol         Changes the cursor to the Symbol tool.
                                             Click anywhere on the map to place a
                                             symbol.
                               Text          Changes the cursor to the Text tool. Click
                                             anywhere on the map to place a text cursor
                                             and type in an annotation.
                               Edit Text     Click on any annotated text on the map to
                                             be able to edit the text.
                              Line           Changes the cursor to the Line tool. Click
                                             and drag on the map to create a line
                                             annotation.
                               Polyline      Changes the cursor to the Polyline tool.
                                             Click on the map to create a point on the
                                             polyline. A double-click signifies the last
                                             point in the polyline.
                               Polygon       Changes the cursor to the Polygon tool.
                                             Click on the map to create a point on the
                                             polygon. A double-click signifies the last
                                             point on the polygon, which is
                                             automatically connected to the first point
                                             by a line.
                               Clear         Wipes the annotation layer clear of all
                                             annotations.


             Area Select toolbar reference

                            This control Does this
                              Select Box Changes the cursor to the Select Box tool.
                                         Drag the cursor to create a rectangular
                                         selection area, with one corner defined by
                                         the start of the drag, and the opposite
                                         corner defined by the end of the drag. All
                                         points inside the area are selected.
                               Radius        Changes the cursor to the Radius Select
                            Select           tool. Drag the cursor to create a circular
                                             selection area, centered at the start of the
                                             drag and with a radius defined by the
                                             distance of the cursor from the start of the
                                             drag. All points inside the area are selected.


230 Viewing data                                             Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               This control     Does this
                                  Polygon       Changes the cursor to the Polygon Select
                               Select           tool. Each click draws a new line segment
                                                of the selection area. A double click near
                                                an existing line segment closes the
                                                selection area. All points inside the area are
                                                selected.

              Map Layout Designer toolbar reference

                               This control     Does this
                                 Print          Opens the Print Setup dialog.
                                  Print         Opens the Print Preview window.
                               Preview
                                 Page           Opens the Page Setup dialog (see page
                               Settings         220).
                                   Zoom         Changes the current zoom setting for the
                                                map layout.
                                  Properties    Opens the Properties dialog (see page 224).
                                 Undo           Cancels the effect of the last action.
                                 Redo           Repeats the effect of a previously undone
                                                action.


SiteData Viewer
                               The SiteData Viewer lets you view information on a
                               site/cell selected from the Map.
                               To activate the SiteData Viewer, from the View menu,
                               select SiteData Viewer. Initially, a blank grid appears, but
                               once you select a cell on the map, the grid is populated with
                               information about the selected cell.
                               When the cell layer is the uppermost layer in the map,
                               clicking on any of the cells will display the details of the
                               cell, its parent and its siblings in the SiteData Viewer.
                               The following screen shot demonstrates the act of clicking
                               on a cell and having the SiteData Viewer show details of
                               the selected cell.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                               Viewing data 231
                   The SiteData Viewer displays all information from the
                   cellrefs file for the selected cell/site, including data on any
                   additional user-defined columns.




232 Viewing data                                    Actix A Solutions User Guide
       FILTERING DATA
                               If you right-click anywhere in the SiteData Viewer
                               window, a pop up menu appears. Select the Information
                               Filter menu item to open this dialog box:




                               From this dialog you can select which data items can be
                               viewed.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                            Viewing data 233
Tables
      ABOUT TABLES
                             Tables provide a quick and simple view of numeric data for
                             a selected attribute.




                             If you want to manipulate, chart or print out the data, use
                             the Workbook feature instead.

      DISPLAY DATA ATTRIBUTES IN A TABLE
                                     •     From the Workspace Explorer, right-click on a
                                           data attribute and select Display on Table.
                                     A table opens, displaying the appropriate data.

      VIEW SERIES DATA IN A TABLE
                             The bottom of the Table window shows several tabs. Check
                             that the Series tab is selected. This provides a quick view of
                             the series data for the selected attribute.




234 Viewing data                                              Actix A Solutions User Guide
       VIEW HISTOGRAM DATA IN A TABLE
                               The bottom of the Table window shows several tabs. Check
                               that the Histogram tab is selected. This provides a quick
                               view of the histogram data for the selected attribute.




       VIEW STATISTICS DATA IN A TABLE
                               The bottom of the Table window shows several tabs. Check
                               that the Statistics tab is selected. This provides a quick
                               view of the statistics for the selected attribute’s data.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                           Viewing data 235
Message Browser
      ABOUT THE MESSAGE BROWSER
                           The Message Browser displays the Layer 3 and Abis
                           messaging in a log file:




      DISPLAY DATA IN THE MESSAGE BROWSER
                               1   From the Workspace Explorer window, right-click
                                   on the stream name (one level below the logfile) to
                                   display the pop-up menu.




                               2   Select Display Message Browser to open the
                                   Message Browser window.




236 Viewing data                                          Actix A Solutions User Guide
       SYNCHRONIZE WITH THE WORKSPACE
                               You can independently synchronize the Event and Message
                               panels to the workspace, so that the same data is
                               highlighted in any open data window.

                               To synchronize the Event panel to the workspace
                                     • From the Message Browser toolbar, click Sync
                                        Events.
                                        The button should now appear like this:

                                     If you now select an event, map or chart point, the
                                     related data is highlighted in each open data
                                     window.

                               To synchronize the Message panel to the workspace
                                     • From the Message Browser toolbar, click Sync
                                        Msgs.
                                        The button should now appear like this:

                                     If you now select a message, map or chart point, the
                                     related data is highlighted in each open data
                                     window.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                            Viewing data 237
      FIND TEXT IN THE MESSAGE BROWSER
                                 1   From the Message Browser toolbar, type in the text
                                     you want to find in the log file, or select from the
                                     drop-down list of previous text searches.

                                 2   Click Find Next .
                                     The Messages panel moves to the next message
                                     down in the log file that contains the search text.
                                     •   To cancel a text search, click Stop Find    .
                                     To search from the current position in the log file
                                     back towards the start of the file, click Find Prev
                                       .

      SET AND REMOVE BOOKMARKS
                                 3   From the Message panel of the Message Browser,
                                     click on the message you want to bookmark.
                                     The message now appears highlighted with a red
                                     marker:




                                 4   Click Toggle .
                                     The message marker now changes color to indicate
                                     that the message has been bookmarked:



      Repeat these steps on a bookmarked message to remove the bookmark.
      You can also use Ctrl+F2 to toggle a bookmark on and off.

      MOVE BETWEEN BOOKMARKS

                             To move to the next bookmark
                                   • From the Message Browser toolbar, click Next
                                         .
                                     In the Message panel, the position changes to that of
                                     the next bookmarked message in the log file.


      You can also use F2 to move to the next bookmark.




238 Viewing data                                              Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               To move to the previous bookmark
                                     • From the Message Browser toolbar, click
                                        Previous .
                                      In the Message panel, the position changes to that of
                                      the next bookmarked message in the log file.


       You can also use Shift+F2 to move to the previous bookmark.

       REMOVE ALL BOOKMARKS
                                      •   From the Message Browser toolbar, click Clear
                                            .
                                      All bookmarks in the log file are now removed.
       You can also use Ctrl+Shift+F2 to move to the next bookmark.

              Filter messages in the Message Browser
                                 1 From the Message Browser toolbar, click
                                     Properties .
                                     The Properties dialog opens.
                                  2   If it is not already selected, click on the Message
                                      Filtering tab:




                                      The tab shows a selection box for each type of
                                      message used in the log file. By default, these are
                                      all checked and so are displayed in the Message
                                      panel.


Actix A Solutions User Guide                                              Viewing data 239
                               3   To stop a specific message type from being shown
                                   in the Message panel, click to clear the related box.


                                   To show a previously hidden message type, click to
                                   put a check mark in the related box.


                               4   Click OK to accept the settings.

      FORMAT MESSAGES IN THE MESSAGE BROWSER
                               1   From the Message Browser toolbar, click
                                   Properties .
                                   The Properties dialog opens.
                               2   If it is not already selected, click on the Message
                                   Format tab:




                                   The Message Format tab displays controls
                                   appropriate to the log file type.
                               3   Set the controls as required.
                               4   Click OK to accept the settings.

             Export messages to the clipboard
                              1 From the Message panel of the Message Browser,
                                  select the appropriate message.
                                  • To select a sequence of messages, click on the
                                       first message, scroll down and click on the last
                                       message in the selection while holding down the
                                       Shift key.




240 Viewing data                                            Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                        •   To select more than one message, hold down the
                                            Ctrl key and click on individual messages.
                                   2    Right-click on the selection to display a pop-up
                                        menu.
                                   3    Select Copy.
                                        The message is now in the Windows Clipboard and
                                        can be copied into any Windows application.

       MESSAGE BROWSER TOOLBAR REFERENCE

                               This control        Does this…
                                                   Highlights the related data in each open
                                 Sync Events       data window, if you select an event,
                                                   map or chart point.
                                                   Highlights the related data in each open
                                 Sync Msgs         data window, if you select a message,
                                                   map or chart point.
                                                   Searches the log file for matches to the
                                                   text in this box. You can type in the
                                                   text, or select from the drop-down list
                                                   of previous text searches.
                                                   Finds the next matching text string in
                                 Find Next         the message information (searching
                                                   towards the end of the logfile).
                                                   Finds the previous matching text string
                                                   in the message information (searching
                                 Find Prev
                                                   back towards the beginning of the
                                                   logfile).
                                 Stop Find         Halts the text search process.
                                                   Opens the Message Browser Properties
                                 Properties
                                                   dialog.
                                 Toggle            Toggles bookmarks on and off.
                                                   Moves to the position of the next
                                 Next
                                                   bookmark in the logfile.
                                                   Moves to the position of the previous
                                 Prev
                                                   bookmark in the logfile.
                                 Clear             Clears all bookmarks in the logfile.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                              Viewing data 241
Protocol Stack Browser
      USING THE PROTOCOL STACK BROWSER
                            The Protocol Stack Browser allows you to examine
                            messaging by protocol.
      From the Tools menu, select Preferences and ensure that, under PCM Link, Load Mode
      is set to 'Full'.
                                 1 From the View menu, select Protocol Stack and
                                     then select the appropriate message type.
                                 2 Alternatively, from the Workspace Explorer, right-
                                     click on the stream name and select Display
                                     Protocol Stack Browser.




                                    The Protocol Stack Browser window opens:




242 Viewing data                                            Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               The stream selector at the top of the window allows you to
                               switch between different loaded streams.
                               The upper panel shows a formatted breakdown of every
                               message, while the bottom panel shows the full decode for
                               the currently selected message.
                               You can also use the Sync Msgs button to synchronize the
                               display with chart windows and with the Message Browser
                               window to provide a better understanding of the data.
                               If you do not intend to continue using the Protocol Stack
                               Browser, then from the Tools menu, select Preferences,
                               and ensure that under PCM Link, Load Mode is set to
                               'Minimal'.

        SEARCHING IN THE PROTOCOL STACK BROWSER
                               The Protocol Stack Browser includes a text search feature
                               that locates messages containing the text string you type in.
                               Click Find Next to find the next message down in the file
                               from your current location, and Find Prev to go back up
                               the file to find the previous matching message.




                               The search facility lets you use wildcard characters,
                               character lists, or character ranges, in any combination, to
                               match strings:
Characters Matches in string
in pattern
?             Any single character.
*             Zero or more characters.
#             Any single digit (0–9).
[charlist]    Any single character in charlist.
              A group of one or more characters (charlist) enclosed in brackets ([ ]) can
              be used to match any single character in string and can include almost any
              character code, including digits.
              Note To match the special characters left bracket ([), question mark (?),
              number sign (#), and asterisk (*), enclose them in brackets. The right
              bracket (]) cannot be used within a group to match itself, but it can be used
              outside a group as an individual character.
              By using a hyphen (–) to separate the upper and lower bounds of the range,
              charlist can specify a range of characters. For example, [A-Z] results in a
              match if the corresponding character position in string contains any


Actix A Solutions User Guide                                              Viewing data 243
              uppercase letters in the range A–Z. Multiple ranges are included within the
              brackets without delimiters.
              A hyphen (–) can appear either at the beginning (after an exclamation point
              if one is used) or at the end of charlist to match itself. In any other location,
              the hyphen is used to identify a range of characters.
              When a range of characters is specified, they must appear in ascending sort
              order (from lowest to highest). For example, [A-Z] is a valid pattern, but
              [Z-A] is not.
              The character sequence [] is considered a zero-length string ("").
[!charlist]   Any single character not in charlist.
              An exclamation point (!) at the beginning of charlist means that a match is
              made if any character except the characters in charlist is found in string.
              When used outside brackets, the exclamation point matches itself.
              In some languages, there are special characters in the alphabet that
              represent two separate characters. For example, several languages use the
              character "æ" to represent the characters "a" and "e" when they appear
              together. The search feature recognizes that the single special character and
              the two individual characters are equivalent.
              When a language that uses a special character is specified in the system
              locale settings, an occurrence of the single special character in either
              pattern or string matches the equivalent 2-character sequence in the other
              string. Similarly, a single special character in a pattern enclosed in brackets
              (by itself, in a list, or in a range) matches the equivalent 2-character
              sequence in string.




244 Viewing data                                                Actix A Solutions User Guide
Statistics Explorer
       ABOUT THE STATISTICS EXPLORER
                               The Statistics Explorer is a powerful data-manipulation tool
                               that lets you rapidly pinpoint problems by displaying
                               statistical data by network element. The Statistics
                               Explorer’s configurable display enables multiple drill-down
                               approaches to the problem.




                               The Group Box allows you to rearrange the organization of
                               the data. For example, here are two different configurations
                               of the same data:
                               Configuration A




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                             Viewing data 245
                            Configuration B




                            You can combine this summary data with other data held as
                            a Network Image to build up a picture over a series of drive
                            tests.

      OPEN THE STATISTICS EXPLORER
                                     •   From the View menu, select Statistics Explorer
                                         to open an empty Explorer window.




                                     Alternatively, from the Workspace Explorer, right-
                                     click on a Crosstab or Event query.




246 Viewing data                                            Actix A Solutions User Guide
       CHECK FOR EXISTING QUERIES
                               The Statistics Explorer allows you to manipulate the data
                               resulting from a Crosstab query or an Event query. So, you
                               must already have a query (analysis) to work with before
                               you can use the Statistics Explorer.
                               All existing Crosstab and Event queries are shown in the
                               Queries pane:




       MANIPULATE DATA IN THE STATISTICS EXPLORER

                               To…              Do this…
                               Select a query   Click on a query in the Queries pane. The Statistics
                                                Explorer now displays data related to the selected
                                                query.
                               Swap data        From the Group Box pane, drag a data box around to
                               order            create a new data configuration:




                               Sort by          Click on the column heading to sort the data by the
                               column           column, highest appearing at the top. Click again to
                                                reverse the order.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                             Viewing data 247
      FILTER THE WORKSPACE DATA
                               Once you have arranged the data to identify a problem area,
                               select one or more rows and click Filter .
                               This creates a filter based on the row(s) currently selected
                               in Statistics Explorer, which is applied to the Workspace
                               Explorer and all data windows (Maps, Tables, Charts and
                               so on).
      You can select a sequence of rows by clicking the first row, then holding down the Shift
      key and clicking on the last row. To select multiple non-sequential rows, hold down the Ctrl
      key and click once on each appropriate row.


      GENERATE A SUBSTREAM
                               Once you have arranged the data to identify a problem area,
                               select one or more rows and click Analyze .
                               This generates a new data stream that appears in the
                               Workspace Explorer. You can select this stream and view it
                               and any attributes contained within it in maps, charts and
                               the Message Browser. As this stream contains a subset of
                               data in the original stream, this is called a substream.
      You can select a sequence of rows by clicking the first row, then holding down the Shift
      key and clicking on the last row. To select multiple non-sequential rows, hold down the Ctrl
      key and click once on each appropriate row.

      STATISTICS EXPLORER TOOLBAR REFERENCE

                              This           Does this…
                              control
                              Queries        Displays the Queries pane on the left of the
                                             Statistics Explorer.




                              Group Box      Displays the Group Box:




248 Viewing data                                                  Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               This           Does this…
                               control
                               Filter         Filters the Workspace based on the row selected
                                              in the Statistics Explorer.
                               Analyze        Generates an analysis attribute in the Workspace
                                              Explorer that you can view using maps, charts
                                              and the Message Browser.
                               Help           Displays the Statistics Explorer help.
                               DataSource Selects the data source to be explored.
                               Find Next      Searches through and highlights data that
                                              matching the string entered in the box.




StateForms
       USE STATEFORMS
                               While examining data on a map, you can also view data
                               attributes for the same data point by using a StateForm.
                                   1     From the View menu, select Forms and then the
                                         technology followed by the appropriate form:




                                         Alternatively, from the Tools menu, select Display
                                         StateForms.
                                   2     In the map window, click Select and select a data
                                         point.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                               Viewing data 249
                                      The StateForms window now displays a variety of
                                      attributes based on the data point you selected. The
                                      default GSM form looks similar to this:




                                      Advanced users can use the Design Mode of this
                                      feature to create new forms for other technologies.
      If you have more than one stream that you want to view using the StateForm, right-click on
      the StateForm window and select Stream Selector. This displays a drop-down menu at the
      top of the window from which you can select another data stream.




250 Viewing data                                                 Actix A Solutions User Guide
CDMA StateTip
       ABOUT CDMA STATETIP
                               CDMA StateTip provides you with a synchronized view on
                               CDMA measured data, integrating Handset and PN
                               Scanner data into a single view.
                               Once you have displayed data on a map, and selected
                               appropriate handset and scanner data sources for the
                               StateTip, you can use the Select tool to click on a data point
                               on the map—related information is displayed within the
                               StateTip window. Various observations about the data will
                               also be displayed if the data meet particular criteria.
                               In the example shown here, the location of the selected data
                               point is showing signs of pilot pollution.




                               Displaying event data on the map is a particularly useful
                               way of finding interesting locations to examine with
                               CDMA StateTip. CDMA StateTip can be used to:

                               Display CDMA Handset data
                                      • Pilot sets information (Active, Neighbor and
                                        Remaining) Ec/Io for each PN


Actix A Solutions User Guide                                              Viewing data 251
                                   •   Frame Error Rate
                                   •   Mobile Transmit Power
                                   •   Mobile Receive Power
                                   •   Carrier phone is on
                                   •   Too Many Neighbors warning
                                   •   Weak Server warning

                            Display CDMA PN Scanner data
                                   • PNs of pilots with the N largest Ec/Io values in
                                     a bin
                                   •   Ec/Io of PNs
                                   •   Delay of First Multipath
                                   •   Delay Spread
                                   •   Carrier that the scanner is currently measuring

                            Identify common RF problems automatically
                                   • Dropped Calls
                                   •   Failed Initiations
                                   •   Pilot Pollution
                                   •   Poor Pilot Coverage
                                   •   Neighbor List Omissions (including the omitted
                                       pilot)
                                   •   Remaining PNs – a list of all PNs seen by the
                                       scanner which are not in the phone’s active,
                                       candidate or neighbor set

      START CDMA STATETIP
                                   •   From the Tools menu, select CDMA StateTip.
                                   When you first start StateTip, no data streams have
                                   been selected for the handset source or the scanner
                                   source.

      CHANGE THE VIEW
                            You can change the way PN Scanner data and handset data
                            is displayed by selecting another template.




252 Viewing data                                             Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               To change to another template
                                  1 From the top of the StateTip dialog, click Select
                                     Another View to display a menu.
                                  2 Click on one of these views:
                                     TOP N Pilots View - Provides a summary of the
                                     sectors that were measured from best to worst
                                      Pilot Sets View - Sorts the results of measurements
                                      into the appropriate Pilot set
                                      TOP N Pilots Chart - Provides a chart for graphical
                                      analysis of pilot data

       CHANGE THE HANDSET SOURCE
                               You can change the source that is used to get handset
                               measurements. This is useful when multiple handsets are
                               available (during tests of multiple frequencies, and so on).

                              To change the handset source
                                   1 From the top of the StateTip dialog, click Select
                                      Handset Device to display a list of available data
                                      streams.
       You can get a more detailed description of a stream by holding the cursor over it.
                                   2 Click on a data stream to act as the handset source.

       CHANGE THE SCANNER SOURCE
                               You can change the source that is used to get scanner
                               measurements. This is useful when multiple scanners are
                               available (during tests of multiple frequencies, etc.).

                              To change the scanner source
                                   1 From the top of the StateTip dialog, click Select
                                      Scanner Device to display a list of available data
                                      streams.
       You can get a more detailed description of a stream by holding the cursor over it.
                                   2 Click on a data stream to act as the scanner source.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                              Viewing data 253
CDMA Toolkit
      ABOUT CDMA TOOLKIT
                           CDMA Toolkit is a taskbar that provides a series of
                           analyses based on best-practice network optimization
                           techniques. Each solution uses PN scanner data to optimize
                           your network settings, and can be configured to meet the
                           needs of your network and your organization.

                           Click here…             About the analysis set…
                                                   This set uses delay information to
                                                   suggest the active and neighbor
                                                   set search window sizes. An audit
                                                   report shows how the suggestions
                                                   differ from the current
                                                   configuration.

                                                   This set uses Ec/Io information to
                                                   generate neighbor lists for
                                                   multiple sectors. This can save
                                                   significant optimization time as
                                                   you add new sites, and as the
                                                   propagation environment changes
                                                   due to increased traffic. An audit
                                                   report is also provided.

                                                   This set generates statistics from
                                                   Ec/Io information that indicate the
                                                   sectors causing and receiving
                                                   interference, or that have coverage
                                                   problems. This solution helps to
                                                   determine optimal EIRP or
                                                   forward path attenuation settings,
                                                   so you can minimize pollution and
                                                   coverage problems. It can also
                                                   provide insights into the effects of
                                                   modifications, without having to
                                                   affect your working network.

                                                   This set assists you in engineering
                                                   your network's growth.




254 Viewing data                                         Actix A Solutions User Guide
       OPTIMIZE SEARCH WINDOWS
                               From the CDMA Toolkit task bar, click on this heading:


                               You can now select one of these reports:
                                         Summary Report
                                         Audit Report
                                         Details Report

                               When you click on the icon for a report, the Configure
                               Settings dialog opens on the Data tab to display all
                               available data streams. Select a data stream appropriate to
                               the report type and click OK to view the report.

              About Optimize Search Windows Analysis

                               About the Optimize Search Window analysis
                               You can minimize the number of incidents of dropped
                               calls, failed initiations, and poor voice quality by setting the
                               search windows to their optimal size. The search window
                               analysis shows the minimum SRCH_WIN_A (active set
                               search window size) and SRCH_WIN_N (neighbor set
                               search window size) required by each sector, based on pilot
                               delay data collected in PN Scanner drive-test logfiles.
                               Many of the individual steps performed by the Search
                               Window Analysis can be performed manually. However,
                               when analyzing data for multiple sectors for comprehensive
                               drive tests, the Search Window Analysis can perform the
                               analysis hundreds of times faster, making tasks that were
                               previously very difficult to perform manually, fast and
                               easy.
                               It is important to note that the results of this analysis are
                               only as good as the input data. To achieve an accurate
                               picture of delays for a given sector from a drive-test log
                               file, the drive test should thoroughly overlap the coverage
                               area of the sector.
                               Search Window Analysis is capable of analyzing data
                               collected over several weeks or longer. Simply select
                               multiple streams in the device selection pop-up screen.
                               In many cases, search window sizes are initially set using
                               default values. As a result, the actual search window sizes
                               may significantly exceed the minimum required levels. The
                               downside of having larger than required search windows is


Actix A Solutions User Guide                                               Viewing data 255
                          that the searcher finger in the mobile unit scans through the
                          active, candidate, and neighbor sets slower as the size of
                          the search window is increased.
                          The searcher finger is responsible for measuring Ec/Io,
                          which is then reported to the base station for use in
                          determining which PNs the mobile will demodulate. The
                          faster the search window can search through the pilot sets,
                          the faster it will be able to measure and report changes in
                          pilot Ec/Io levels, which can then be used by the base
                          station to appropriately add and drop pilots from the
                          various sets. In environments with rapidly rising pilot
                          signals, if the mobile does not measure and add a pilot to
                          the active set before it becomes too powerful, the call can
                          drop. The faster the searcher finger scans, the better the
                          chance that this type of problem can be avoided.
                          Conversely, search window sizes may be set too small. In
                          this case, pilots may not be ‘seen’ by the mobile because
                          the search window is too small. When a pilot that cannot be
                          demodulated by the mobile becomes strong, it can cause
                          voice quality to degrade and the call to drop. Therefore, it
                          is important to ensure the search window sizes are not too
                          small.

             How the Search Window Analysis works
                           The Search Window Analysis performs the following steps
                           for each measurement bin along the drive test:
                                 •   The analysis calculates the Ec/Io from all
                                     sectors serving that bin. If the sector’s Ec/Io is
                                     above a user-defined threshold, the sector is
                                     considered for further analysis.
                                 •   The maximum multipath Delay Spread of the
                                     remaining serving sectors is calculated (see
                                     Figure 1). This value is multiplied by 2 to allow
                                     for the double-sided nature of the search
                                     window, and is then assigned to ALL remaining
                                     serving sectors for use in determining the
                                     optimal Active Set Search Window Size.
                                 •   The minimum Delay to First Multipath is
                                     calculated for all remaining serving sectors (see
                                     Figure 1). The maximum of the sums of the
                                     Delay to First Multipath and Delay Spread is
                                     calculated for all thresholded serving sectors.
                                     Lastly, the minimum Delay to First Multipath is
                                     subtracted from the Maximum of the sums of


256 Viewing data                                          Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                          the Delay to First Multipath and Delay Spread.
                                          This number is multiplied by 2 to allow for the
                                          fact that the search window is double-sided as
                                          follows:
                                      2*Max{(Delay to First Multipath+Delay Spread)
                                      for all PNs}-Min{Delay to First Multipath for all }
                                      Essentially, this calculation simulates the mobile
                                      deriving its timing reference from the earliest
                                      arriving multipath and determines the maximum
                                      Neighbor Set search window size required by the
                                      pilots measured in the bin. This value is stored for
                                      all thresholded pilots serving the bin.
                               After all bins have been analyzed, the delay measurements
                               are aggregated by sector. For each sector, the recommended
                               minimum search-window sizes are determined by
                               calculating the maximum of the delays measured in step 2
                               and 3.

                               Network element data requirements
                               You must have a cellrefs data file configured with cell site
                               information for this analysis to work properly.
                               In order to audit measured data versus actual settings,
                               actual search window settings must be entered into the
                               cellrefs data file. A sample .ini file has been provided
                               which contains the SRCH_WIN_A an SRCH_WIN_N
                               fields. To make use of actual search window settings, first
                               add SRCH_WIN_A and SRCH_WIN_N to your cellrefs
                               .ini file per the sample. The addition of the actual data to
                               your cellrefs file can be completed through a number of
                               methods. A spreadsheet tool such as Microsoft Excel can
                               be used to manually populate the SRCH_WIN_A and
                               SRCH_WIN_N columns. The Network Element Editor
                               allows you to manually update individual fields of a cell. If
                               your organization has an automated cellrefs file generator,
                               it can be enhanced to add SRCH_WIN_A and
                               SRCH_WIN_N values.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                              Viewing data 257
                   Configure Settings (Search Windows)




      OPTIMIZE NEIGHBOR LISTS
                              From the CDMA Toolkit task bar, click on this heading:


                              You can now select from these reports:
                                        Summary Report
                                        Audit Report
                                        Details Report
                              When you click on the icon for a report, the Configure
                              Settings dialog opens on the Data tab to display all
                              available data streams. Select a data stream appropriate to
                              the report type and click OK to view the report.

             About Optimize Neighbor Lists Analysis
                           Neighbor List analyses lets you quickly and easily generate
                           Neighbor Lists for multiple sectors using measured Ec/Io
                           data from PN Scanner drive test files. Neighbor List
                           analysis can compare measurement results with actual
                           Neighbor Lists and recommend optimal modifications to
                           neighbor lists. As new sites are added to mature systems, or
                           as the propagation environment changes due to increased
                           traffic loading, the Neighbor List Analysis can save
                           significant time in the generation of new optimal Neighbor
                           Lists.


258 Viewing data                                              Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               Why use Neighbor List analysis?
                               Over time, as new sites are added to a network and as
                               loading levels in the network grow, neighbor lists for
                               existing and new cell sites may require modification to
                               reflect accurately the RF environment. If the neighbor list
                               for a given sector fails to include another sector with a
                               strong Ec/Io, the mobile might not be able to demodulate
                               the omitted sector. This inability to demodulate a strong
                               server can result in high levels of interference, which are
                               likely to lead to dropped calls and poor voice quality.
                               Neighbor lists that include too many unnecessary pilots
                               may also cause problems. The downside of including
                               unnecessary pilots is that the searcher finger of the mobile
                               is forced to scan through these pilots, which reduces the
                               ability of the searcher finger to measure pilots that will be
                               used in handoff.
                               The Neighbor List analysis lets you generate prioritized
                               neighbor lists quickly for multiple cell sites, using
                               measured Ec/Io data from PN Scanner drive test files. The
                               analysis ensures that all pilots of appropriate strength will
                               be included, and that the neighbor list will be limited to
                               those pilots likely to engage in handoff.
                               Because the Neighbor List analysis can compare measured
                               neighbor lists with actual neighbor lists, it can provide
                               recommendations for adding and deleting pilots from
                               neighbor lists. As new sites are added to mature systems,
                               the Neighbor List Analysis lets you quickly recalculate new
                               neighbor lists for all affected sectors.

                               How does it work?
                               The Neighbor List analysis performs the following steps for
                               each measurement bin along the drive test route:
                                      •   The analysis calculates the Ec/Io from all
                                          sectors serving that bin. If the sector’s Ec/Io is
                                          above a user-defined threshold, the sector is
                                          considered as a potential neighbor.
                                      •   A matrix with rows and columns consisting of
                                          all sites is used to record each time a given site
                                          is seen as the neighbor of another site (see
                                          Figure 1).
                               After all bins have been analyzed, prioritized neighbor lists
                               are generated from the site matrix (see Figure 1). By virtue
                               of the analysis, neighbor lists are automatically symmetric.



Actix A Solutions User Guide                                               Viewing data 259
                               Network element data requirements
                               You must have a cellrefs data file configured with cell site
                               information for this analysis to work properly.
                               In order to audit measured data versus actual settings,
                               actual neighbor list settings must be entered into the
                               cellrefs data file. A sample .ini file has been provided
                               which contains the ‘CDMANeighborList’ field. To make
                               use of actual neighbor list settings, first add
                               CDMANeighborList to your cellrefs .ini file per the
                               sample. The addition of the actual data to your cellrefs file
                               can be completed through a number of methods.
                               A spreadsheet tool such as Microsoft Excel can be used to
                               manually populate the CDMANeighborList column. The
                               Network Explorer allows you to manually update
                               individual fields of a cell. If your organization has an
                               automated cellrefs file generator, it can be enhanced to add
                               CDMANeighborList values.
                               If you enter the values through a spreadsheet tool or an
                               automated generator, the neighbor list PN values should be
                               comma-separated and enclosed in brackets—for example
                               {6,20,251,….}.

                   Configure Settings (Neighbor Lists)




260 Viewing data                                               Actix A Solutions User Guide
       EVALUATE COVERAGE
                               From the CDMA Toolkit task bar, click on this heading:


                               You can now select from these options:
                                         Summary Report
                                         Evaluate Scenario
                               When you click on this icon, the Configure Settings dialog
                               opens on the Data tab to display all available data streams.
                               Select a data stream appropriate to the report type and click
                               OK to view the Summary Report or the Evaluate Scenario
                               dialog. Evaluate Scenario allows you to modify the
                               conditions associated with the selected data stream and
                               display the results in the Workspace Explorer.

              About Evaluate Coverage Analysis
                            The Evaluate Coverage analysis lets you quickly find the
                            optimal settings for EIRP or forward path attenuation in
                            CDMA networks. EIRP or forward path attenuation can be
                            modified to mitigate pilot pollution and coverage problems
                            that commonly occur in CDMA systems. Forward path
                            attenuation is attenuation applied only to channels on the
                            forward link of the CDMA system. Forward path
                            attenuation can be modified through a variety of
                            mechanisms specific to each infrastructure vendor.
                               Other techniques for mitigating pilot pollution and
                               coverage problems include the addition of new sectors, and
                               modifications to antenna type, azimuth, and downtilt.
                               Currently, the Evaluate Coverage analysis can only model
                               forward path attenuation modifications.
                               The analysis is based only on measured pilot data, and
                               ignores power received from other CDMA channels. Thus,
                               the analysis mimics the unloaded pilot measurements that
                               are typically performed as the first stage of cluster
                               optimization. This technique is necessary because in order
                               to consider the impact of loading, traffic channel power
                               must be modeled. Traffic channel power is a dynamic value
                               based on the number of users in the system and their
                               propagation path to each base station. The analysis uses PN
                               Scanner drive test data that provides Pilot channel received
                               signals levels for each PN offset. However, the PN Scanner
                               cannot measure the traffic channel power received from
                               each sector independently. Therefore, it is not possible to
                               know how a forward link attenuation change at a given site


Actix A Solutions User Guide                                              Viewing data 261
                   will affect the received traffic channel power measured by
                   the scanner.

                   Why use this analysis?
                   Typically, one must analyze drive test data to detect
                   coverage and interference problems, and then determine a
                   hypothetical change to be made to EIRP or forward path
                   attenuation to mitigate the problem. Once the changes have
                   been made, new drive tests are performed to determine if
                   the hypothesized changes have had the desired effect. If the
                   effect of the change is undesirable, additional changes and
                   tests are performed.
                   The Evaluate Coverage analysis drastically improves the
                   traditional process by modeling the hypothesized changes
                   using measured Ec/Io data from PN Scanner drive test files.
                   This allows the engineer to quickly evaluate several
                   hypothesized changes to the forward link power levels and
                   to determine the configuration that is most likely to
                   mitigate the problems. The Evaluate Coverage analysis can
                   offer significant time and accuracy improvements over
                   traditional methods. The Evaluate Coverage analysis is
                   especially useful as new cells are added to mature systems,
                   and the RF configuration of both the new and existing cells
                   must be evaluated.

                   How does it work?
                   The Evaluate Coverage analysis performs these steps for
                   each measurement bin along the drive test route:
                      1   The analysis calculates the Ec/Io above a user-
                          defined threshold from all sectors serving that bin.
                      2   Interference from only pilot signals, Ipilot, is
                          calculated for the bin by summing Ec from all
                          serving pilots.
                      3   Unmodified, unloaded Ec/Io is calculated by
                          dividing Ec by Ipilot for each sector.
                      4   Ec,mod for each sector is determined by applying
                          the attenuation modifications entered by the user to
                          the Ec measured for each sector.
                      5   Modified interference from only pilots signals,
                          Ipilot,mod, is calculated for the bin by summing
                          Ec,mod from all serving pilots.
                      6   Modified, unloaded Ec/Io is calculated by dividing
                          Ec,mod by Ipilot,mod for each sector.




262 Viewing data                                  Actix A Solutions User Guide
                Using Evaluate Coverage
                                  1 Click on Summary Report.
                                     The Summary Coverage Report provides coverage
                                     and interference information for each sector.
                                  2   Indicate modifications to Forward Link Attenuation
                                      on a sector-by-sector basis as desired.
                                  3   Based on the information presented in the Summary
                                      Coverage Report, consider these actions:


Problem             Action                                 Comment
Sector Causes       Consider increasing Forward Link       Take care not to degrade
Interference        Attenuation for the interfering        coverage for the interfering
                    sector (reduces EIRP) AND/OR           sector
                    Consider reducing Forward Link         Take care not to cause excess
                    Attenuation for the affected sectors   interference from affected
                    (increases EIRP),                      sectors
Sector Receives     Consider reducing Forward Link         Take care not to cause excess
Interference        Attenuation for the affected sector    interference from the affected
                    (increases EIRP) AND/OR                sector
                    Consider increasing Forward Link       Take care not to degrade
                    Attenuation for the interfering        coverage for the interfering
                    sector (decreases EIRP)                sectors
Sector Has Poor     Consider reducing Forward Link         Take care not to cause excess
Coverage            Attenuation (increases EIRP)           interference from affected
                                                           sector


       NOTE: Check that all proposed Forward Link Attenuation modifications are within
       equipment limits.
                                      Detailed ad-hoc analysis of the unmodified and
                                      modified unloaded Ec/Io calculations can be
                                      performed to gain further insight into the effects of
                                      attenuation.
                                  4   Click on the Analyzer button to add these datasets
                                      to the workspace.
                                      The unmodified data is loaded into the workspace
                                      under the File name ‘Base’ and Stream name
                                      ‘Prediction’. The modified data is loaded into the
                                      workspace under the File name ‘Scenario’ and
                                      Stream name ‘Prediction’.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                             Viewing data 263
                                  5   Click on the Report button to generate the Delta
                                      Coverage Report.
                                      This report indicates whether the modifications
                                      generated in Step 2 have helped to reduce the
                                      problems identified in Step 1. For each sector, the
                                      coverage and interference statistics are summarized
                                      for the unloaded pilot data before and after the
                                      Forward Link Attenuation modifications.

                   Configure Settings (Coverage)




264 Viewing data                                             Actix A Solutions User Guide
       OPTIMIZE MULTIPLE CARRIERS
                               From the CDMA Toolkit task bar, click on this heading:


                               You can now select from these reports:
                                         Mobile Rx Power Delta Report
                                         Mobile Tx Power Delta Report
                                         Mobile Forward FER Delta Report
                                         Mobile Tx Gain Adjust Delta Report
                                         Ec/Io Delta Statistics Report
                                         Ec Delta Statistics Report
                               When you click on the icon for a report, the Configure
                               Settings dialog opens on the Data tab to display all
                               available data streams. Select a data stream appropriate to
                               the report type and click OK to view the report.

                 Configure Settings (Multiple Carriers)




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                             Viewing data 265
GSM Missing Neighbor Analysis
                       The neighbor list as reported by a handset is based on the
                       list of neighbor candidates broadcast by the base station in
                       System Information Messages (Type2 and Type3) – the BA
                       list. The handset searches for the cells in the BA list, finds
                       the 6 strongest signals, decodes their BSIC values, and
                       reports them back to the base station.
                       The aim of the Missing Neighbor Analysis is to report
                       strong cells not seen by a handset as a neighbor cell.
                       There are two types of missing neighbors:
                       Virtual Missing Neighbors – the cell was seen and
                       measured by the handset, but the BSIC was not decoded.
                       Actual Missing Neighbors – the cell was not seen at all by
                       the handset.
                       This analysis is only concerned with actual missing
                       neighbors. These cells may have been missed for a variety
                       of reasons – for example, the cell was not in the BA list, or
                       a large BA list caused sampling problems in the handset,
                       and so on.
                       Using a scanner (or two scanners for a dual band handset)
                       independently of the handset to determine the strongest
                       cells will enable the missing neighbors to be found. Any
                       cells seen by the scanner but not seen by the handset can be
                       considered as a missing neighbor.
                       The following image shows the options available before
                       running the analysis:




266 Viewing data                                       Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               Duration for Detection – the minimum time, in seconds,
                               for which a cell must be seen by the scanner before being
                               reported as a missing neighbor.
                               Threshold for Detection – the minimum signal strength
                               that the scanner will consider.
                               Display n Missing Neighbors – the maximum number of
                               missing neighbors to be reported for each serving cell in the
                               final report.
                               Decode BSIC in scanner – if checked, only cells with
                               BSICs that could be decoded by the scanner will be
                               included in the analysis.
                               Decode Multiband Reporting Parameter – controls how
                               the list of cells is combined from multiple scanners when
                               using a dual-band handset. If checked, the MBRP is used to
                               combine the cells in the same way that the handset would
                               process them; otherwise the top 7 strongest cells are picked,
                               irrespective of the GSM band that they come from.

       RUNNING THE ANALYSIS
                               When a file is loaded, the Actix Solution automatically
                               determines the GSM bands used by each handset. To do
                               this the handset must have previously reported this
                               information to the network – that is, it must have gone into
                               dedicated mode. If the appropriate scanners are included in
                               the file, an extra entry will be added in the Workspace
                               Explorer tree, beneath the handset node – the GSM Missing
                               Neighbor Analysis. Right-clicking on this, and selecting
                               Display on Workbook, outputs the results onto an Excel
                               spreadsheet.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                             Viewing data 267
                   The following information is displayed by the analysis:
                          •   Latitude of Serving Cell
                          •   Longitude of Serving Cell
                          •   Serving Cell BCCH
                          •   Serving Cell BSIC
                          •   Serving Cell ID
                          •   Serving Cell Name
                          •   Serving Cell RxLevFull
                          •   Serving Cell RxLevSub
                          •   Multiband Reporting Parameter (depending on
                              preferences)
                   For each serving cell, the following information is
                   displayed for the missing neighbors:
                          •   Missing Neighbor ARFCN
                          •   Missing Neighbor BSIC
                          •   Missing Neighbor Cell ID
                          •   Missing Neighbor Cell Name
                          •   Missing Neighbor Occurrence
                          •   Missing Neighbor RxLev
                   These highlighted fields require the cell to be contained in
                   the currently loaded cell sites database in the Actix
                   Solution. Note also that the signal level fields are average
                   values.




268 Viewing data                                  Actix A Solutions User Guide
Querying data
About the Analysis Manager
                               Queries are a means of searching and filtering data, based
                               on user-defined events and thresholds. Once a query has
                               been created, it appears in the Workspace Explorer window
                               as a new data attribute under the Queries data group.
                               To generate and edit queries, use the Analysis Manager.

                               Starting the Analysis Manager
                               From the Tools menu, select Analysis Manager. The
                               Analysis Manager window's New Analysis tab displays
                               these icons:

                               Icon   What each analysis type does
                                      Crosstab Query – Generates statistics across one or
                                      more dimensions.
                                      Binned Query – Attributes and functions are used to
                                      create a new attribute that shows changes over time,
                                      when displayed on a map, chart or table.
                                      Filter Query – Removes data from the output, based
                                      on an expression involving attributes and functions.
                                      Histogram Query – Summary breakdown of an
                                      expression into histogram data with user-defined
                                      bars.
                                      Statistic Query – Summary statistics (for example
                                      mean, max, min) for an expression over the logfile.
                                      Event Query – Statistics triggered by a specific type
                                      of event in the logfile.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                            Querying data 269
                    Using an existing analysis
                    Each open data stream in the Workspace Explorer will have
                    its own Queries data group (once Queries have been
                    created or imported).




                    You can then display the query data attribute on maps,
                    charts or tables as appropriate, by right-clicking on the
                    query as you would for any other data attribute.
                    If you rename a query, data previously generated by the
                    original query name is not saved in the Workspace.
                    Saving the active workspace also saves all queries in the
                    Query Manager, along with all defined filters. You may
                    also Import queries from workspace files on disk into the
                    active workspace. This makes it easy to share useful
                    queries with other users.




270 Querying data                                   Actix A Solutions User Guide
       ABOUT QUERY TYPES

                               About Crosstab Queries

                                     The Crosstab query is used to generate statistics
                               across one or more dimensions.
                               It is useful for producing high-level overviews, especially
                               where large data sets are used (for example, in Abis files).
                               The query allows you to identify problem areas and to draw
                               conclusions from the statistics.
                               When you display the results of the query in a workbook or
                               in the Statistics Explorer, you should see something like
                               this:


                                Total             Stat 1     Stat 2     Stat 3     Stat 4     Stat 5
                                Dim 1

                                Dim 2
                                Dim 2
                                Dim 2
                                Dim 1

                                Dim 2
                                Dim 2
                                Dim 2
                                'Dimensions'      'Statistics' are report-specific measurements
                                are criteria by   extracted from the database and calculated over
                                which             time and dimension(s)
                                statistics are
                                reported


                               From the Statistics Explorer you can then manipulate the
                               data to view it using a different dimension (or by using a
                               pivot table in a workbook).

                               About Binned Queries

                                      The Binned query allows you to generate a new
                               expression (as a parameter) based on existing parameters.
                               This is useful for adding non-standard queries, for example
                               for pilot pollution or path-loss, where each vendor will
                               have their own definition for the query.
                               Binned Queries are similar to Custom Attributes, except
                               that Binned Queries use a single line expression and
                               Custom Attributes are multi-line.


Actix A Solutions User Guide                                                     Querying data 271
                               About Filter Queries

                                     A Filter query removes data from the output, based
                               on an expression involving attributes and functions.
                               For example, you could create a filter query called ‘Poor
                               Coverage’, where the query only passes data from the
                               expression ‘Coverage’ with a value less than –95 dBm.
                               Once you have created several queries, you can access
                               them through a right-click on a data attribute in the
                               Workspace Explorer: Within the Workspace Explorer’s tree
                               view, the filter is applied at the stream level.




                               About Histogram Queries

                                     The Histogram query processes data for a single
                               dimension into a bar chart, which is good for producing a
                               high-level view of the data.
      This data is available for any time-series data displayed in a workbook. It can also be
      displayed using the Histogram button in a chart.

                               About Statistic Queries

                                     The Statistic query allows you to generate data based
                               on the statistics available for a single dimension. It is useful
                               for generating a high-level view for system metrics
                               purposes.
      This data is available for any time-series data displayed in a workbook.

                               About Event Queries

                                     An Event query is like a Crosstab query, except that
                               multi-dimensional statistics are only collected within a
                               user-defined 'window' around a specific type of event or
                               trigger. A window exists for a limited number of messages
                               or amount of time before and/or after the event is triggered.



272 Querying data                                                  Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               In a given log file there will be a window for each
                               occurrence of the specified trigger event. Where windows
                               overlap, the overlapping messages are evaluated only once
                               each in the multi-dimensional query.

About Load Time, Full Load and Minimal Load
                               A Load Time query is any normal query that has been
                               specified to be a Load Time query. All Load Time queries
                               existing in a worksession will run whenever a data file is
                               next loaded.
                               Load Mode controls the type and detail of data loaded when
                               you load a data file. The two possible modes are Full and
                               Minimal.
                                      •   In Full Load, all data attributes are loaded from
                                          the specified data file. This can take a
                                          considerable time and should only be used when
                                          creating or editing Load Time queries.
                                      •   In Minimal Load, only user-selected Scenarios
                                          or Load Time queries are loaded.




                               Scenarios are collections of Load Time queries that can be
                               applied to PCM Link data, as it is loaded. You select the



Actix A Solutions User Guide                                           Querying data 273
                              Scenarios you need, depending on the tasks you want to
                              perform. However, the more Scenarios that are selected, the
                              longer the data takes to load, so only the basic analysis sets
                              are selected by default.
      Note that only Actix can create and edit Scenarios.

Create a Crosstab Query
                                   1   From the Tools menu, select Analysis Manager to
                                       display the New Analysis tab of the Analysis
                                       Manager dialog.
                                   2   From the panel, select Crosstab Query and click
                                       New to display the Crosstab Query Wizard dialog:




                                   3   Follow the instructions on the dialog to form the
                                       query.
                                   4   When selecting an expression, click the right arrow
                                       button to display a drop-down list of available
                                       attributes/parameters. You can also create a New
                                       expression or Edit the listed expression, which in
                                       each case opens the Expression Builder dialog.



274 Querying data                                             Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               The New Statistic and Edit Statistic buttons open the
                               Statistic (see Statistic dialog on page 371) dialog.
                               You can use the Filter (see Filter Wizard on page 305)
                               button to refine the query.

       TIPS FOR WRITING CROSSTAB QUERIES

                               Improving query efficiency
                               A Crosstab Query is evaluated by processing each message
                               in turn, in the following sequence:
                                  1    The query filter is evaluated (button in bottom left
                                       hand corner of the Crosstab Query wizard).
                                   2 Dimensions are evaluated in order from top to
                                       bottom of the dimension list.
                                   3 Statistics are evaluated in order from top to bottom
                                       of the statistics list. For each statistic, first the
                                       statistics filter is evaluated, then the statistics
                                       expression.
                               As each stage described above is evaluated successfully,
                               the query passes to the next stage until the message has
                               satisfied every stage. The query then moves on to the next
                               message.
                               If a filter or dimension is not satisfied for a given message,
                               the message is discarded and the query moves on to the
                               next message.
                               To increase the efficiency of the query, eliminate unwanted
                               messages by the query filter or a dimension (that is, at the
                               highest level in this sequence).

                               Improving efficiency (2)
                               If a query has many dimensions, performance may be
                               improved by reducing the resolution of data, for example, a
                               query with RxLev and RxQual as dimensions would run
                               more rapidly by rounding the dimension expressions using
                               the mround function.
                               mround(RxLev,5)

                               This rounds RxLev to the nearest multiple of five, reducing
                               the combinations of RxLev and RxQual stored in the query.

                               Count statistics
                               A typical Crosstab Query might be to count the number of
                               times a certain message occurs, with another attribute as a




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                             Querying data 275
                    dimension (for example, a count of Handover Fail
                    messages for every Serving Cell ID).
                    The statistic should be defined like this:




                    The expression being counted is '1'. This is only being
                    evaluated when the filter is being passed - that is, when
                    A_Message_Type = 22 (handover failure).




276 Querying data                                    Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               The format in the filter expression should be set to 'count',
                               as shown here:




       CROSSTAB QUERY EXAMPLE
                                  1   From the Tools menu, select Analysis Manager to
                                      display the New Analysis tab of the Analysis
                                      Manager dialog.
                                  2   From the panel, double-click Crosstab Query to
                                      display the Crosstab Query Wizard dialog.
                                  3   For the name of the query, type in ‘CDMA Server
                                      Statistics’.
                                  4   Click New Expression to open the Expression
                                      Builder dialog.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                             Querying data 277
                    5   For the Description, type in ‘Serving Site’.
                    6   In the expression pane, type in:
                        state(ServingCellID)
                    7   Click OK.
                    8   Create these new expressions:

                         Name                     Expression
                         Serving Sector           state(ServingSectorID)
                         CallType = 2             CDMA_CallType==2
                         CallType = 1             CDMA_CallType==1
                         CallType = 0             CDMA_CallType==0
                         ServFreqChannelState state(ServFreqChannel)
                         ServingCellIDState       state(ServingCellID)
                         ServingSectorIDState     state(ServingSectorID)

                    9 Click on the Expressions tab.
                    10 Select ‘Serving Site’ and click Select Column. Do
                       the same for ‘Serving Sector’.




278 Querying data                               Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                 11 Click New Statistic to create these statistics,
                                    selecting the expressions already created or by
                                    selecting the appropriate CDMA data attributes:

        Name                         Expression/Parameter                     Method
        Percent Dropped              CallType = 2                             Percent True
        Percent Failed               CallType = 1                             Percent True
        Percent Good                 CallType = 0                             Percent True
        Average FER                  DownLink Measurements >                  Mean
                                     ForwardFER
        Average Ec/Io                DownLink Measurements >                  Mean
                                     EcIo_1stBest
        Average Receive Power        DownLink Measurements >                  Mean
                                     MobileReceivePower
        Count of Dropped Calls       Event Data > CallDropped                 Count
        Count of Failed Calls        Event Data > OutgoingCallFail            Count
        Count of Good Calls          Event Data > CallCompleted               Count
                                 12 In the last pane, check all the statistics boxes.
                                 13 Click OK.

Create a Binned Query
                                 1     From the Tools menu, select Analysis Manager to
                                       display the New Analysis tab of the Analysis
                                       Manager dialog.
                                   2 From the panel, select Binned Query and click
                                       New to display the Expression Builder dialog.
                                   3 Enter the details of the expression to be evaluated in
                                       every bin (data grouping).
                                   4 To set the Binning Settings for the query, click
                                       Binning to open the Binning Settings dialog.
                                   5 Select the binning method for this query. The
                                       'Default' binning method is that defined using (from
                                       the main menu) Tools | Preferences.
       The parameters displayed in the dialog change to match the binning method.
                                       In this example, the 'Distance' binning method has
                                       been selected, which has expanded the dialog.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                            Querying data 279
                               6 Define the binning settings and click OK to return
                                 to the Binned Query Wizard dialog.
                               7 Click OK to complete the query definition.

      BINNED QUERY EXAMPLE
      This query is designed to help identify interference in CDMA data.
                                   1 From the Tools menu, select Analysis Manager to
                                        display the New Analysis tab of the Analysis
                                        Manager dialog.
                                   2 From the panel, double-click Binned Query to
                                        open the Expression Builder and create a new
                                        expression.
                                   3 Under Description, type in the name of the
                                        expression to be ‘Number of Pilots above –14’.
                                   4 In the expression pane, type in:
                                   array_count(EcIo_for_Nth_Best_Pilot[],
                                   >,-14




280 Querying data                                          Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                 5      In the top right corner, set the Format to ‘CDMA
                                        PN Count’.
                                        In this example, we are using the 'Default' binning
                                        setting, set using Tools | Preferences.
                                    6 Click Binning to check that the query is using the
                                        'Default' setting.
                                    7 Click OK to close the Wizard, then click OK to
                                        close the Analysis Manager.
                                    8 From the Workspace Explorer, right-click the query
                                        and select Display on Chart to view the results of
                                        the query.
                                    9 Display the Event ‘Dropped Calls’ on the Chart to
                                        view dropped calls from the handset.
                                    10 Display the Event ‘OutgoingCallFail’ on the Chart
                                        to view failed calls from the handset.
       Notice the correlation between call problems and the number of serving Pilots.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                           Querying data 281
Create a Filter Query
                                  1     From the Tools menu, select Analysis Manager to
                                        display the New Analysis tab of the Analysis
                                        Manager dialog.
                                    2 From the panel, select Filter and click New to open
                                        the Filter Wizard dialog:
      You can also right-click on a stream in the Workspace Explorer and select Filter, Create a
      new filter to open the Filter Wizard dialog.




                                  3    Type in a name for the filter.
                                       Choose a name that you and other users will
                                       understand later—for example ‘Poor Coverage’.
                                       Ideally the filter name should incorporate the name
                                       of the expression (in this case ‘Coverage’) and a
                                       qualifier such as ‘Good’, ‘Poor’, ‘Bad’ and so on.
                                  4    Select an expression for the filter.
                                       When selecting an expression, click the right arrow
                                       button to display a drop-down list of available
                                       attributes/parameters. You can also create a New
                                       expression or Edit the listed expression, which in
                                       each case opens the Expression Builder dialog.
                                  5    Select an operator for the filter.
                                  6    Type in or select a related threshold value.
                                  7    Click OK to complete the query definition.



282 Querying data                                                Actix A Solutions User Guide
       FILTER QUERY EXAMPLE
       This query is designed to filter poor quality in CDMA data.
                                      1 From the Workspace Explorer, right-click on the
                                          attribute ‘Downlink Measurements>EcIo_1stBest’,
                                          and select Display on Map.
                                      2 Right-click on the attribute ‘Downlink
                                          Measurements>MobileReceivePower’, and select
                                          Display on Chart.
                                      3 Right-click on the handset data stream and select
                                          Filter, then Create a New Filter to open the Filter
                                          Wizard.
                                      4 Enter ‘Poor Quality’ as the name of the filter.
                                      5 Click on the right-arrow of the attribute picker and
                                          select ‘CDMA > DownLink Measurements >
                                          ForwardFER’.




                                  6   Set the filter operation to Greater than (>).
                                  7   Set the threshold to 5.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                             Querying data 283
                    8   Click OK to close the Wizard.
                        Notice that the other dialogs update to show the
                        areas with poor quality.




284 Querying data                               Actix A Solutions User Guide
Create a Histogram Query
                               1 From the Tools menu, select Analysis Manager to
                                 display the New Analysis tab of the Analysis
                                 Manager dialog.
                               2 From the panel, select Histogram.
                               3 Click New to open the Histogram Wizard. If you
                                 select one of the last two histogram types, the dialog
                                 expands to provide more options:




                               4   When selecting an expression, click the right arrow
                                   button to display a drop-down list of available
                                   attributes (the ‘attribute picker’).
                                   You can also create a New expression or Edit the
                                   listed expression, which in each case opens the
                                   Expression Builder dialog.
                                   To create a more complex query, click Filter to
                                   display the Filter (see Filter Wizard on page 305)
                                   dialog.


Actix A Solutions User Guide                                        Querying data 285
      HISTOGRAM QUERY EXAMPLE
      This query creates a histogram for the CDMA attribute ‘HandoffState’.
                                   1 From the Tools menu, select Analysis Manager to
                                       display the New Analysis tab of the Analysis
                                       Manager dialog.
                                   2 From the panel, double-click Histogram to open
                                       the Histogram Wizard.
                                   3 Type in the name of the query to be ‘Handoff
                                       State’.
                                   4 For the expression, click on the right-arrow of the
                                       attribute picker and select ‘CDMA > Dedicated
                                       Radio Link > HandoffState’.




                                5   Select the radio button ‘I want to specify ranges for
                                    my histogram’.
                                6   Enter the following information:
                                    In the Minimum Value box, type ‘-0.5’.
                                    In the Maximum Value box, type ‘10.5’.
                                    In the No. of Columns box, type ‘11’.
                                7   Click Generate.




286 Querying data                                           Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                   The column definitions appear in the box:




                               8   Click OK to close the Wizard and OK to close the
                                   Analysis Manager.
                               9   From the Workspace Explorer, right-click on
                                   ‘Queries > Histograms > Handoff State’ and select
                                   Display on Chart.




                                   The histogram is now displayed:




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                         Querying data 287
Create a Statistic Query
                           1   From the Tools menu, select Analysis Manager to
                               open the New Analysis tab of the Analysis Manager
                               dialog.
                           2   From the panel, select Statistic and click New to
                               open the Statistic Wizard.
                           3   Type in a descriptive name for the query.
                           4   Select or type in the name of an expression.
                               You can click the right arrow button to display a
                               drop-down list of available attributes/parameters.




288 Querying data                                     Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                   You can also create a New expression or Edit the
                                   listed expression, which in each case opens the
                                   Expression Builder dialog. Here is a simple
                                   example:




                               5   If you select an option to exclude data, the dialog
                                   expands to allow you to define the top and bottom
                                   percentages or values to exclude.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                        Querying data 289
                                6   Click OK to complete the query definition.

      STATISTIC QUERY EXAMPLE
                                1 From the Tools menu, select Analysis Manager to
                                  open the New Analysis tab of the Analysis Manager
                                  dialog.
                                2 From the panel, double-click Statistic to open the
                                  Statistic Wizard.
                                3 Type in the name ‘CDMA FER’ for the query.
                                4 For the expression, click on the right-arrow of the
                                  attribute picker and select ‘CDMA > DownLink
                                  Measurements > ForwardFER’.




290 Querying data                                          Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               5   From the radio buttons, select ‘Yes, I want to
                                   exclude a total number of values from the
                                   calculation’.
                               6   In both exclusion boxes, type ‘2’.
                               7   Click OK to close the Wizard, and click OK to
                                   close the Analysis Manager.
                               8   From the Workspace Explorer, right-click on
                                   ‘Queries > Statistics > CDMA FER’ and select
                                   Display on Table.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                       Querying data 291
                            The statistics are now displayed in a table:




Create an Event Query
                        1   From the Tools menu, select Analysis Manager to
                            open the New Analysis tab of the Analysis Manager
                            dialog.
                        2   From the panel, double-click Event Query to open
                            the Event Query Wizard.




292 Querying data                                   Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                   3        Under Trigger Selection, at the right of the trigger
                                            input box, click the arrow button to display a drop-
                                            down list of available attributes/parameters, and
                                            select a trigger expression.
       You can also create a new expression or edit the listed expression by pressing Edit. This
       opens the Expression Builder dialog.
                                       4 Click the appropriate radio button to define the
                                            window type as based on time or number of
                                            measurement reports.
                                       5 In the text boxes, enter the size of the window
                                            before and after each trigger event. Window size is
                                            defined in terms of milliseconds or a number of
                                            measurement reports.
       You may wish to discriminate between data from different sources when evaluating an
       Event query. For example, in an Abis file containing interleaved messages from many
       simultaneous calls, you may want each window only to consider messages from the same
       call as the trigger event. In this case, set Discriminator to Abis_Call_Id. When there is
       only one source (for example, with drive test files), leave the discriminator blank.
                                       6 Click Next to proceed.
                                            The next dialog in the wizard allows you to define
                                            the query that will be evaluated in each window.
                                            This dialog is effectively the same as that used
                                            when you create a Crosstab Query.

       EVENT QUERY EXAMPLE
                                   1 From the Tools menu, select Analysis Manager to
                                     open the New Analysis tab of the Analysis Manager
                                     dialog.
                                   2 From the panel, double-click Event Query to open
                                     the Event Query Wizard.
                                   3 Click on Edit to open the Expression Builder
                                     dialog.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                                Querying data 293
                    4   Enter the expression as follows:




                    5   Click OK to close the dialog.




294 Querying data                               Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               6   Complete the Event Query Wizard as follows:




                               7   Click Next to open the second page of the wizard.
                               8   Enter a name for the query.
                               9   Click New Statistic to open the Statistic dialog.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                       Querying data 295
                    10 Complete the dialog as follows:




                    11 Click OK to close the dialog and OK again to
                       complete the query.
                    12 Display and examine the query in the Statistics
                       Explorer.




296 Querying data                              Actix A Solutions User Guide
Build and edit expressions
                               You can use the Expression Builder to construct and
                               maintain expressions for use within queries. Type in a
                               Description1 for the expression, and then either type the
                               expression into the upper expression pane directly2, or click
                               on the various buttons, parameters and commands in the
                               lower part of the dialog to build up the expression.




                               Click the symbol buttons3 to add the appropriate symbol to
                               the expression in the window.
                               Double-click an attribute from the Parameters tab4 to add it
                               to the expression.
                               The Expressions tab5 lists all existing expressions in the
                               current workspace. You can nest these expressions to create
                               a powerful new expression. Double-click an expression to
                               display it in the expression window. Then double-click on a
                               parameter or expression to make this the value acted upon
                               by the expression.
                               The <Values> pane6 allows you to set the value for the
                               parameter.
                               Click a command7 to add it to the expression. A pop-up
                               message explains how you can use the selected command.



Actix A Solutions User Guide                                            Querying data 297
                               The Format selector8 indicates how the expression will be
                               treated, in terms of units, histogram bar definition, colors
                               on a map, and so on.
                               The attribute picker9 allows you to select any permissible
                               attribute.

Edit an existing query
                                   1   From the Tools menu, select Analysis Manager,
                                       then the Existing Analyses tab of the Analysis
                                       Manager dialog.
                                   2   From the list panel, select the required query and
                                       click Edit.




      Alternatively, from the Workspace Explorer, right-click on the query and select Edit
      Analysis Definition.




                                       The appropriate query wizard dialog then opens.




298 Querying data                                                 Actix A Solutions User Guide
Delete an existing query
                               1   From the Tools menu, select Analysis Manager,
                                   then the Existing Analyses tab of the Analysis
                                   Manager dialog.
                               2   Select the required query from the list panel and
                                   click Delete to remove the query.




                                   The selected query no longer appears in the Existing
                                   Analyses tab of the Analysis Manager dialog or
                                   under the Queries heading in the Workspace
                                   Explorer.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                        Querying data 299
Import a query
      This procedure allows you to import both normal and Load Time queries.
                                  1 Select Tools | Analysis Manager to open the
                                      Analysis Manager dialog.




                                    2 Click Import to open the Import Queries dialog.
                                    3 Select the Actix Query File (*.xml) and click OK.
                                        The selected query now appears in the Existing
                                        Analyses tab of the Analysis Manager dialog and
                                        under the Queries heading in the Workspace
                                        Explorer.
      You will lose all queries you generate in the current worksession, unless you either save
      the workspace or export each query.




300 Querying data                                                Actix A Solutions User Guide
Export a query
                                    1 Select Tools | Analysis Manager to open the
                                      Analysis Manager dialog.
                                    2 Go to the Existing Analyses tab and select the
                                      appropriate query.




                                     3 Click Export to open the Export Queries dialog.
                                     4 Select the appropriate folder and type in the name
                                          of the Actix Query File (including the *.xml
                                          extension) and click OK.
                                          The selected query now appears in the Existing
                                          Analyses tab, and in the Workspace Explorer, under
                                          the Queries heading.
       You will lose all queries you generate in the current worksession, unless you either save
       the workspace or export each query.
       If 'Execute at Load Time' is set to yes, this query is exported to the location specified in
       Tools | Preferences, File Locations, Load Time Queries. See Set as Load Time query.

Set as Load Time query
       The Load Mode should be set to 'Full' before you create or edit a Load Time query. The
       Load Mode setting is under Tools | Preferences, in the General Settings, PCM Link
       section.
                                   1 Select Tools | Analysis Manager to open the
                                       Analysis Manager dialog.
                                   2 Go to the Existing Analyses tab and select the
                                       appropriate query.



Actix A Solutions User Guide                                                  Querying data 301
                                   3   Click Load Time to open the Execute at Load Time
                                       column:




                                    4 Select Yes.
      This query is exported to the location specified in Tools | Preferences, File Locations,
      Load Time Queries.
      Load Time Queries are only applied to logfiles loaded after the query was imported or
      edited.



Set the Load Mode
                              To set the Load Mode
                                 1 Select Tools | Preferences to open the Preferences
                                     dialog.
                                 2 In the General Settings, PCM Link section, set the
                                     Load Mode to 'Full' or 'Minimal' (the default).

Select one or more Load Time queries
                              To select one or more Load Time queries
                              Either:
                                       •   For each appropriate query, set to Execute at
                                           Load Time.
                                       •   Import Load Time queries as described under
                                           Import a query.


302 Querying data                                                Actix A Solutions User Guide
Select a Scenario
                            To select a Scenario
                                1 Select Tools | Choose Scenario to open the Attach
                                     Load Time Queries dialog.
                                2 Click to put a check mark against each Scenario that
                                     is to be applied to each logfile opened in the current
                                     worksession.
       Remember, the more Scenarios that are selected, the longer the data takes to load.
                            Once you have set the Load Mode correctly, and have
                            selected your Load Time queries or Scenario, you are ready
                            to open a new data file.

Change the name of a query
                                  1 Select Tools | Analysis Manager to open the
                                    Analysis Manager dialog.
                                  2 Go to the Existing Analyses tab and select the
                                    appropriate query.
                                  3 Export the query under a new name.
                                  4 Import the query.

Troubleshooting Queries
       HOW DO I DISPLAY ONLY NEWLY ACTIVATED SITES?
                               There are several ways to achieve this. One is to create a
                               Filter query, and the other is to create a Crosstab query and
                               filter the results through the Statistics Explorer.

                               To create a filter for one cell site
                                  1 From the Tools menu, select Analysis Manager,
                                     and create a new Filter.
                                  2 Select Site Data Node > ServingCellID as the
                                     attribute to filter, and enter the name as it appears in
                                     the Workspace Explorer.
                                  3 From the Workspace Explorer, right-click your
                                     stream name and choose the Filters option. Select
                                     the filter you have just created to enable it.
                                     All data you display will now be filtered for just
                                     that site.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                             Querying data 303
                            To create a crosstab query for the cell site
                               1 From the Tools menu, select Analysis Manager,
                                   and create a new Crosstab query.
                               2 Enter ServingCellID as the dimension, and leave
                                   the statistics blank.
                               3 Display your results on the Statistics Explorer.
                               4 Select the row for the site you want to filter, and
                                   click on the Filter button.
                                   All other data views will now be filtered while the
                                   Filter button is enabled.

Analysis Manager reference
      ANALYSIS MANAGER DIALOG

             New Analysis tab

                            To define a new query
                                   • From the New Analysis tab, click on the
                                      appropriate query icon.

             Existing Analysis tab
                                     •   From the Existing Analyses tab, select one of the
                                         existing queries from the panel. The queries are
                                         grouped by type—for example, Crosstab,
                                         Binned, Filter and so on.
                            You can also add existing queries from another folder on
                            your PC or network by clicking Import and selecting the
                            appropriate query file. You can also Export the query data
                            as a file for other users.

      CROSSTAB QUERY WIZARD
                            The New Expression and Edit Expression buttons open
                            the Expression Builder dialog.
                            The New Statistic and Edit Statistic buttons open the
                            Statistic dialog.

      BINNED QUERY WIZARD
                            The Binning button in the Expression Builder dialog
                            displays the Binning Settings dialog. This allows you to
                            override (for this query) the global default binning settings
                            defined under Tools | Preferences.




304 Querying data                                            Actix A Solutions User Guide
       FILTER WIZARD
                               The Filter Wizard lets you create a filter query. Filters
                               allow you to specify data that will be removed from a
                               selection.




                               When you type in a name for the filter, choose a name that
                               you and other users will understand later, for example
                               ‘Poor Coverage’. Ideally the filter name should incorporate
                               the name of the expression (in this case ‘Coverage’) and a
                               qualifier such as ‘Good’, ‘Poor’, ‘Bad’ and so on. There are
                               several ways you can select an expression for the filter:
                                      •   Choose the expression from a drop-down menu
                                      •   Click the right-arrow to select from the attribute
                                          picker
                                      •   Click New to create a new expression in the
                                          Expression Builder
                                      •   Click Edit to alter a selected expression in the
                                          Expression Builder.
                               You then select an operator for the filter, and type in or
                               select a related threshold value.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                             Querying data 305
      HISTOGRAM WIZARD
                         When selecting an expression, click the right arrow button
                         to display a drop-down list of available
                         attributes/parameters. You can also create a New
                         expression or Edit the listed expression, which in each case
                         opens the Expression Builder dialog. The Filter button at
                         the bottom left also allows you to define a filter expression.




                         When specifying discrete values, you can use either or both
                         of the Minimum and Maximum boxes. Enter the value and
                         click Add to display the text ‘Equal to <value>’. You can
                         specify the range for each column:
                                •   Individually, by entering the Minimum and
                                    Maximum values for a column and clicking
                                    Add.
                                •   Automatically, by specifying the Minimum and
                                    Maximum Values for the entire range, together
                                    with the Number of Columns. Then click
                                    Generate.
                         In each case, entering a Minimum Value will generate the
                         text ‘Greater than <value>’, and entering a Maximum
                         Value will generate the text ‘less than <value>’. Check the
                         related Inclusive box to set the text to ‘Greater than or
                         equal to’ or ‘less than or equal to’.


306 Querying data                                        Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               You can change a column definition by double-clicking on
                               it in the window. The appropriate values and settings will
                               be displayed in the Minimum and Maximum Value and
                               related boxes. Make any necessary changes and click
                               Update. The text in the column definition window changes
                               to reflect the new settings.

       STATISTIC WIZARD
                               This dialog allows you to create a statistical query based on
                               a particular statistical technique applied to a selected data
                               attribute. You can also apply a filter to the attribute’s data
                               before using the statistical technique.




                               The New and Edit buttons open the Expression Builder
                               dialog.

       QUERY WINDOW DEFINITION
                               This dialog lets you define a query window. This is a query
                               for calculating statistics before, during or after a selected
                               event. Select an event from the drop-down list, or click
                               New or Edit to open the Filter Wizard dialog to create a
                               new filter. You can then define the window in terms of the
                               number or milliseconds before or after the selected event,
                               or, if based on measurement reports, the number of reports
                               before or after the event.



Actix A Solutions User Guide                                             Querying data 307
      FILTER DIALOG
                           This dialog lets you select which filters to apply to the data.
                           The filter window displays all available filters for selection.
                           Click on a filter to check or uncheck its selection box. Click
                           New or Edit to open the Filter Wizard (see page 305) and
                           create a new filter or edit an existing filter.
                           There are two radio buttons below the filter window. Select
                           OR where you want to exclude data that matches any of the
                           selected filter criteria, or select AND where you want to
                           exclude data that matches each one of the selected filter
                           criteria.

      EVENT QUERY WIZARD
                           The first dialog in this wizard allows you to define the
                           triggering event and the period before and the period after
                           the event to include.
                           The second dialog is similar to the Crosstab Query.




308 Querying data                                           Actix A Solutions User Guide
Archiving data using Network Images
About Network Imaging
                               You may want to process a large number of log files, but
                               are only interested in specific data parameters. In Actix
                               Solutions, you can group this information together under a
                               unique collection of data, called a ‘network image’. A
                               network image is a single data file (.dat file) that contains
                               the results of a series of queries run on a set of logfiles.
                               More logfiles can be queried and added to the network
                               image, increasing the size of the data file.
       You cannot include an A or Abis file in a network image.
                              Each Actix Solution contains default network image
                              templates that each contain a set of data parameters. You
                              can then create several images from each definition, for
                              example for consecutive months. Data from these network
                              images can then be collated to see how key network
                              parameters have changed over time.
                               Once you have created a network image file from a
                               template and attached it to the workspace, you can use it to
                               define which data attributes are to be involved in a batch
                               load. Batch-loading allows you to import a small number of
                               important data parameters without needing to load all of
                               each file.




                               When all the files have been processed, you can examine
                               the batched data attributes in the same way as you would
                               for standard data attributes, using maps, charts and so on.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                     Archiving data using Network Images 309
Create a new network image file
                               1   Select Network Image | Create Network Image to
                                   open the Create Network Image dialog.
                               2   Select a network image template and click OK to
                                   open the Save As dialog.




                               3   Enter a File name and location for the network
                                   image file and click Save.




310 Archiving data using Network Images                   Actix A Solutions User Guide
Attach an existing network image file
                               1   Select Network Image | Attach Network Image to
                                   display the Select Network Image File dialog.




                               2   Select a network image file from the list and click
                                   Open.
                                   The Workspace Explorer updates to show the
                                   selected network image as active under the Network
                                   Image heading.

Batch load data files
                               1   From the Workspace Explorer, right-click on the
                                   network image file to be used to define those data
                                   attributes involved in the batch load.
                               2   From the pop-up menu, select the Batch Load Files
                                   option.




                                   This opens the Select Files to Load dialog.
                               3   Select one or more data files and click Open.
                                   When the file processing is complete, a message
                                   box reports on the status of the batch load.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                 Archiving data using Network Images 311
                                  The batched data attributes now appear in the
                                  Workspace Explorer, ready for analysis.

Load streams from the Workspace Explorer to a Network Image
                           You can copy loaded data from the Workspace Tree-view
                           into a Network Image. This can be useful if you want to
                           look at the data before adding it to the Image. It also allows
                           you to do some processing first—for example,
                           superstreaming drive test and call trace data. In this way,
                           you can create a Network Image of uplink data that can be
                           displayed on the Map.

                           To copy a stream into a Network Image
                              1 Load a logfile as normal.
                              2 Process the data as required (for example, create a
                                 Superstream).
                              3 Create a Network Image.
                              4 Right click on your Network Image and select Load
                                 Stream.
                              5 Pick a stream from all loaded streams (including
                                 Superstreams).




312 Archiving data using Network Images                    Actix A Solutions User Guide
Network Explorer
About Network Explorer
                                The Network Explorer allows you to browse and edit
                                loaded network information. This data is stored in a text
                                file known as the CellRefs file (which can have any name).
       To set which text file your Actix Solution uses as its CellRefs network information file,
       select Tools | Preferences and specify the CellRefs File Location.
                                          • Select Tools | Network Explorer to open the
                                               Network Explorer window:




                                You can also import network element information from
                                delimited text files, using the Import button.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                              Network Explorer 313
        USE THE NETWORK EXPLORER
                               From the right-hand parameter panel, you can control how
                               the parameters of the network elements are displayed, and
                               edit individual parameters.

To…         Do this…
Sort the    Click on a parameter column heading.
elements
Edit an   Click on the parameter and type in the new value. Once you have finished
element   editing the values for an element, click Update to enter the new values into
parameter the network element database.
Find a      Enter the value into the box below the toolbar and click Find Next.
matching    This search facility lets you use wildcard characters, character lists, or
value       character ranges, in any combination, to match strings:
            Characters Matches in string
            in pattern
            ?             Any single character.
            *             Zero or more characters.
            #             Any single digit (0–9).
            [charlist]    Any single character in charlist.
                          A group of one or more characters (charlist) enclosed in
                          brackets ([ ]) can be used to match any single character in string
                          and can include almost any character code, including digits. To
                          match the special characters left bracket ([), question mark (?),
                          number sign (#), and asterisk (*), enclose them in brackets. The
                          right bracket (]) cannot be used within a group to match itself,
                          but it can be used outside a group as an individual character.
                          A hyphen (–) can be used to separate the upper and lower
                          bounds of a range of characters. For example, [A-Z] results in a
                          match if the corresponding character position in string contains
                          any uppercase letters in the range A–Z. Multiple ranges are
                          included within the brackets without delimiters. A hyphen (–)
                          can appear either at the beginning (after an exclamation point if
                          one is used) or at the end of charlist to match itself. In any other
                          location, the hyphen is used to identify a range of characters.
                          When a range of characters is specified, they must appear in
                          ascending sort order (from lowest to highest). For example, [A-
                          Z] is a valid pattern, but [Z-A] is not.
                          The character sequence [] is considered a zero-length string
                          ("").



314 Network Explorer                                            Actix A Solutions User Guide
To…        Do this…
           [!charlist]      Any single character not in charlist.
                            An exclamation point (!) at the beginning of charlist means that
                            a match is made if any character except the characters in
                            charlist is found in string. When used outside brackets, the
                            exclamation point matches itself.
           In some languages, there are special characters in the alphabet that represent
           two separate characters. For example, several languages use the character "æ"
           to represent the characters "a" and "e" when they appear together. The search
           feature recognizes that the single special character and the two individual
           characters are equivalent.
           When a language that uses a special character is specified in the system locale
           settings, an occurrence of the single special character in either pattern or
           string matches the equivalent 2-character sequence in the other string.
           Similarly, a single special character in a pattern enclosed in brackets (by
           itself, in a list, or in a range) matches the equivalent 2-character sequence in
           string.

       IMPORT NETWORK ELEMENTS FROM A FILE

                                   To import all network element data
       This will overwrite your existing cellrefs.txt file, so you may want to create a backup of that
       file and keep it in a safe location before following these steps.
                                       1 From the toolbar, click Import and select Import
                                           From New Template.
       You can also right-click to display the pop-up menu, select Import and then Import From
       New Template.
                                       2 Select the appropriate network data file.
                                       3 Click Open to display the Custom Import Wizard.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                                Network Explorer 315
                                    Note the Data Preview section, which is common to
                                    both tabs of the dialog. The name of the selected
                                    text file appears at the top of the section. The pane
                                    below the file name shows how the contents of the
                                    selected text file appear, based on the current import
                                    selections.
                                4     Type in a meaningful Description for the template.
                                5     Set the Column Delimiter, Number of rows to be
                                      ignored and Array (list) Separator according to
                                      the format used in your network information file.
      Avoid using the same character as a column delimiter, array separator or decimal
      separator.
                                 6 Set the other parameters as appropriate.
                                 7 Click on the Column Settings tab.
                                      The Column Settings tab allows you to associate a
                                      network parameter with a column of data in the text
                                      file.



316 Network Explorer                                        Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                   Note that each of the field names has an associated
                                   icon:
                                      Key fields – you must select a field type for this
                                   field, but you cannot set a default value.
                                      Required fields – these must be bound to a
                                   particular type or must have a default value set.
                                      Other fields – binding particular field types or
                                   setting default values is not strictly necessary for
                                   this field.
                               8  Under the Columns heading, click on a setting for a
                                  particular field.
                               9 Select a column description from the drop-down
                                  list. The Wizard then displays the selected
                                  parameter against the appropriate column.
                               10 Set the default value for that field as appropriate.
                               11 Continue for all appropriate columns.



Actix A Solutions User Guide                                      Network Explorer 317
                                       12 Click Finish when all the columns have been
                                          assigned. The new cell information will be added at
                                          the bottom of the existing list in the Network
                                          Explorer.
      If any errors occurred during the import, a message box will let you know. All errors that
      occurred during the import are written to the file 'error.log' in the \actix\analyzer\bin\cellrefs
      folder.
      If the cellplan file is updated, you can use the template you have created on the new file.
      Because you can reuse the template, you do not have to repeat work you have already
      done, including the column-by-column parameter assignment. See the Preferences dialog
      for more information.

Notes for GSM users
                                The cellrefs file can hold data describing three levels of the
                                GSM infrastructure hierarchy:
                                         •    Cellsite
                                         •    BSC
                                         •    MSC
                                At its minimal level, the GSM cellrefs file should hold
                                rows starting with the keyword GSM_Site (describing the
                                ID and location of the site) and GSM_Cell (describing all
                                cell-specific data such as Azimuth, Beamwidth, BCCH, CI,
                                BSIC etc). The Site ID column is the link between these
                                two definitions.
                                If the (optional) final column of the GSM_Cell row
                                (BSCID) is used, there must be a corresponding row
                                (keyword GSM_BSC) describing the BSC ID, MSC ID and
                                BSC name. This also means that there must be a
                                corresponding row (keyword GSM_MSC) describing the
                                MSC ID and name. So if the BSCID column is used in the
                                GSM_Cell row, all other data in the hierarchy must exist in
                                the cellrefs file, or the cell sector will not be displayed on
                                the map.
                                The benefit of including the BSC and MSC row definitions
                                is that these values can be used in the map legend, allowing
                                cells to be color-coded according to their BSC.

      CREATE A NEW ELEMENT

                                To add a new cell or site element
                                   1 Click New from the toolbar.
                                   2 Select the new element type.


318 Network Explorer                                                  Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                       You can also right-click to display the pop-up
                                       menu, select New and then the element type.
                                   3   Click next to each field and enter the appropriate
                                       value.

          LEAVE THE NETWORK EXPLORER
                                When you have finished viewing or editing the network
                                element data, click the Exit button in the top right corner of
                                the window.
                                If you have made any changes to the data, you are
                                prompted like this:
                                You have made changes to
                                <pathname>\cellrefs.txt. Do you want to
                                save them now?
                                Click Yes to save the changes and No to ignore the
                                changes.

Network Explorer reference
          NETWORK EXPLORER TOOLBAR REFERENCE

This control     Does this…
  Back           Returns to the Network Explorer display as it was before the last control
                 selection.
  Forward        Shows the next display state of the Network Explorer. This only works if
                 you previously selected Back.
   Up            Moves up on level in the network hierarchy in the Detailed View panel.

   Update        Applies any changes made to the currently selected CellRefs file.

   Refresh       Updates the Network Explorer interface.

   Stop          Stops the Network Explorer interface from updating.

     Import      Imports network elements from an existing text file.

    New          Creates a new network element.

   Delete        Removes the currently selected element.
   View All
Find This        Searches the element data for a match to the text entered in the box.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                            Network Explorer 319
      CUSTOM IMPORT WIZARD

               Template Import Settings dialog




Description            Enter a line of text to describe the imported data.
Delimiters             Select the character used in the text file to separate columns of
                       data. Choose from Tab, Semicolon, Comma, Space, or define an
                       alternative (Other) delimiter.
First row contains     Check this box if the first one or more rows in the text file contain
headers                column header information rather than data.
Number of rows to      Enter the number of header rows to exclude when importing the
be ignored             data.
Array (List)           Enter the character used to separate values in an array. May not
Separator              clash with the column delimiter or the decimal separator.
Decimal Separator      Select the character used as the decimal point. May not clash with
                       the column delimiter or the array separator.
Latitude/Longitude     Select the latitude/longitude format from a list of available
Format                 formats.
Coordinate System      Select the coordinate system from a list of available coordinate
                       system definitions.
                             The Data Preview section is common to both tabs of the
                             dialog. The name of the selected text file appears at the top



320 Network Explorer                                          Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               of the section. The pane below the file name shows how the
                               contents of the selected text file appear, based on the
                               current import selections.

              Template Column Settings dialog




                               The Column Settings tab allows you to associate a network
                               parameter with a column of data in the text file. Click on
                               the second Column next to the appropriate field and bind
                               the field to a selected column type. You can also enter a
                               default value for non-Key fields.
                                 Key fields – these must be bound to a specific data field.
                                  Required fields – these can either be bound to a specific
                               field, or have a default value set, or both. If bound to a
                               column type, the default value is set when there is a gap in
                               the network data. If set to 'Ignore', the default value is used
                               for every instance of that data.
                                 Other fields – these can be bound to a specific field and
                               have a default value set as required.
                               The Data Preview section is common to both tabs of the
                               dialog. The name of the selected text file appears at the top
                               of the section. The pane below the file name shows how the
                               contents of the selected text file appear, based on the
                               current import selections.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                           Network Explorer 321
      NEW ELEMENT VALUES DIALOG
                           This dialog opens when you click the New button from the
                           Network Explorer toolbar.
                           Two columns show the fields available for the new element
                           and the values for each field. To enter a value for a field,
                           click on the space opposite the name for the field, and then
                           select or enter a value.

Default Import Templates
                           You can select the following templates from the Automatic
                           Import Template field of the Preferences dialog (opened
                           by the main Tool menu, Preferences command):
                           Any template name ending in 'comma' is the equivalent of
                           the template without the comma, but will use commas as
                           the decimal delimiters.




322 Network Explorer                                      Actix A Solutions User Guide
                                              An example input file would look similar to this
                                              (depending on the technology being used):

Site         Site          Lat                    Long          Sector    AZIMUT   Antenna     EIRP
Name         ID                                                 ID                 3db Hor
02AER1       02AER         xx.xxxxx               a.aaaaaaaaa   02AER1    40       65          0 Not in use
02AER2       02AER         xx.xxxxx               a.aaaaaaaaa   02AER2    160      65          0 Not in use
02AER3       02AER         xx.xxxxx               a.aaaaaaaaa   02AER3    280      65          0 Not in use
02AGM0       02AGM         yy.yyyyyyyy            b.bbbbbbbbb   02AGM0             360         0 Not in use
02ALI1       02ALI         zz.zzzzzzzz            c.ccccccccc   02ALI1    70       65          0 Not in use
02ALI2       02ALI         zz.zzzzzzzz            c.ccccccccc   02ALI2    190      65          0 Not in use
…            …             …                      …             …         …        …           …


BCCH     MCC         MNC         LAC     CI           BSIC
69       206         1           102     12611
72       206         1           102     12612
66       206         1           102     12192
62       206         1           402     12339
80       206         1           402     12774
69       206         1           402     12775
…        …           …           …       …            …



                                              Once the data has been processed and saved as a cellrefs.txt
                                              file, the format now looks like this:

; #NetworkData – datafile
…                …               …            …                     …              …     …         …   …      …
GSM_Site         91ZEL0          91ZEL        j.jjjjjjjjjjjjj       r.rrrrrrrrr
GSM_Site         91ZOC3          91ZOC        k.kkkkkkkkkkkkk       s.sssssssss
GSM_Site         91ZOT0          91ZOT        l.lllllllllllll       t.ttttttttt
GSM_Site         91ZUL3          91ZUL        m.mmmmmmmmmmmmm       u.uuuuuuuuu
GSM_Cell         02AER           02AER1       40                    65             69    206       1   102    12611
GSM_Cell         02AER           02AER2       160                   65             72    206       1   102    12612
GSM_Cell         02AER           02AER3       280                   65             66    206       1   102    12192
GSM_Cell         02AGM           02AGM0       0                     360            62    206       1   402    12339
GSM_Cell         02ALI           02ALI1       70                    65             80    206       1   402    12774
…                …               …            …                     …              …     …         …   …      …




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                                             Network Explorer 323
      CDMA TEMPLATE

Delimiter:             TAB

Header Lines:          1

ArraySeparator:        ;

Coordinate             (-)DDD.dddddd
Format:

Coordinate             World Geodetic System 1984 (GPS)
System:

Column                 Data Field       Format Group        Range

1                      Site_Name        string

2                      SiteID/ECP ID    string

3                      Latitude         Degrees             -360 to 360

4                      Longitude        Degrees             -360 to 360

5                      Sector_ID        string

6                      Azimuth          Degrees             -360 to 360

7                      Beamwidth        Beamwidth Angle     0 to 360

8                      EIRP             integer

9                      PN               CDMA PN             0 to 511

10                     MCC              GSM MCC             0 to 999

11                     SID              integer

12                     NID              integer

13                     BID              integer




324 Network Explorer                                 Actix A Solutions User Guide
       GSM TEMPLATE

Delimiter:             TAB

Header Lines:          1

ArraySeparator:        ;

Coordinate             (-)DDD.dddddd
Format:

Coordinate             World Geodetic System 1984 (GPS)
System:

Column                 Data Field       Format Group       Range

1                      Site Name        string

2                      SiteID           string

3                      Latitude         Degrees            -360 to 360

4                      Longitude        Degrees            -360 to 360

5                      Sector_ID        string

6                      Azimuth          Degrees            -360 to 360

7                      Beamwidth        Beamwidth Angle    0 to 360

8                      EIRP             integer

9                      BCCH             GSM ARFCN          0 to 885

10                     MCC              GSM MCC            0 to 999

11                     MNC              GSM MNC            0 to 99

12                     LAC              GSM LAC            0 to 65535

13                     CI               GSM CI             0 to 65535

14                     BSIC             GSM BSIC           0 to 77




Actix A Solutions User Guide                              Network Explorer 325
      IDEN TEMPLATE

Delimiter:             TAB
Header Lines:          1
ArraySeparator:        ;
Coordinate             (-)DDD.dddddd
Format:
Coordinate             World Geodetic System 1984 (GPS)
System:
Column                 Data Field        Format Group           Range
1                      Site Name         string
2                      SiteID            string
3                      City_Code         integer
4                      Latitude          Degrees                -360 to 360
5                      Longitude         Degrees                -360 to 360
6                      Sector_ID         string
7                      Azimuth           Degrees                -360 to 360
8                      Beamwidth         Beamwidth Angle        0 to 360
9                      CCCH              GSM ARFCN              0 to 885
10                     Color_Codes       array:integer
11                     MCC               GSM MCC                0 to 999
12                     NDC               integer
13                     LAC               GSM LAC                0 to 65535
14                     CI                GSM CI                 0 to 65535
15                     TCH_List          array:integer
16                     DLAI              integer
17                     Face_Display      integer
18                     Azimuth_Display   Degrees                -360 to 360
19                     Phase_Display     integer



326 Network Explorer                                     Actix A Solutions User Guide
       IS-54 / IS-136 TEMPLATE

Delimiter:              TAB
Header Lines:           1
ArraySeparator:         ;
Coordinate              (-)DDD.dddddd
Format:
Coordinate              World Geodetic System 1984 (GPS)
System:
Column                  Data Field         Format Group       Range
1                       Site Name          string
2                       SiteID             string
3                       Latitude           Degrees            -360 to 360
4                       Longitude          Degrees            -360 to 360
5                       Sector_ID          string
6                       Azimuth            Degrees            -360 to 360
7                       Beamwidth          Beamwidth Angle    0 to 360
8                       EIRP               integer
9                       DCCH               IS136 channel      0 to 2000
10                      MCC                GSM MCC            0 to 999
11                      SID                integer
12                      Band               string
13                      Network_Type       string
14                      DVCC               IS136 DVCC         1 to 255
15                      ACCH               IS136 channel      0 to 2000
16                      DCC                integer
17                      Traffic_Channels   array:integer
18                      Color_Codes        array:integer
19                      Face_Display       integer
20                      Azimuth_Display    Degrees            -360 to 360
21                      Phase_Display      integer




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                 Network Explorer 327
      WCDMA TEMPLATE

Delimiter:             TAB
Header Lines:          1
ArraySeparator:        ;
Coordinate             (-)DDD.dddddd
Format:
Coordinate             World Geodetic System 1984 (GPS)
System:
Column                 Data Field       Format Group        Range
1                      Site_Name        string
2                      SiteID           string
3                      Latitude         Degrees             -360 to 360
4                      Longitude        Degrees             -360 to 360
5                      Sector_ID        string
6                      Azimuth          Degrees             -360 to 360
7                      Beamwidth        Beamwidth Angle     0 to 360
8                      EIRP             integer
9                      SC               WCDMA SC            0 to 511
10                     MCC              GSM MCC             0 to 999
11                     MNC              GSM MNC             0 to 99
12                     LAC              GSM LAC             0 to 65535
13                     CI               GSM CI              0 to 65535
14                     BSIC             GSM BSIC            0 to 77




328 Network Explorer                                 Actix A Solutions User Guide
Custom Attributes
About custom attributes
                               A custom attribute is an attribute defined by a script file.
                               The script file needs to be 'run' like an executable program
                               to process the data and to be displayed in the Workspace
                               Explorer, under the heading 'Common'. Once a custom
                               attribute has been added in the Workspace Explorer, you
                               can display this attribute in, for example, Maps, Charts and
                               Tables, in the normal manner.

Install custom attributes
                               Any custom attribute definition files (*.caf files) placed in
                               its Custom Attributes directory are automatically
                               recognized. The default location for this directory is:

                               C:\Program Files\Actix\Analyzer\Bin\Custom
                               Attributes\


Use custom attributes
                                  1   Select Tools | Custom Attribute Manager.
                                      The Custom Attribute Manager dialog opens,
                                      showing all available custom attribute scripts from
                                      all installed custom attribute definition files.
                                  2   From the dialog, select the appropriate custom
                                      attribute script.
                                  3   Click Run.
                                      You will be notified when the custom attribute
                                      script has completed.
                                  4   Click Close to continue.
                                      The custom attribute is now added under the
                                      heading 'Common' in the Workspace Explorer. You
                                      can display this attribute in, for example, Maps,
                                      Charts and Tables in the normal manner.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                         Custom Attributes 329
Create custom attributes
                           A custom attribute is defined in a text file and given a .caf
                           extension. You can use any text editor to create a custom
                           attribute like the example shown here:




                           The custom attribute definition should adhere to the file
                           format defined below. There are two main sections, defined
                           within the CustomAttribute and CDATA tags:
                           <CustomAttribute
                                  ...
                           >
                           <![CDATA[

                                  script defining the custom attribute analysis

                           ]]>

      THE CUSTOM ATTRIBUTE TAG
                           Each custom attribute consists of a root node called
                           CustomAttribute. This element contains a number of
                           attributes, some mandatory and others optional (in italics).
                           The CustomAttribute tag format looks like this:

<CustomAttribute Name="name" Icon="icon ref" BinOp="binop number" >


                           For example:

                           <CustomAttribute
                                  Name="MyEcIo_1stBest"
                                  Icon="1950"
                                  BinOp="0"
                           >




330 Custom Attributes                                      Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               The attributes are described below:
Attribute      Mandatory Description                    Acceptable Values
Name           Yes             Name of the custom       Name must begin with a letter.
                               attribute being          Should not contain illegal
                               defined.                 characters or spaces.
Icon           Yes             Numeric value that       Any icon id that can be found in
                               denotes the icon ID to   AtxRes.dll. 1950 is commonly
                               be used when             used. This represents the time
                               representing the         series icon. See the Reference
                               custom attribute in a    section at the end of this
                               user interface. The      document.
                               icon must be held in
                               the AtxRes.dll.
Language       No              Name of language         VBScript, Jscript.
                               used to define the       Default: VBScript
                               custom attribute.
BinOp          Yes             Binning operation        0 = Returns the average value.
                               used for the custom      1 = Returns the most frequent
                               attribute.               value.
                                                        2 = Converts log values to linear
                                                        values, averages the result, then
                                                        converts this average linear value
                                                        back to a log value.
                                                        3 = Returns the highest value.
                                                        4 = Returns the number of values.
                                                        6 = As 1 but retains the last value.
                                                        Used for attributes where values
                                                        are reported infrequently.
                                                        7 = As 2, but used for RxQual
                                                        values ranging from 0-7.
                                                        Assign the custom attribute* a
                                                        value of 4 to make it an event, as
                                                        well as associating it with an event
                                                        format group.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                         Custom Attributes 331
Attribute     Mandatory Description               Acceptable Values
FormatGroup No           Name of format           The name of any valid existing
                         group to be associated   format group, as given in any xml
                         with the custom          file in the bin\FormatGroups
                         attribute.               folder, for example "Percentage"
                                                  in the file fgStandard.xml.
                                                  Assigning an unrecognized format
                                                  group will simply cause the
                                                  custom attribute to use the 'void'
                                                  format group.
                                                  Default: Void Format group
DataType      No         Data type of the         Boolean, Short, Long, Double,
                         custom attribute         String, Byte.
                                                  Default: Double.
IsArrayType   No         Flag indicating          1/T/Y means custom attribute is an
                         whether the custom       array type.
                         attribute generates an   Default: custom attribute is a non-
                         array attribute.         array type.
                         *Assigning any invalid value to any of the optional
                         attributes will cause them to use their defaults.


      THE CDATA TAG
                         The custom attribute element contains a single child node
                         of type CData_Section. This node type is where the actual
                         custom attribute script is stored.

                                <![CDATA[

                                script defining the custom attribute analysis

                                ]]>


                         Currently the custom attribute script can only be written in
                         VBScript and JScript. The custom attribute subsystem in
                         V4 requires that all custom attributes define a subroutine
                         called Main that acts as the entry point into the script (the
                         custom attribute subsystem is expecting to make a call to
                         this function).
                         The Main entry point takes two arguments. The first is an
                         IDispatch pointer to the stream on which the custom
                         attribute is to be executed. This allows you to both set and
                         get information from the underlying data store. The second


332 Custom Attributes                                    Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               argument is a string variable that contains the name of the
                               custom attribute itself.
                               The entry point for a custom attribute is defined as follows:
                               Sub Main(dataStream, attrName)                [VBScript]
                               Function Main(dataStream, attrName)           [JScript]
                               Given that both scripting languages are loosely typed, we
                               are not required to declare the data types of each of the
                               variables.


       EXAMPLE CUSTOM ATTRIBUTES

               Four_sec_bad_qual.caf
<CustomAttribute Name="Four_sec_bad_qual" Icon="1950" BinOp="2">
<![CDATA[Sub Main(stream, newAttrib)
 ' shows multiple coverage areas
        ProgressBar.InitProgressBar "Running Custom Attribute:# 4 sec of RxQual>=5", 0,
100
        Count=stream.Count-1
        i = 0
' Start message counting
        Consecutive=0
        for each msg in stream
                servRxLev = msg("ServRxLevFull").Value
                servRxQual = msg("ServRxQualFull").Value

                if Not IsNUll(servRxLev) then ' if valid value
                        if servRxQual>=5 then
                                Consecutive=Consecutive+1
                        Else
                        Consecutive=0
                        end if
' === 8 consecutive measurement report = 8 x 0.48 sec ~ 4 sec ===
' ======= Reset ConsecutiveCount to 0 when RxQual>5 =======
                        if Consecutive=8 then
                                if Not IsNull(servRxLev) then
                                        msg(newAttrib).Value = 1
                                        Consecutive=0
                                end if
                        end if
' === Show 1 if there is 4 secs qual >=5, message is equivalent to 0.48sec ====
                end if
        ProgressBar.SetProgressBar (i/Count)*100
        i = i + 1
        Next
        ProgressBar.TerminateProgressBar
End Sub]]>
</CustomAttribute>




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                        Custom Attributes 333
                Aglnt_CW_RSSI.caf
                            This custom attribute extracts RSSI from Agilent CW
                            scanner files and uses an input box to prompt for the
                            desired frequency.
<CustomAttribute
        Name="Aglnt_CW_RSSI"
        Icon="1950"
        BinOp="0"
><![CDATA[

Sub Main(stream, newAttrib)

       FreqInput= InputBox("Enter Frequency in MHz", "Frequency Window")
       FreqInput = replace(FreqInput,",","")
       FreqInput = replace(FreqInput, ".","")

       Count= stream.Count-1

       for i=0 to Count

                if stream(i).Item("Msg_Class_Code").Value= 182 then

                Dim MessageText

                Set Message = stream(i)

                MessageText = Message.MessageText(4)

                FreqPos = 1
                Found = False

                while (instr(FreqPos,MessageText,"frequency:") > 0) and (not Found)
                        FreqPos = instr(FreqPos,MessageText,"frequency:")+10

                                  epos= Instr(FreqPos,MessageText,"e")
                                  freqstr= Mid(MessageText,FreqPos, epos-(FreqPos))
                                  freqstr=replace(freqstr,",","")
                                  freqstr=replace(freqstr,".","")

                         if instr(1,freqstr,FreqInput) then

                                  Found = True

                                  AmpPos= instr(FreqPos,MessageText,"Amplitude:")
                                  if AmpPos > 0 then
                                          RSSIPos= Instr(FreqPos,MessageText,"Amplitude:")

                                           decimalpos= Instr(RSSIPos,MessageText,".")
                                           spacepos= Instr(RSSIPos,MessageText,"(")-1

                                           if decimalpos < spacepos then
                                                   RSSIstr= Mid(MessageText,RSSIPos+10,
decimalpos-(RSSIPos+10))
                                           Else
                                                    RSSIstr= Mid(MessageText,RSSIPos+10,
spacepos-(RSSIPos+10))
                                           end if

                                           RSSI=cInt(RSSIstr)

                                           Message.Item("Aglnt_CW_RSSI").Value = RSSI
                                  end if

                         end if
                wend

       end if



334 Custom Attributes                                               Actix A Solutions User Guide
          next
End sub

]]>
</CustomAttribute>


                 iDEN_Handover.caf
                             This custom attribute is very simple, and just flags a
                             handover event in iDEN.
<CustomAttribute
       Name="iDEN_Handover"
       Icon="1950"
       BinOp="0"
>

<![CDATA[

Sub Main(stream, newAttrib)
       for i=0 to stream.Count-1
              Dim MessageText

                 Set Message = stream(i)

                 MessageText = Message.MessageText(2)

                 if instr(1,MessageText, "Handover Success") > 0 then
                        Message.Item("IDEN_Handover").Value = 1
                 end if
       next
End sub

]]>

</CustomAttribute>




Actix A Solutions User Guide                                       Custom Attributes 335
Appendix A – File formats supported
                            This chart was updated on 19 May 2003. Check the Actix
                            website or your Actix representative for more up-to-date
                            information.




336 Appendix A – File formats supported                   Actix A Solutions User Guide
Actix A Solutions User Guide   Appendix A – File formats supported 337
338 Appendix A – File formats supported   Actix A Solutions User Guide
Appendix B – Creating StateForms
       CREATE A NEW STATEFORM
                                1   From the Tools menu, select Display StateForms
                                    to open a StateForm window.
                                2   Right-click on the StateForm window to display the
                                    StateForm menu.
                                3   From the menu, select Design Mode to switch on
                                    StateForm editing.
                                    The StateForm window will look similar to this:




Actix A Solutions User Guide                    Appendix B – Creating StateForms 339
                                   Along the top of the window are buttons for
                                   Deleting, Cutting, Copying and Pasting objects, and
                                   Toggling Design Mode:


                                   Next to these are buttons for Selecting objects, and
                                   for creating text Labels, Attribute Value, Array
                                   Attribute Value, Time Chart (see Creating Time
                                   Charts on page 342) and Scan Chart (see Creating
                                   Scan Charts on page 355) objects plus a Group Box
                                   for visually dividing up the StateForm:

                                   The last set of buttons allows you to create a New
                                   Sheet or File, Open and Save Files, and open the
                                   Sheet Manager (see page 341) for controlling all the
                                   sheets you create:


                                   The Design Mode area that represents the final
                                   StateForm is indicated by a background of dots.
                                   On the right of the window, display characteristics
                                   are shown for a selected object (in this example, an
                                   Attribute Bar in the upper right of the StateForm
                                   has been selected).

                            To create a new form
                                  1 Right-click on the StateForm window again to
                                       display the StateForm menu.
                                  2 Select New File to create a new form.
      You can also Open an existing file or Save the current file.

                           To create a new object on the form
                              1 Click (on either) Text, Attribute Value, Array
                                 Attribute Value, Time Chart or Scan Chart.
                              2 In the Design Mode area, click and drag to create a
                                 new object.
                                 This object will now appear highlighted, with its
                                 characteristics shown in the panel on the right.
                              3 Click in the empty field under 'Attribute' and type in
                                 a data attribute name or select one from the attribute
                                 picker.
                              4 Change any other characteristics for the object as
                                 required.




340 Appendix B – Creating StateForms                       Actix A Solutions User Guide
                              To create a new sheet for the file
       A form can have more than one sheet, to correspond to different modes of analysis.
                                  1 Right-click on the StateForm window and select
                                      New Sheet.
                                  2 Design this sheet in the normal way.
                                  3 Save the form.

                               To select a different sheet from a form
                                  1 Right-click on the StateForm window and select
                                      Sheet Selector.
                                      This displays a drop-down list of all available sheets
                                      in the current form.
                                  2 Select the required sheet.

       USING THE SHEET MANAGER
                               When in a StateForm with the Sheet Selector and related
                               buttons visible, you can open the Sheet Manager dialog by
                               clicking the last button on the right:


                               The Sheet Manager dialog is shown below:




                               A StateForm can have one or more sheets, which can be
                               opened using the Sheet Selector control. The Sheet
                               Manager allows you to copy and move sheets to and from
                               new and existing StateForms. The Manager shows two
                               panes, the one on the left for the current StateForm and the
                               other pane as a working area which can be saved in its own
                               right as a new StateForm. The buttons in the middle copy a
                               selected sheet from its current pane to the other side.


Actix A Solutions User Guide                       Appendix B – Creating StateForms 341
                             Delete – Removes a selected sheet from its pane.
                             Rename – Allows you to rename the selected sheet.
                             Open – Displays the sheets of a selected StateForm file in
                             the right pane. The name of the StateForm is displayed
                             above the pane.
                             Save – Saves the StateForm in the right pane.
                             Save As – Saves the sheets in the right pane as a new
                             StateForm file. The name of the StateForm is displayed
                             above the pane.
                             New File – Deletes all existing sheets from the right pane,
                             ready to create a new StateForm.
                             Cancel – Closes the window. Any changes to the left pane
                             are ignored.
                             Done – Closes the window. Any changes to the left pane
                             are now part of the current StateForm.

      CREATING TIME CHARTS
                             When in the StateForm Design Mode window, you can
                             click on the Time Chart button to create a time chart
                             object.
                             Then draw the chart where you want it, and set the size by
                             dragging or by using the property panel shown below.




342 Appendix B – Creating StateForms                        Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               Next, double-click Chart on the property panel or click the
                               […] button to open the Time Chart Properties dialog:




                               The chart properties allow every configurable aspect of the
                               chart to be set (this information is persisted in the XML
                               StateForms file along with all other StateForms
                               information). The key aspects of the configuration are:

                               Chart Layout

                               Percent pre/post sync point
                               This is the percentage of the chart time line that will remain
                               visible when a sync occurs. For instance, if a chart shows
                               the left-most visible point at time 10:00:00 and the right-
                               most visible point at 10:10:00 and “Percent pre/post sync
                               point” is set to 10%, then a sync at time 10:00:30 will cause
                               the chart to be re-drawn, probably with the new sync-point
                               in the middle of the chart. Although if this point is close to
                               the start or end of the time range for the steam, the sync-
                               point will be repositioned to avoid displaying a lot of blank
                               space.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                        Appendix B – Creating StateForms 343
                           Time range (ms) (0 = all)
                           This value sets the time range for the displayed X-axis in
                           milliseconds. For instance, if this value is set to 600000 (10
                           minutes), then a 10-minute window of data will be
                           displayed in the chart. Setting this value to small numbers
                           can result in many points on the chart corresponding to the
                           same message number (when messages occur less
                           frequently than the time interval between consecutive
                           points on the chart).
                           A special case is when this value is set to 0. Here the chart
                           view shows the entire range of time in the stream. For
                           instance, if a stream covers a 32.5 minute range and the
                           'Time range (ms) (0 = all)' value is set to 0, and then the
                           entire 32.5 minute range of the stream is shown within the
                           chart view.

                           Pixels increment
                           This value sets how many horizontal pixels on the
                           computer display are actually used for the chart display.
                           The reason for controlling this is to avoid over-writing
                           chart data with other data and also to make the chart
                           display faster by avoiding duplicating information. In
                           general, point series will be drawn with a thickness of 2 or
                           more pixels (points of 1 pixel width are quite difficult to
                           see), hence, it makes sense not to draw a point at every
                           pixel if each point is more than one pixel wide.
                           For example: say the “Pixels increment” is set to 2 and
                           there are 600 pixels horizontally across the chart series
                           display area. Only every other pixel will be equated to a
                           data point in the stream (300 pixels used to represent data
                           points). If the time-range for the chart is set to 600000 (10
                           minutes) then each used pixel corresponds to a time-range
                           of 2000ms (2 seconds).

                           Background

                           General
                           The general background of the chart is the area on which
                           the series and the legends are drawn.

                           When no new data
                           The 'no new data' situation occurs when a time point on the
                           X axis is at the same message number in the stream as the
                           previous point. This setting allows the background color to
                           be changed in these circumstances so that the user can see



344 Appendix B – Creating StateForms                        Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               that data is being repeated. This can happen for a number of
                               reasons:
                                       •   The 'Time range (ms)' value is set to a small
                                           number (for a given a number of chart pixels)
                                           such that there is often a situation where there
                                           are no new messages within the short time
                                           period between X axis points. For example, if at
                                           a certain point in a file messages occur every
                                           500ms or so, the 'Time range (ms)' is set to
                                           10000 (10 seconds) and the number of used
                                           pixels is 200, then each X pixel corresponds to
                                           around 50ms and, hence, 10 X pixels represent 1
                                           message.
                                       •   A pause or other kind of inactivity has occurred
                                           in the logging equipment and there are no new
                                           values for a period of time.

                               Before/after data
                               This controls the color and cross-hatching of the
                               background when the chart displays X points at a time
                               before (or after) the earliest (or latest) valid data point time
                               in the stream.

                               X Axis
                               This is the color of the background where the X Axis is
                               drawn (if present) – that is, below the main series.

                               Y Axis + Legend
                               The color of the background of the Y axis and legend area
                               (if present) to the right of the main series.

                               Fonts
                               This controls the fonts used to display the legend text,
                               event text and X axis. The font name, height and (in some
                               cases) text color is controlled from these settings.

                               X-Axis and X Slider

                               Axis area height (0 = no X axis)
                               This controls the height (in pixels) of the area used to
                               display the X axis (set this value to 0 if no X axis is
                               required). The X axis is generally used to display the time
                               at the left and right edges of the series traces.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                         Appendix B – Creating StateForms 345
                           Slider height (0 = no slider)
                           The slider allows the series display to be “panned” left and
                           right using a scroll-bar. This setting controls the height of
                           the slider bar as well as the height of the “X scale picker”
                           which is a drop-down list of available time-ranges for the X
                           axis. Selecting 0 for the slider height removes the slider and
                           X scale pickers.

                           Marker Expr
                           This is an expression in the standard Actix expression
                           syntax (see page 359) which is used to define the values
                           displayed at the minimum (left) and maximum (right)
                           points of the X Axis. Generally, this will be a time related
                           value such as the formatted value of the time at this point.
                           Note that the expression Time will return the relative time
                           from the start of the stream (in ms). The actual time can be
                           found by adding this to the absolute time at the start of the
                           stream.

                           Series
                           This is a list of the series displayed in the chart. Click the
                           Add button to add a new series. Select a series by clicking
                           it. Use the Edit button to edit a series. Press Delete to delete
                           the series. Add and Edit result in the Series Properties
                           dialog (see page 348) being displayed.




                           Line Settings
                           This area controls the Width, Color and Style for various
                           lines drawn in the chart:

                           Sync-line
                           This is the vertical line indicating the current sync-point.

                           Axis-line
                           This is the line used to form the (optional) Y Axis.


346 Appendix B – Creating StateForms                        Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               Grid-line
                               The lines drawn (optionally) to show various Y Axis levels
                               as a horizontal grid across the chart.

                               Legend + Axis
                               These settings control the layout of the Y Axis and Legend
                               area.

                               Left margin
                               The space between the right of the series display area and
                               the legend/y-axis display area (in pixels).

                               Axis width
                               The width reserved for drawing a (vertical) Y axis (in
                               pixels).

                               Legend width
                               The width (in pixels) of the area reserved for drawing the
                               legend text (note that each series can modify this value –
                               often this is needed when horizontal legend text is mixed
                               with vertical as these obviously have different widths).

                               Global Expressions
                               These expressions can be used in Tool-tips (see the Tool-
                               tip details under the Series Properties). To Add/Delete/Edit,
                               use the buttons to the side. These expressions use the
                               standard Actix expression syntax which is described in
                               Actix expression syntax & examples (see page 359).




                               Clicking on the Edit button opens the Global Expression
                               dialog:




Actix A Solutions User Guide                       Appendix B – Creating StateForms 347
                           Editing Series Properties
                           Clicking on the Edit button within a StateForm's Time
                           Chart Properties dialog opens the Series Properties dialog:




                           Series Type
                           Various series types are available, described below. This
                           setting controls the availability of some of the other dialog
                           options.
                           Point – a single point for each data value.
                           Line – a line drawn between the previous (valid) data value
                           and the current data value. Gaps appear when the previous
                           point is invalid. If the previous point is invalid and the next
                           point is also invalid, a single point is drawn.
                           Bar – a vertical bar from the base of the series Y axis up to
                           the data value. Data values equal to the minimum value on
                           the Y axis appear as a single point.




348 Appendix B – Creating StateForms                        Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               Rail – this is like a Bar but the height is fixed (not
                               dependent on value). It is useful for displaying state
                               changes, and so on.
                               Event – includes an icon, vertical line through event, event
                               text and event number (counting from the first event of this
                               type in the stream) which can all (optionally) be displayed.

                               Data-Tip Expression
                               This controls the text displayed when the user moves the
                               mouse over a data value in the series (including event
                               icons, and so on).
                               The expression can include Global Expressions by putting
                               %% around the Global Expression name. For example, if a
                               Global Expression is called LevAndQual then it can be
                               included in a Data-Tip by putting %%LevAndQual%% in
                               the expression. The effect of this is exactly as though the
                               text of the specified Global Expression had been copied
                               into this expression in place of the %%globexprname%%.

                               Value Expression

                               Expression
                               The Value Expression is used (if not blank) to define the
                               value of each point in the series. For instance, to display the
                               most recent value of the attribute ServRxLevFull minus the
                               most recent value of the attribute ServRxLevSub, use the
                               expression:
                               state(ServRxLevFull) – state(ServRxLevSub)

                               Format Group
                               Format groups are used to control formatting of values,
                               specify value ranges, and so on. If a Value Expression is
                               used (the Value Expression box is not blank), then the
                               selection in this drop-down list sets the Format Group used
                               to format values of the Value Expression, and so on.

                               Format Mode
                               When a value is formatted using a Format Group, various
                               settings (for example, the presence of units text on the end
                               of the formatted value) can be controlled using this drop-
                               down list.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                        Appendix B – Creating StateForms 349
                           Attribute

                           Attribute
                           If a Value Expression is not used, the setting made using
                           this Actix attribute picker controls the data attribute to be
                           displayed on the chart series.

                           Array Idx
                           This is the Array Index, which is used for array attributes.

                           Hold Attribute Value
                           This is used to fix the attribute value – that is, the most
                           recent previous value of the attribute is used (if valid). This
                           is equivalent to using the state() function in an expression.

                           Data Point and Line Settings

                           Validity Expression
                           The Validity Expression can be used to remove values from
                           the display of a series. This can be used to stop invalid data
                           being displayed. If no Validity Expression is specified, all
                           points that have valid values are displayed.
                           An example of where this is beneficial is for a
                           measurement value such as ServRxLevFull when the
                           measurement has no meaning (such as when the phone is in
                           Idle Mode).
                           To do this, set the 'Validity Expression' to
                           'state(HandsetMode) < 2'.
                           In some cases, the value will have been invalidated when
                           Idle Mode was entered, so the use of a Validity Expression
                           would be unnecessary.

                           Data Point Width, Color and Style
                           These settings control the thickness, color and style (solid,
                           dash, dot, and so on) of the line used to draw data points.
                           For Point styles, only the color and thickness settings are
                           used. In all cases, the color setting is overridden if the
                           'Color Range Expression' is used (see Color Range
                           Expression).

                           Event Line Width, Color and Style
                           These settings control the thickness, color and style (solid,
                           dash, dot, and so on) of the vertical line drawn (optionally)
                           through each event in an Event series.




350 Appendix B – Creating StateForms                        Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               Event Line
                               This check-box controls whether an Event Line (vertical
                               line drawn through each event) is displayed.

                               Across Whole Chart
                               This check-box controls whether the Event Line (see
                               above) is drawn across the entire chart (or just across the
                               Event series).

                               Event Icon and Text

                               Event icon name
                               This setting controls the icon displayed for an event. This
                               can be any icon resource in a DLL file. The syntax for
                               specifying the DLL file and icon identifier is as follows:
                               DLLFileName, iconID
                               If the DLLFileName is blank the standard Actix DLL
                               AtxRes.dll is assumed (this contains most of the icons used
                               in Actix A Solutions. If a path to the DLL is not specified
                               as part of the name, the DLL is assumed to be in the same
                               directory as the main application executable. Some
                               example icon identifiers are listed in the Example Icon
                               Identifiers section.

                               Event Icon Y Offset
                               This is the offset (in pixels) to draw the icon above the base
                               of the Y axis for this series.

                               Event Text
                               This is the event text to display with icon.

                               Extra Text Y Offset
                               This is an offset which can be applied to the Event Text to
                               move it relative to the Y axis for this series.

                               Number
                               This displays the Event number (of the specified event) in
                               the stream. For instance, the first Handover OK in a stream
                               will have number 1, the second 2, and so on.

                               Color Ranges

                               Color using expr
                               This expression (if not blank) is used as the basis of the
                               coloring for each data point. This is only used if the 'Color
                               range expr' is also specified. In this case, the color of each
                               data point is defined by evaluating the 'Color using expr'


Actix A Solutions User Guide                        Appendix B – Creating StateForms 351
                           and then applying the coloring defined by the 'Color range
                           expr' (see below).

                           Color range expr
                           This is a color range expression as used in other parts of the
                           StateForms. If it is blank, the color for each data point is
                           derived from the fixed color specified in the Data Point and
                           Line Settings box (see above).
                           The syntax takes the form:
                           H1, V1, H2, V2; ...
                           Where:
                           H1 is the high end of the first (lowest value) range
                           (inclusive - this value is included in the range)
                           V1 is the value of the expression if the attribute value is in
                           the first range (equal to or less than H1)
                           H2 is the high end of the second (next lowest values) range
                           V2 is the value of the expression if the attribute value is in
                           the second range
                           ... and so on.
                           Hx can be * which means a very high value (the rest of the
                           number space about the last range)
                           Vx can be: RGB(r,g,b) where r is a Red component value, g
                           is Green, b is Blue (range 0..255 for each)
                           Example (value of Color Legend property):
                           -90, RGB(255,0,0), -80, RGB(0,255,0), -70, RGB(0,0,255),
                           *, RGB(0,0,0)
                           This displays:
                           red for values <= -90
                           green for values > -90 and <= -80
                           blue for values > -80 and <= -70
                           black for values > -70

                           Min / Max Values
                           If the 'Use specified Min and Max' check box is checked
                           then the Min and Max values for the series (used to define
                           the Y scaling and in the Axis and Min/Max value display)
                           will be those defined in the Min and Max edit boxes. If not
                           checked the values for Min and Max are defined by the




352 Appendix B – Creating StateForms                        Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               Format Group (unless no format group is available in
                               which case the Min and Max box values are indeed used).

                               Series Positioning

                               Y Height
                               This defines the height (in pixels or percent – see below) of
                               the Y axis used for this series.

                               Y Height is Percent
                               Checking this box controls whether the Y Height value is a
                               percentage of the overall chart series display area, or (if not
                               checked) is in pixels. The use of a percentage allows you to
                               define scaleable chart displays. For instance, a chart can be
                               defined in which one band shows a line chart and one
                               shows a bar chart. These can be defined to have percentage
                               based heights (and offsets) and hence to scale up or down
                               based on the overall chart height.

                               Y Offset
                               This defines the position (in pixels or percent) of the base
                               (bottom) of the Y axis for this series within the overall
                               chart series display area.

                               Y Offset is Percent
                               This controls whether the Y Offset value is in pixels (if not
                               checked) or is a percentage (if checked) of the overall chart
                               series display area.

                               Y Height is Max
                               If checked this box overrides the other Y Height settings
                               and sets the Y Height to the whole of the chart series
                               display area above the Y Offset. So, for instance, if this is
                               checked and the Y Offset is 0 then this series occupies the
                               entire chart series display area.

                               Legend and Y Axis

                               Show Legend
                               This check box controls whether you want to show the
                               legend text for this series. Check the box to allocate an
                               amount of space defined by the 'Legend width' property (in
                               the main Chart Properties) + the 'Extra legend width' (see
                               below) in the Y Axis display area for the legend for this
                               series. This ensures that legends and Y axes are not drawn
                               on top of each-other (unless you want them to be – which
                               can be achieved by setting the Extra legend width to
                               negative numbers, and so on!).


Actix A Solutions User Guide                        Appendix B – Creating StateForms 353
                           Horizontal Legend
                           Check this box to show the legend text for this series
                           horizontally rather than vertically. Generally, you need to
                           use the 'Extra legend width' with this setting to get a wide
                           enough space for the legend text to be displayed.

                           Show Min/Max
                           Check this box to show Min and Max values next to the Y
                           Axis.

                           Show Y Axis
                           Check this box to display the Y Axis.

                           Legend Text
                           This is the text used for the legend. If blank, the Value
                           Expression (if not blank) or Attribute Name (if Value
                           Expression is blank) is used.

                           Legend Text Color
                           Color of the legend text.

                           Grid Lines
                           This determines if grid lines are displayed horizontally
                           across the chart area.

                           Extra legend width
                           Sets the number of pixels of extra space allocated to the
                           legend – this is mainly useful for horizontal legends (see
                           explanation above).




354 Appendix B – Creating StateForms                       Actix A Solutions User Guide
       CREATING SCAN CHARTS

                               About Scan Charts
                               Scan Charts show bar charts of data held in Array
                               Attributes. This can be used to produce displays like a
                               spectrum analyzer of scanner data or a chart of Nth best
                               neighbors.




                               To create a Scan Chart
                                  1 When in the StateForm Design Mode window, you
                                      can click on the Scan Chart button to create a
                                      scan chart object.
                                  2 Then draw the chart where you want it, and set the
                                      size by dragging or by using the property panel
                                      shown below.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                       Appendix B – Creating StateForms 355
                              3   Next, double-click Chart on the property panel or
                                  click the […] button to open the Bar Chart
                                  Properties dialog:




                                  The chart properties allow every configurable
                                  aspect of the chart to be set (this information is
                                  persisted in the XML StateForms file along with all
                                  other StateForms information).

                           Background

                           General
                           The background color of the chartspace.

                           X axis
                           The background color of the area below the X axis.

                           Y axis
                           The background color of the area to the right of the Y axis.




356 Appendix B – Creating StateForms                       Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               Attributes

                               X Num Bars
                               This is the number of bars in the chart but it can be
                               overridden by the 'Number of Bars to Display' field in the
                               Layout and Legend Section.

                               X Values
                               This is an array of the values to be used on the X axis. So in
                               the GSM Neighbor example shown above the X value is
                               NborBCCH.

                               Y Values
                               This is an array of the Y value broken down by the X value.
                               In the GSM Neighbor example above the attribute
                               NborRxLev_by_arfcn is used as the Arfcn is equivalent in
                               this instance with the BCCH giving the RxLev of the
                               Neighbor cells broken down by BCCH.

                               Scan Msgs
                               This must be set to an attribute that is present in all
                               messages that the chart should look at. It is a bit like a
                               mandatory exclusive filter. So for Neighbor RxLev
                               measurements the NborBCCH might be a sensible attribute
                               to set.

                               Array Index for Scan Msgs

                               Font Name + Height (pixels) + Color

                               Bar Label
                               This is the font/color of the text expression that is put at the
                               top of each bar.

                               Legend
                               This is the font/color of the text expression that forms the
                               Y-axis Legend.

                               X Axis
                               This is the font/color of the text expression that is placed at
                               the bottom of each bar.

                               X Axis and Bar Labeling

                               Axis Area Height
                               This is the size of the space below the X axis.




Actix A Solutions User Guide                        Appendix B – Creating StateForms 357
                           Axis Label
                           This is the text expression that is displayed down the Y
                           axis.

                           Bar Label
                           This is the text expression shown at the top of each bar.

                           Axis label Horizontal
                           When enabled, the X axis labels are displayed horizontally
                           rather than vertically.

                           Bar Label Horizontal
                           When enabled, the bar labels are displayed horizontally
                           rather than vertically.

                           Line Settings

                           Bar Border
                           Line Border of the Bar settings.

                           Axis Line
                           Line settings of the Axis lines

                           Grid Line
                           Line settings of the Grid lines

                           Bar Color

                           Default

                           Color using Expression
                           This can be used to give an attribute expression, generating
                           a value on which a coloring rule can be used.

                           Expr format group
                           This defines the format group of that expression - allowing
                           the use of 'format by color group'.

                           Color Ranges
                           This can be used to define a color range expression that
                           defines the colors for different values.

                           Layout and Legend

                           Number of Bars to Display
                           This sets an absolute number of bars to appear. This
                           overrides the 'X Num Bars' setting.




358 Appendix B – Creating StateForms                         Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               Chart Left
                               The amount of space in pixels to the left of the chart.

                               Chart Right
                               The amount of space in pixels to the right of the chart.

                               Y Axis Left
                               The amount of space in pixels to the right of the Y axis.

                               Bar Space %
                               The amount of space in percentage of bar width between
                               bars.

                               Y axis Width
                               The width of the Y axis.

                               Legend Width
                               The width of the Legend in the Y axis

                               Legend Text
                               The Text expression that is displayed on the Y axis.

                               Legend On
                               Enable/Disable the Legend

                               Legend Horiz
                               When enabled, the Legend is displayed horizontally rather
                               than vertically.

                               Show Min/Max
                               When enabled, the maximum and minimum values are
                               shown on the Y axis.

                               Data Tip Expression
                               This is a text expression that will appear as a tool tip when
                               the mouse hovers over a bar.

       ACTIX EXPRESSION SYNTAX & EXAMPLES
                               Actix expressions are used in many places for generating
                               both numerical values and text outputs. Examples are as
                               follows:

                               Numerical value outputs
                               state(ServRxLevFull)
                               default(state(ServRxLevFull), -110)




Actix A Solutions User Guide                        Appendix B – Creating StateForms 359
                               Text outputs
                               “ServRxLevFull “ + state(ServRxLevFull) + “\r\n”
                               - note the \r\n creates a carriage return in a Tool-tip, etc.


      Note: to get an expression to format as a text string you need to include at least one text
      string and the “” string doesn’t count.




360 Appendix B – Creating StateForms                               Actix A Solutions User Guide
Appendix C – Expression Builder function
reference
Functions
       ABS
                               abs(expr)
                               Returns the absolute positive value of expr

       ABSTIME
                               abstime(round_to)
                               abstime() returns the absolute time of the current message
                               as a floating point number in the 1900 date system used by
                               Excel and Win32 automation.
                               round_to is an optional argument that rounds the result to a
                               given number of seconds. This argument allows the
                               returned value to be rounded to the nearest absolute time
                               boundary, for example, abstime(60) rounds to the nearest
                               minute, abstime(3600) rounds to the nearest hour, and
                               abstime (86400) rounds to the nearest day.

       ADD
                               add(expr1,expr2)
                               expr1+expr2
                               Returns the sum of expr1 and expr2

       AND
                               and(expr1,expr2)
                               (expr1)&&(expr2)
                               Returns 1 if expr1 and expr2 are not zero, otherwise returns
                               0

       ARRAY_COUNT
                               array_count(attribute[],operation,expr)
                               Returns the number of values in the attribute array for
                               which the condition is true
                               Example:
                                      array_count(NborRxLev[],>,-70)




Actix A Solutions User Guide      Appendix C – Expression Builder function reference 361
       ARRAY_FIND_INDEX
                            array_find_index(attribute[],operation,expr
                            )
                            Returns the lowest index in the array for which the
                            condition is true
                            Example:
                            array_find_index(NborRxLev[],>,-70)

       ARRAY_MAX
                            array_max(attribute[])
                            Returns the highest value in the attribute array

       ARRAY_MAX_INDEX
                            array_max(attribute[])
                            Returns the index that contains the highest value in the
                            attribute array

       ARRAY_MEAN
                            array_mean(attribute[])
                            Returns the mean value in the array

       ARRAY_MIN
                            array_min(attribute[])
                            Returns the lowest value in the attribute array

       ARRAY_MIN_INDEX
                            array_min(attribute[])
                            Returns the index that contains the lowest value in the
                            attribute array

       ARRAY_NTH_MAX
                            array_nth_max(attribute[],n)
                            Returns the ‘nth’ ranked value in the attribute array,
                            starting from the highest

       ARRAY_NTH_MIN
                            array_nth_min(attribute[],n)
                            Returns the ‘nth’ ranked value in the attribute array,
                            starting from the lowest

       ARRAY_STDEV
                            array_stdev(attribute[])
                            Returns the standard deviation of all values in the attribute
                            array


362 Appendix C – Expression Builder function reference      Actix A Solutions User Guide
       BIN
                               bin(datum,bin_size,value)
       Used internally
                               Returns the center value of the bin containing the specified
                               value. The bin is defined by datum and size.
                               For example,
                                        bin(3,5,x)
                               would return center values shown below:
                                Bin# Start      End      Center
                                -1      -2      3        0.5
                                0       3       8        5.5
                                1       8       13       10.5
                                2       13      18       15.5

       BIN_INDEX
                               bin_index(datum,bin_size,value)
       Used internally
                               As for bin (), except that the index of the bin is returned
                               instead of the center value.

       DEFAULT
                               default(expr1,expr2)
                               expr1 is the expression to evaluate
                               expr2 is the default expression (typically a constant such as
                               -999) when expr1 is invalid
                               Returns the value of expr1 if valid, otherwise the value of
                               expr2
                               This can be used to specify a default value when an
                               attribute has no value. For example, the expression:
                                        default(state(ServCI,-999))
                               will return the value -999 at messages where state(ServCI)
                               has no valid value (at the beginning of a file and after a
                               valid handover)

       DELTA
                               delta(expr1,expr2)
       Not available for Binned queries
                                Returns the result of expr1–state(expr2) - see state (see
                                state on page 369) for details


Actix A Solutions User Guide        Appendix C – Expression Builder function reference 363
       DIVIDE
                              divide(expr1,expr2)
                              Returns expr1 divided by expr2

       EQUALS
                              equals(expr1,expr2)
                              (expr1)==(expr2)
                              Returns 1 if expr1 equals expr2, otherwise returns 0
                              String literals should be enclosed in quotes (not mandatory
                              unless the literal begins with numeric character or contains
                              spaces), for example:
                                      ServingCellID=="CellABC"

       EVAL
                              eval(expr1,expr2,…exprn)
       Used internally
                              Returns: the value of expr1 – this is used to enable multiple
                              expressions to be evaluated, and evals can be nested to any
                              level. The arguments are evaluated in the order left to right.

       EVENT_BEFORE
                              event_before()
       Not available for Binned queries—only meaningful when used with windowed queries
                                Returns 1 if the current message is before the window
                                event, or else it returns 0

       EVENT_MESSAGE
                              event_message()
       Not available for Binned queries—only meaningful when used with windowed queries
                                Returns the message number of the current window event

       EVENT_TIME
                              event_time()
       Not available for Binned queries—only meaningful when used with windowed queries
                                Returns the time of the current window event

       GEOINVPROJECTLAT
                              geoinvprojectlat(east,north)
       Used internally
                              Returns the latitude of the inverse projected value of
                              east(x),north(y) using the context’s current geodetic
                              projection


364 Appendix C – Expression Builder function reference         Actix A Solutions User Guide
       GEOINVPROJECTLON
                               geoinvprojectlon(east,north)
       Used internally
                               Returns the longitude of the inverse projected value of
                               east(x),north(y) using the context’s current geodetic
                               projection

       GEOPROJECTX
                               geoprojectx(lat,long)
       Used internally
                               Returns the easting (x coordinate) of the projected value of
                               lat,long using the context’s current geodetic projection

       GEOPROJECTY
                               geoprojecty(lat,long)
       Used internally
                               Returns the northing (y coordinate) of the projected value
                               of lat,long using the context’s current geodetic projection

       GET
                               get(attribute[],array_index,message)
       Used internally
                               Returns the value at the array_index position of the
                               attribute array for the specified message number

       GREATER_THAN
                               greater_than(expr1,expr2)
                               (expr1)>(expr2)
                               Returns 1 if expr1 is greater than expr2, otherwise returns 0

       GREATER_THAN_OR_EQUAL
                               greater_than_or_equal(expr1,expr2)
                               (expr1)>=(expr2)
                               Returns 1 if expr1 is greater than or equal to expr2,
                               otherwise returns 0

       IF
                               if(expr1,expr2,expr3)
                               Returns expr2 if expr1 <> zero, and expr3 if expr1 = zero

       IS_NOT_EQUAL
                               is_not_equal(expr1,expr2)
                               (expr1)!=(expr2)



Actix A Solutions User Guide      Appendix C – Expression Builder function reference 365
                            Returns 1 if expr1 is not equal to expr2, otherwise returns 0
                            String literals should be enclosed in quotes (not mandatory
                            unless the literal begins with numeric character or contains
                            spaces), for example:
                            ServingCellID!="CellABC"

       LESS_THAN
                            less_than(expr1,expr2)
                            (expr1)<(expr2)
                            Returns 1 if expr1 is less than expr2, otherwise returns 0

       LESS_THAN_OR_EQUAL
                            less_than_or_equal(expr1,expr2)
                            (expr1)<=(expr2)
                            Returns 1 if expr1 is less than or equal to expr2, otherwise
                            returns 0

       LOG
                            log(expr)
                            Returns the natural log (base e) of expr

       LOG10
                            log10(expr)
                            Returns the log (base 10) of expr

       MESSAGE
                            message()
       Used internally
                            Returns the absolute current message number

       MOD
                            mod(number,divisor)
                            Returns the remainder after number is divided by divisor,
                            with the result having the same sign as divisor

       MROUND
                            mround(expr,multiple)
                            Rounds the specified number to the nearest whole multiple.
                            For example, if multiple = 3, number would be rounded to
                            whichever was the nearest out of 3, 6, 9, 12, and so on.




366 Appendix C – Expression Builder function reference      Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               Other examples:
                                expr multiple returns:
                                5       3         5
                                27      5         25
                                555     10        560

       NOT
                               not(expr)
                               !(expr)
                               Returns 1 if expr is 0, otherwise returns 0

       NULL
                               It is possible to use the expression “NULL” within queries.
                               This allows you to create queries that are empty, depending
                               on certain conditions. For example, you could create a
                               binned query with the following expression:
                               If ( attributeA > threshold , attributeB , NULL )
                               This example is equivalent to:
                               "If AttributeA is greater than the threshold, show
                               attributeB, otherwise there is no output."

       OR
                               or(expr1,expr2)
                               (expr1)||(expr2)
                               Returns 1 if expr1 or expr2 are not zero, otherwise returns 0

       POWER
                               power(expr1,expr2)
                               Returns expr1 to the power expr2

       PREV_MESSAGE_WHERE
                               prev_message_where(expr)
                               Returns the number of the last preceding message number,
                               where the value of expr is non-zero.

       PREV_STATE
                               prev_state(expr)
       Not available for Binned queries
                                Returns the value of expr where the value of the attribute is
                                the previous valid value. This is equivalent to the value of
                                state(expr) at the preceding message.



Actix A Solutions User Guide        Appendix C – Expression Builder function reference 367
       PREV_TIME_WHERE
                              prev_time_where(expr)
       Not available for Binned queries
                                Returns the relative time of the last preceding message
                                number where the value of expr is non-zero.

       PRODUCT
                              product(expr1,expr2)
                              Returns expr1 multiplied by expr2

       ROUND
                              round(expr,num_digits)
                              Rounds to the nearest number, to a specified number of
                              decimal places. If num_digits is negative, then expr is
                              rounded to the left of the decimal point by that many
                              places. For example:
                               expr       num_digits returns:
                               555.555 1                555.6
                               555.5      -1            560
                               555.555 0                556


       ROUNDDOWN
                              rounddown(expr,num_digits)
                              Rounds down to the next lowest number, to a specified
                              number of decimal places. If num_digits is negative, then
                              number is rounded down to the left of the decimal point by
                              that many places. For example:
                               expr       num_digits returns:
                               555.51     1             555.5
                               555.5      -1            550
                               555.555 0                555




368 Appendix C – Expression Builder function reference          Actix A Solutions User Guide
       ROUNDUP
                               roundup(expr,num_digits)
                               Rounds up to the next highest number, to a specified
                               number of decimal places. If num_digits is negative, then
                               exbr is rounded up to the left of the decimal point by that
                               many places. For example:
                                expr       num_digits returns:
                                555.51     1             555.6
                                555.5      -1            560
                                555.555 0                556

       ROW
                               row()
       Used internally
                               Returns the absolute current message number

       SET
                               set(attribute[],array_index,value,message)
                               set(attribute[],array_index,value)
       Used internally
                               Sets a value at the array_index position of the attribute
                               array (for the specified message number)

       STATE
                               state(expr)
       Not available for Binned queries or for queries using any PCM Link information (for
       example, A, Abis, Gb)
                                If valid, this returns the value of an expression (where the
                                value of attributes equals that at the current message),
                                otherwise it returns the last valid value

       SUBARRAY_NTH_MAX
                               subarray_nth_max(attribute[],n,range)
                               Returns the nth maximum value from an array.
                               Example:
                               subarray_nth_max(NborRxLev[],3,"-80 - -70")
                               Returns the 3rd maximum value from the NborRxLev array
                               for values between -80 and -70.




Actix A Solutions User Guide      Appendix C – Expression Builder function reference 369
       SUBARRAY_NTH_MAX_INDEX
                            subarray_nth_max_index(attribute[],n,range)
                            Returns the index of the nth maximum value from an array.
                            Example:
                            subarray_nth_max_index(NborRxLev[],3,"-80 -
                            -70")
                            Returns the index of the 3rd maximum value from the
                            NborRxLev array for values between -80 and -70.

       SUBARRAY_NTH_MIN
                            subarray_nth_min(attribute[],n,range)
                            Returns the nth minimum value from an array.
                            Example:
                            subarray_nth_min(NborRxLev[],3,"-80 - -70")
                            Returns the 3rd minimum value from the NborRxLev array
                            for values between -80 and -70.

       SUBARRAY_NTH_MIN_INDEX
                            subarray_nth_min_index(attribute[],n,range)
                            Returns the index of the nth minimum value from an array.
                            Example:
                            subarray_nth_min_index(NborRxLev[],3,"-80 -
                            -70")
                            Returns the index of the 3rd minimum value from the
                            NborRxLev array for values between -80 and -70.

       SUM
                            sum(expr1,expr2)
                            (expr1)+(expr2)
                            Returns expr1 plus expr2
                            String literals should be enclosed in quotes (not mandatory
                            unless the literal begins with numeric character or contains
                            spaces), for example:
                            ServingCellID+"CellABC"




370 Appendix C – Expression Builder function reference      Actix A Solutions User Guide
Statistic dialog
                               This dialog allows you to create a statistic based on a new
                               or existing expression, and a statistical analysis of that
                               expression – for example, the mean, median, maximum
                               value and so on.
                               The statistic is evaluated as follows:
                               Aggregation method (for example, mean) of a Statistic
                               expression, where the Filter expression is TRUE.




                               Click New and Edit to open the Expression Builder dialog.
                               To refine the aggregation method, click Filter (see Filter
                               Wizard on page 305), which opens the Filter Wizard.
                               The first example has no filter and calculates the mean of
                               every UL RxLev measurement.




Actix A Solutions User Guide      Appendix C – Expression Builder function reference 371
                            The example shown below has a filter to ensure only
                            Handover Fail messages are evaluated, and performs a
                            simple statistic expression (incrementing the count by 1 at
                            each Handover Fail message):




Binning Settings
                            This dialog defines how the data is to be averaged. If you
                            leave this dialog blank, the data will be averaged using the
                            default binning settings (which are set through Tools |
                            Preferences).




372 Appendix C – Expression Builder function reference      Actix A Solutions User Guide
The DATE Type
                               The DATE type is implemented using an 8-byte floating-
                               point number. Days are represented by whole number
                               increments starting with 30 December 1899, midnight as
                               time zero. Hour values are expressed as the absolute value
                               of the fractional part of the number. The following table
                               illustrates this:


                               Date and time                    Representation
                               30 December 1899, midnight             0.00
                               1 January 1900, midnight               2.00
                               4 January 1900, midnight               5.00
                               4 January 1900, 6 A.M.                 5.25
                               4 January 1900, noon                   5.50
                               4 January 1900, 9 P.M.                 5.875

                               So, the DATE date type, and also the COleDateTime class,
                               represent dates and times as a classic number line.
                               However, there are discontinuities for dates before 30
                               December 1899. See the following table for an illustration:


                               Date and time                    Representation
                               30 December 1899, midnight             0.00
                               29 December 1899, midnight             -1.00
                               18 December 1899, midnight            -12.00
                               18 December 1899, 6 A.M.              -12.25
                               18 December 1899, noon                -12.50
                               18 December 1899, 6 P.M.              -12.75
                               19 December 1899, midnight            -11.00




Actix A Solutions User Guide      Appendix C – Expression Builder function reference 373
Appendix D – FSD reference for custom
attributes
Overview of FSD automation model
                            A custom attribute can be written in either VBScript or
                            Jscript, so the author of the script has full access to the
                            functionality that these languages provide. Consult MSDN
                            for a guide to the language features provided by these
                            scripting languages.
                            Actix Solutions expose a number of objects that can be
                            scripted against. The FSD is composed of a number of
                            objects each containing a number of methods. The
                            interesting aspect of this model is the ability to read
                            attributes values from given messages and set new values
                            into the back end store.
                            The FSD exposes the following conceptual model: a
                            datafile / logfile consists of one or more data streams. A
                            data stream in turn consists of one or more messages. Each
                            message object can be queried for any given attribute that
                            may have been set at that message point.
                            For example, to access the attribute value for
                            ServRxLevFull at message point 34, given a reference to a
                            datastream object (see entry point definition), write the
                            following code:
       dataValue = dataStream. Item(33).Item(“ServRxLevFull”).Value


                            Here is a dataStream object (represented by the
                            IAxdFSD_DataStream interface). Calling its Item() method
                            will allow access to a given message object
                            (IAxdFSD_Message). Once the message object is at the
                            desired message index, the message can be queried for the
                            values of any attributes that may have been set at that given
                            message point.
                            Both the data stream and message object allow navigation
                            to their respective parent objects. Calling the Parent()
                            object on a message object will return back a reference to
                            the data stream which the message belongs to. Likewise,
                            requesting the parent object of a data stream will cause a
                            reference to the FSD object to be returned, as it is the FSD
                            object that contains one or more data streams.


374 Appendix D – FSD reference for custom attributes        Actix A Solutions User Guide
FSD Object
                                   The QDCFSD consists of a number of objects that a code
                                   writer scripts against. For a code writer composing custom
                                   attributes, the following objects1 are of particular interest:

        IAXDFSD_DATASTREAM
                                   This object represents a single stream from a logfile. A
                                   stream is composed of a collection of messages. All
                                   messages in Visual Basic can be iterated using the
                                   following language construct:
                          Sub Main(dataStream, attribName)
                                 ' Display EcIO value For PN 18 at each message
                                 For Each msg in dataStream
                                        ecIOValue = Msg("EcIo_For_Pn").Value(18)
                                        If ( Not IsNull(ecIOValue) ) then
                                               MsgBox CStr(ecIOValue)
                                        End if
                                        Msg(attribName).Value = 87
                                 Next
                          End Sub
                                   This displays a message box that shows the value of EcIO
                                   at each message point. It also sets the value 87 into the
                                   attribute whose name is held in the attribName variable. In
                                   most cases, you can use the stream to gain access to one or
                                   more attributes held at a given message point, then use the
                                   stream to set a value for an attribute at a given message
                                   point. The data stream object also exposes methods for
                                   creating a sub-stream, retrieving the stream type,
                                   getting/setting stream description and so on.

                                   Function Item(ByVal Index As Variant) As
                                   IAxdFSD_Message
                                   Access the message given its message number

                                   Property Get Count() As Long
                                   Number of messages

                                   Property Get Parent() As Object
                                   Gets the parent file

                                   Property Get Name() As String
                                   The stream name

                                   Property Get MessageFormats() As
                                   IXMLDOMElement
                                   Gets the format for the messages in this stream
1
  Objects and interfaces are used here interchangeable as an object can only expose a simply automation
interface (IDispatch).


Actix A Solutions User Guide             Appendix D – FSD reference for custom attributes 375
                            Property Get EventFormats() As IXMLDOMElement
                            Gets the display format for all events in this stream

                            Property Get AttributeValues(ByVal Attribute As
                            Variant) As IAxdFSD_AttributeValueList
                            Gets a collection of all the valid values of an attribute

                            Property Get MessageNumberFromTime(ByVal Time
                            As Date) As Long
                            Get the message number from the absolute time

                            Property Get FilterExpression() As String
                            The expression setting the filter for this stream

                            Property Let FilterExpression(RHS As String)
                            The expression setting the filter for this stream

                            Property Get PhysicalStream() As
                            IAxdFSD_DataStream
                            The underlying raw physical stream

                            Property Get Description() As String
                            property Description

                            Property Let Description(RHS As String)
                            property Description

                            Function CreateLogicalStream(ByVal Expression As
                            String) As IAxdFSD_DataStream
                            method CreateLogicalStream

                            Property Get _Id() As Long
                            property _Id

                            Property Get Attributes() As
                            IAxdFSD_AttributeSchema
                            property Attributes

                            Property Get TechnologyFlags() As EnumStreamTypes
                            property TechnologyFlags

                            Property Get LongName() As String
                            property LongName

                            Sub DumpAttributes(ByVal Directory As String)
                            method DumpAttributes




376 Appendix D – FSD reference for custom attributes         Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               Property Get Filters() As IAxcContainer
                               property Filters

                               Property Let Filters(RHS As IAxcContainer)
                               property Filters

       IAXDFSD_MESSAGE
                               A stream consists of one or more of these message objects.
                               Each message object represents a decoded message at a
                               given point in time. A message object can be queried for
                               the values of various attributes that may have been set at
                               that message point.
                               Sample Code:
                      Sub Main(dataStream, newAttrib)
                             Set msg = dataStream.Item(56) ‘ Get 57th message
                             AttributeCount = msg.Count
                             For I = 0 to AttributeCount-1
                                    l = Msg(i).Value
                             Next
                      End Sub
                               The code shown above simply obtains the message object
                               that represents message number 57 (note that we use a zero
                               based index - that is, 0 represents the first message). Then
                               obtain a count of the number of attributes that have been set
                               on the stream. The message object is then queried for the
                               value of each attribute that has been decoded. It should be
                               noted that only a few attributes would have been decoded
                               for a particular message.

                               Function Item(ByVal AttributeName As Variant) As
                               IAxdFSD_AttributeValue
                               Access the attribute given its name

                               Property Get Count() As Long
                               Number of attributes decoded

                               Property Get Parent() As Object
                               Get the parent AxdFSD_DataStream

                               Property Get MessageText(ByVal Flags As Long) As
                               String
                               Gets the decoded message text

                               Function EvaluateExpression(ByVal Expression As
                               String) As Variant
                               Evaluate a query expression at this message point




Actix A Solutions User Guide        Appendix D – FSD reference for custom attributes 377
                            Property Get MessageNumber() As Long
                            property MessageNumber

                            Property Get Time() As Date
                            property Time

       IAXDFSD_ATTRIBUTEVALUELIST
                            Collection of values for a given attribute.
                            Sample Code:
              Sub Main(dataStream, newAttrib)
                     Set ValueList = DataStream.AttributeValues(“Latitude”)
              End Sub

                            Function Item(ByVal Index As Variant) As
                            IAxdFSD_AttributeValue
                            Get the attribute value

                            Property Get Count() As Long
                            Number of attribute values

                            Property Get ParentStream() As IAxdFSD_DataStream
                            The parent stream for this attribute

                            Property Get Definition() As IAxdFSD_Attribute
                            The attribute definition

                            Function GetDataset(ByVal Command As String,
                            Optional ByVal Index As Variant) As IAxcDataset
                            method GetDataset

                            Property Get TagString(Optional ByVal Index As
                            Variant) As String
                            property TagString

       IAXDFSD_ATTRIBUTEVALUE
                            Each attribute value is represented by one of these objects.
                            Using this object, one can read or write to a given attribute.

                            Property Get Value(Optional ByVal Index As Variant)
                            As Variant
                            Gets the value of this attribute

                            Property Let Value(ByVal Index As Variant, RHS As
                            Variant)
                            Gets the value of this attribute




378 Appendix D – FSD reference for custom attributes        Actix A Solutions User Guide
                               Property Get Count() As Long
                               Number of array points

                               Property Get Parent() As IAxdFSD_Message
                               Get the parent message

                               Property Get FormattedValue(Optional ByVal Flags As
                               Variant, Optional ByVal Index As Variant) As String
                               Gets the value of this attribute, formatted as a string

                               Property Get Name() As String
                               The name of the attribute

                               Property Get LastValidValue(Optional ByVal Index As
                               Variant) As Variant
                               Gets the value of this attribute when it was last set

                               Property Get LastValidFormattedValue(Optional
                               ByVal Flags As Variant, Optional ByVal Index As
                               Variant) As String
                               Gets the value of this attribute when it was last set,
                               formatted as a string

       IAXDFSD_ATTRIBUTE

                               Property Get Name() As String
                               property Name

                               Property Let Name(RHS As String)
                               property Name

                               Property Get FormatGroup() As String
                               property FormatGroup

                               Property Let FormatGroup(RHS As String)
                               property FormatGroup

                               Property Get GroupString() As String
                               property GroupString

                               Property Let GroupString(RHS As String)
                               property GroupString

                               Property Get _IconId() As ULong
                               property _IconId

                               Property Get IsArray() As Boolean
                               Check whether attribute is an array type



Actix A Solutions User Guide        Appendix D – FSD reference for custom attributes 379
Enumerations
       STREAM TYPES
                            Public Enum EnumStreamTypes
                                   STREAM_TYPE_GSM_HANDSET=1
                                   STREAM_TYPE_GSM_CALLTRACE=2
                                   STREAM_TYPE_GSM_PCMLINK=4
                                   STREAM_TYPE_CDMA_HANDSET=8
                                   STREAM_TYPE_CDMA_CALLTRACE=16
                                   STREAM_TYPE_CDMA_PCMLINK=32
                                   STREAM_TYPE_IS136_HANDSET=64
                                   STREAM_TYPE_IS136_CALLTRACE=128
                                   STREAM_TYPE_IS136_PCMLINK=256
                                   STREAM_TYPE_ANALOG_HANDSET=512
                                   STREAM_TYPE_ANALOG_CALLTRACE=1024
                                   STREAM_TYPE_CW=2048
                                   STREAM_TYPE_PN_SCANNER=4096
                                   STREAM_TYPE_SPECIAL_DEVICE=8192
                                   STREAM_TYPE_AMALGAM=16384
                                   STREAM_TYPE_IDEN=32768
                                   STREAM_TYPE_TETRA=65536
                                   STREAM_TYPE_COMMON=268435456
                                   STREAM_TYPE_NONE=0
                                   STREAM_TYPE_ALL=-1
                            End Enum

       MESSAGE TEXT FORMATTING FLAGS
                            Public Enum MessageTextFlags
                                   MessageElementNone=0
                                   MessageElementRaw=1
                                   MessageElementShort=2
                                   MessageElementLong=4
                                   MessageElementTime=8
                                   MessageElementFrameCount=16
                                   MessageElementMessageNumber=32
                                   MessageElementInfoElementHeading=64
                                   MessageElementAbsoluteTime=128
                                   MessageElementDate=256
                                   MessageElementSecsTime=512
                                   MessageElementCelllookup=1024
                            End Enum



       STATISTIC TYPES
                            Public Enum StatisticTypes
                                   AtxIPM_StatisticType_Last=1
                                   AtxIPM_StatisticType_Next=2
                                   AtxIPM_StatisticType_Mean=3
                                   AtxIPM_StatisticType_Maximum=4
                                   AtxIPM_StatisticType_Minimum=5
                                   AtxIPM_StatisticType_Count=6
                                   AtxIPM_StatisticType_Mode=7
                                   AtxIPM_StatisticType_RxQual=8
                                   AtxIPM_StatisticType_Mean_Linear=9
                                   AtxIPM_StatisticType_Maximum_Absolute=10
                                   AtxIPM_StatisticType_Percent_True=11
                            End Enum




380 Appendix D – FSD reference for custom attributes    Actix A Solutions User Guide
       SUPERSTREAM METHODS
                               Public Enum SuperStreamMethod
                                      SuperStreamTypeUseDefault=0
                                      SuperStreamTypeNoMerge=1
                                      SuperStreamTypeEventFingerprinting=2
                                      SuperStreamTypeCorrelatedParameters=3
                                      SuperStreamTypeTimeOffets=4
                               End Enum




Actix A Solutions User Guide       Appendix D – FSD reference for custom attributes 381
Index
                                            array_min_index, 362
A                                           array_nth_max, 362
A General Analysis app pack, 96             array_nth_min, 362
A Handover Analysis app pack, 96            array_stdev, 362
A or Abis Scenarios, 92                     ATR file, 207
A Subscriber Analysis app pack, 97          Attribute, 166
A/Abis settings, 179                        attribute picker, 171
Abis Balance and Sensitivity app pack,      Automatic Import of network element
  98                                          data, 179
Abis Call Analysis, 94                      azimuths, 218
Abis Network Design app pack, 98
Abis Quick Analysis app pack, 97            B
Abis Traffic Handovers and Failures app     Batch Load Files, 311
  pack, 98                                  bin, 363
abs, 361                                    bin_index, 363
abstime, 361                                Binned Queries
ad hoc analysis, 21                             about, 271
add, 361                                        creating, 279
Add To Favorites, 166                           example, 280
Agilent settings, 179                       binning, 169
A-interface file standard setting, 179      binning and lines to cells, 219
Analysis, 173                               binning data, 169
Analysis Manger, 269                        Binning location, 179
Analysis reports, 173                       binning options, 171
    printing reports, 173                   Binning settings, 179
    running reports, 173                    BinOp number, 330
    saving as a web page, 173
                                            BLER, 104
and, 361
                                            Bookmarks
Annotations, 202, 229, 230                      moving between, 238
Annotations map toolbar, 230                    setting and removing, 238, 239
Application Pack, 173                       browsing network information, 313
    running an Application Pack analysis,   BSS Handover Cause by Cell report, 96
      173
                                            building expressions, 297
application packs, 84, 86
Area Select, 229
                                            C
Area Select map toolbar, 230
                                            Call Analysis, 94
Array Attributes, 355
                                            CDATA tag, 330
array_count, 361
                                            CDMA Event Detection, 27
array_find_index, 362
                                            CDMA Event Technical Reference, 28
array_max, 362
                                            CDMA StateTip, 251
array_max_index, 362                            about, 251
array_mean, 362                                 display CDMA Handset data, 251
array_min, 362                                  display CDMA PN Scanner data, 251


382 Index                                                  Actix A Solutions User Guide
CDMA Toolkit, 254                           Discarded LLC PDU Statistics report,
    about, 254                                105
Cell Identity, 179                          Display Cell Identity as Hex, 179
cell site sector printing problem, 213      display in data window, 174
Cell Sites, 229                             Display Message Browser, 236
Cell Update Table report, 105               Display on chart, 190
cellrefs, 207                               Display on Map, 198
CellRefs, 22, 24, 179                       Display on Table, 234
CellRefs - setting the file location, 179   Display on Workbook, 186
Channel Assignment by Cell report, 96       displaying a map background, 216
Channel Assignment report, 96               displaying cell coverage for all cells on
Channel Configuration report, 98              the map, 217
Channel Type report, 97                     displaying lines to cells, 211, 217
Chart Properties, 193                       displaying more information about cells
Charts, 189                                   on the map, 210, 217
    about, 189                              displaying network graphics on the map,
    displaying data in, 190                   210, 216
    editing, 193                            displaying only newly activated sites,
    exporting, 194                            303
    panning, 192
                                            displaying the LAC distribution of cell
    printing, 192
    types, 192                                sites, 218
    zooming, 191                            divide, 364
Classmark report, 97
Clear, 230                                  E
Clear Cause report, 96                      EcIo Threshold, 179
Connection Analysis by Cell report, 96      EcIo Threshold for Delay, 179
Connection Analysis report, 96              Edit Series, 198, 229
Connection Failure report, 97, 98           Edit Text, 230
correlated parameters, 177                  editing charts, 193
count statistics, 275                       editing expressions, 297
Create Network Image, 310                   editing network information, 313
Crosstab Queries                            equals, 364
    about, 271                              Error Indication Cause report, 98
    creating, 274                           eval, 364
    example, 277                            Evaluate Coverage, 261
    tips, 275                               Event Detection - CDMA, 27
cursor latitude and longitude, 210          event_before, 364
custom attribute definition files, 329      event_message, 364
Custom Attribute Manager, 329               event_time, 364
Custom Ranges, 204                          example of a Binned Query, 280
CustomAttribute tag, 330                    example of a Crosstab Query, 277
                                            example of a Filter Query, 283
D                                           example of a Histogram Query, 286
DATE type, 373                              example of a Statistic Query, 290
Decode settings, 179                        Execute at Load Time, 301
default, 363                                Export as Text, 176
delta, 363


Actix A Solutions User Guide                                              Index 383
export layers as TAB files, 216             group, 166
Export Map, 215                             GSM A application packs, 96
export MapInfo files, 216                   GSM Application Packs, 84
Export to File, 215                         GSM Missing Neighbour Analysis, 266
exporting queries, 301                      GST file, 207
Expression Builder, 297
expression syntax, 359                      H
                                            Handover Cause report, 96
F                                           Handover Fail Cause report, 98
file formats supported, 336                 Handover Messages by Cell, 96
filter the Workspace Explorer, 95           Handover Reject and Fail Causes report,
filtering data for the SiteData Viewer,      96
   233                                      Handover Settings Analysis Pack, 86
filters                                         BSS Handover Matrix report, 96
    CDMA example, 59                        Handover Statistics report, 97, 98
    GSM example, 89                         Handovers by Target report, 98
    iDEN example, 162                       Handset Performance report, 98
    IS-136 example, 136                     handset source - changing for CDMA
Filters                                       StateTip, 253
    about, 272                              Handset Types report, 97
    creating, 282                           Headers and Footers, 220
    Wizard, 305
                                            Histogram analyses
find text in the Message Browser, 238
                                                about, 272
Flow Control Statistics report, 105             creating, 285
Flush Statistics report, 105                    Wizard, 306
formats supported, 336                      histogram chart, 192
Forms, 249, 341, 342
free analysis, 21                           I
Full Load, 273                              icon reference number, 330
                                            if, 365
G                                           Image Export, 194
Gb Scenarios, 100                           Import Text File, 171
General settings, 179                       importing queries, 300
generating reports, 42, 76, 122, 151, 185   improving crosstab query efficiency, 275
geoinvprojectlat, 364                       Intermediate file settings - Agilent, 179
geoinvprojectlon, 365                       is_not_equal, 365
geoprojectx, 365
geoprojecty, 365                            L
Geosets, 207                                Label Properties dialog, 226
get, 365                                    LAC distribution - displaying, 218
GPRS Gb Signaling Analysis application      Layers, 206, 229
  pack, 105                                 Layout, 229
GPRS Gb Throughput Analysis                 Legend, 229
  application pack, 106                     Legend - exporting as a bitmap, 215
GPS Interpolation, 179                      less_than, 366
greater_than, 365                           less_than_or_equal, 366
greater_than_or_equal, 365                  Level and Interference report, 98


384 Index                                                  Actix A Solutions User Guide
Line, 230                                      offsetting multiple layers automatically,
Lines to cells, 211, 217                         208
Link Balance by DL Level report, 98            Page Setup dialog, 220
Link Balance by Timeslot report, 98            printing, 213
Link Balance Distribution report, 97, 98       Projection, 209
                                               Properties dialog, 224
Link Balance UL vs DL report, 98
                                               removing annotations from, 202
Load data file, 171                            selecting objects, 200
Load Mode - setting, 302                       showing data, 203
Load Time, 273                                 toolbar reference, 229
Load Time queries, 301                         Units, 209
Load Time queries - selecting, 302             zoom in and out, 200
Loaded Data Files, 171                     measure distances on a map, 201
loading bitmaps into a map, 216            merging data streams, 177
Loading streams into a network image,      message, 366
  312                                      Message Filtering, 239
Location Update report, 96                 Message Format, 240
log, 366                                   Microsoft Excel, 185
log10, 366                                 Microsoft Excel reports, 42, 76, 122,
                                            151, 185
M                                          Minimal Load, 18, 273
map scale, 209                             Minimum Valid Signal Level, 179
Map toolbar, 229                           MM Attach report, 105
MapInfo files - exporting, 216             MM Detach report, 105
MapInfo Geoset, 207                        MM Error Conditions report, 105
MapInfo Map, 207                           MM RA Update report, 105
MapInfo Workspace, 207                     mod, 366
Maps, 196                                  modify ranges, 203
    adding annotations to, 202             mround, 366
    adding background map files, 207       MS Power Control Analysis Pack, 86
    Annotations toolbar reference, 230     Msg Breakdown report, 105
    Area Select toolbar reference, 230     multi-layer cells, 218
    automatic offset, 208                  multi-technology cells, 218
    cell sites - displaying, 210
    changing the attribute font, 206
    changing the attribute style, 205      N
    combining data attributes, 206         Network Explorer, 313
    controlling layers, 206                    about, 313
    exporting maps, 215                        creating new cell sites, 318
    Headers and Footers - setting, 220         importing network element data, 315
    hiding data, 203                           using, 314
    Layer Control, 206                     Network Images, 309
    legend - altering the, 203                 about, 309
    Line layer properties dialog, 211          attaching, 311
    Map Layers, 206                            batch loading data, 311
    measuring distances on, 201                creating, 310
    multidimensional data, 206                 templates, 310
    New Raster, 207                        not, 367
    offsetting data, 208                   NULL, 367


Actix A Solutions User Guide                                                  Index 385
Number of Frame Errors in a Burst, 179       changing name of, 303
Number of Multipaths, 179                    deleting, 299
                                             editing, 298
O                                            exporting, 301
                                             importing, 300
Open data file, 171
                                         query windows, 307
Open Logfile, 171
Optimize Multiple Carriers, 265
Optimize Neighbor Lists, 258             R
Optimize Search Windows, 255             Radius Select, 200, 230
or, 367                                  Raster Image Registration dialog, 228
                                         ray lines, 196, 211
                                         remove bookmarks, 238
P
                                         Replay, 174
Pan (maps), 229
                                         reports, 42, 76, 122, 151, 185
pan around a map, 199
                                         Roaming by Country report, 97
panning charts, 192
                                         Roaming by Network report, 97
PCM Link data, 273
                                         round, 368
PCM Link files, 18
                                         rounddown, 368
performance limitations, 18
                                         roundup, 369
Pilot Increment, 179
                                         row, 369
Polygon, 202, 230
                                         running the GSM Mising Neighbour
Polygon Select, 200, 230
                                           Analysis, 267
Polyline, 202, 230
Poor Quality Contributors report, 98
pop-up menu - displaying, 173            S
power, 367                               Saving analysis reports as web pages,
Preferences dialog, 179                    173
prev_message_where, 367                  Scan Charts, 355
prev_state, 367                          Scan Resolution, 179
prev_time_where, 368                     Scanner Scan Resolution, 179
Print, 229                               scanner source - changing for CDMA
Print Map dialog, 223                      StateTip, 253
Print Setup dialog, 222                  Scenarios, 92, 100
printing a border round a map, 223       Scenarios - selecting, 303
Printing analysis reports, 173           Searcher Threshold, 179
printing charts, 192                     Select, 229
printing problems, 213                   Select Box, 200, 230
    cell site sectors, 213               selecting data on a map, 199
product, 368                             series chart, 192
Projection - map, 209                    series properties - editing, 348
Properties - map, 210                    Services Requested report, 96
Protocol Stack Browser, 242              set, 166, 369
    searching with, 243                  set bookmarks, 238
    starting, 242                        Sheet Manager, 165
                                         SiteData Viewer, 231
Q                                        SM Error Conditions report, 105
Quality Distribution report, 97, 98      SM PDP Context Deactivation report,
queries                                    105


386 Index                                              Actix A Solutions User Guide
SM PDP Context report, 105              TCP Traffic Type Analysis report, 106
SSS Handover Cause by Cell report, 96   template - changing for CDMA StateTip,
SSS Handover Matrix report, 96            252
state, 369                              Text, 230
StateForms, 35                          Tiled Rasters, 207
    CDMA phone, 35                      Time Charts, 342
    CDMA scanner, 35                    Time Offsets, 177, 179
    GSM, 71                             Time Offsets - setting, 179
    iDEN, 146                           Timestamps, 177
    IS-136, 117                         Timing Advance and Interference report,
StateForms (creating), 165, 339, 342,     97, 98
  348, 355                              Too Many Neighbors Threshold, 179
StateForms (using), 249                 Traffic Statistics report, 97, 98
StateForms feature, 249
Statistic analyses
    about, 272
                                        U
    creating, 288
                                        UDP Traffic Type Analysis, 106
    Wizard, 307                         user profile, 18
Statistics Explorer, 93                 users, 18
    about the, 245
    selecting queries/analyses, 247     V
    sorting by column, 247              view - changing for CDMA StateTip,
    swapping the data order, 247          252
stream, 166
Style Setting, 205                      W
subarray_nth_max, 369                   Weak EcIo Pilot Threshold, 179
subarray_nth_max_index, 370             WOR file, 207
subarray_nth_min, 370                   workbook reports, 42, 76, 122, 151
subarray_nth_min_index, 370             Workbooks, 185
substreams, 248                             about, 185
sum, 370                                    generating reports, 185
summary data - generating, 248              opening existing, 188
superstreaming PCM Link/Drive Test          saving, 188
  data, 95                                  saving queries in, 188
superstreams, 177                           view histogram data, 187
                                            view series data, 186
supported file formats, 336
                                            view statistic data, 187
Symbol, 230                             Workspaces, 165
synchronize events and messages, 237        creating new, 170
System Sensitivity report, 98               opening existing, 170
                                            saving, 170
T
TAB file, 207                           Z
TAB files, 216                          Zoom In (maps), 229
Tables                                  Zoom Out (maps), 229
    view histogram data, 235            zooming charts, 191
    view series data, 234               zooming in maps, 200
    view statistics data, 235



Actix A Solutions User Guide                                           Index 387
388 Index   Actix A Solutions User Guide